Ricoh Aficio MP 4000 Service Manual Download

Page: 959 / 1209

Bit Switches

SM 69

D346

Fax Op

tion

pe 5

000

D34

(G3 reception)

0: After receiving each page

1: After receiving all pages

the machine receives it.

1: The machine prints the complete message after

the machine receives all the pages in the memory.

5/6

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

Action when a fax SC has

occurred

0: Automatic reset

1: Fax unit stops

0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other

than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit

automatically resets itself.

1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the

fax unit stops.

Cross Reference

Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”

4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-102-001]

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Original Width of TX

Attachment File

This setting sets the maximum size of the original

that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are

reserved for future use or not used.)

0 A4

1 B4

2 A3

3-6 Reserved

Not used

0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)

If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”,

the larger size has priority. For example, if both Bit

2 and Bit 1 are set to “1” then the maximum size is

“A3” (Bit 2).

When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the

receiving machine at the destination, so the

sending machine cannot make a selection for the

receiving capabilities (original width setting) of the

receiving machine. The original width selected

with this switch is used as the RX machine’s

original width setting, and the original is reduced to

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP 4000

Page 1: ...D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 SERVICE MANUAL 003315MIU ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 SERVICE MANUAL ...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 SERVICE MANUAL 003315MIU ...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...SION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION All product names domain names or product illustrations including desktop images used in this document are trademarks registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies No such use or the use of any trade name or web site is inte...

Page 8: ......

Page 9: ...ation Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury damage to property or loss of warranty protection Ricoh Americas Corporation WARNING ...

Page 10: ......

Page 11: ...D012 MP 5000B LD050B Aficio MP 5000B 9050b D013 MP5000 LD050 Aficio MP 5000 9050 D091 17 MP 4001SP LD140SP Aficio MP 4001SP 9240SP D092 17 MP 5001SP LD150SP Aficio MP 5001SP 9250SP D091 57 MP 4001G LD140G Aficio MP 4001G 9240G D092 57 MP 5001G LD150G Aficio MP 5001G 9250G DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV NO DATE COMMENTS 01 2010 Original Printing ...

Page 12: ......

Page 13: ...ONENT LAYOUT 1 6 1 4 2 PAPER PATH 1 8 1 4 3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 9 INSTALLATION 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 2 1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 2 1 2 1 1 ENVIRONMENT 2 2 2 1 2 MACHINE LEVEL 2 3 2 1 3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS 2 3 2 1 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS 2 4 2 2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART 2 5 2 3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION 2 6 2 3 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 2 6 2 3 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 8 Preliminary Procedures 2 8 Fire Prev...

Page 14: ...4 2 5 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 24 2 6 1200 SHEET LCT D353 2 27 2 6 1 COMPONENT CHECK 2 27 2 6 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 28 2 7 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B802 2 30 2 7 1 COMPONENT CHECK 2 30 2 7 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 31 2 8 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION G329 2 35 2 9 1 BIN TRAY UNIT D389 2 36 2 9 1 COMPONENT CHECK 2 36 2 9 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 36 2 10 BRIDGE UNIT D386 2 39 2 10 1 COMPO...

Page 15: ...ray paper feed unit 2 67 For installing the tray heater in the D352 LCT 2 70 2 19 HDD OPTION D362 ONLY FOR D009 D012 2 74 2 19 1 COMPONENT CHECK 2 74 2 19 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 75 After Installing the HDD 2 76 2 20 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT 2 77 2 20 1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 77 User Tool Setting 2 78 2 21 CONTROLLER OPTIONS 2 80 2 21 1 CONTROLLER BOARD SLOTS 2 80 SD Slot 1 Slot 2 2 80 Board S...

Page 16: ... Begin the Procedure 2 98 Seal Check and Removal 2 99 Installation Procedure 2 100 2 21 11 BROWSER UNIT TYPE D 2 102 Installation Procedure 2 102 Update Procedure 2 104 2 21 12 VM CARD TYPE F D377 2 105 Accessories 2 105 Installation 2 106 2 21 13 PRINTER AND P S OPTIONS ONLY FOR D009 D012 2 106 Overview 2 106 Kit Contents 2 108 Printer Scanner Installation 2 110 Printer Enhance Scanner Enhance Op...

Page 17: ...3 4 RIGHT REAR COVER 4 5 4 3 5 OPERATION PANEL 4 6 4 3 6 PAPER EXIT COVER 4 7 4 3 7 INNER TRAY 4 8 4 4 SCANNER 1 4 9 4 4 1 EXPOSURE GLASS 4 9 4 4 2 ORIGINAL LENGTH WIDTH SENSORS 4 10 Monochrome Scanner Model D009 D012 4 10 Color Scanner Model D011 D013 D091 D092 4 11 4 4 3 EXPOSURE LAMP 4 11 Color Scanner Model D011 D013 D091 D092 4 11 Monochrome Scanner Model D009 D012 4 13 4 4 4 SCANNER MOTOR 4 ...

Page 18: ...TION DETECTOR 4 28 4 6 5 LD UNIT 4 29 Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment 4 29 4 7 PCDU 4 32 4 7 1 PCDU PHOTOCONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 32 Reinstallation 4 32 4 7 2 DRUM 4 33 Re installation 4 35 4 7 3 PICK OFF PAWLS 4 36 Pick off Pawl Position Adjustment 4 36 4 7 4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER 4 37 4 7 5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 1 4 38 Re installation 4 38 4 7 6 ID SENSOR 4 39 4 8 DEVELOPMENT 4 40 ...

Page 19: ...4 11 2 WEB ROLLER UNIT 4 57 4 11 3 BRAKE PAD 4 57 4 11 4 WEB HOLDER ROLLER AND WEB ROLLERS 4 58 Installing a new web holder roller 4 60 Installing new web rollers 4 60 4 11 5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER 4 61 4 11 6 THERMOSTAT 4 62 4 11 7 THERMISTOR 4 63 4 11 8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS 4 64 4 11 9 FUSING LAMPS 4 65 4 11 10 HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER 4 66 4 12 PAPER EXIT 4 67 4 12 1 PAPER EXIT U...

Page 20: ...2 Tray 1 and Tray 2 4 82 4 15 2 DEVELOPMENT PADDLE MOTOR 4 83 4 15 3 TRANSFER DEVELOPMENT MOTOR 4 83 4 15 4 DRUM MOTOR 4 84 4 15 5 FUSING MOTOR 4 84 4 15 6 WEB MOTOR 4 85 4 15 7 PAPER FEED MOTOR 4 85 4 15 8 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR 4 86 4 15 9 REGISTRATION MOTOR 4 86 4 15 10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR 4 87 4 16 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4 88 4 16 1 CONTROLLER UNIT 4 88 4 16 2 HDD UNIT STANDARD FOR D011 D01...

Page 21: ...2 PRINTING 4 97 Registration Leading Edge Side to Side 4 97 Blank Margin 4 99 Main Scan Magnification 4 100 Parallelogram Image Adjustment 4 100 4 17 3 SCANNING 4 101 Registration Platen Mode 4 102 Magnification 4 102 4 17 4 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 4 103 Registration 4 103 4 17 5 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 4 104 SERVICE TABLES 5 SERVICE TABLES 5 1 5 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 5 1 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE...

Page 22: ...5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD DOWNLOAD 5 19 5 5 1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA SP5 824 5 19 5 5 2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA SP5 825 5 19 5 6 SD CARD APPLI MOVE 5 20 5 6 1 OVERVIEW 5 20 Use caution when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure 5 20 5 6 2 MOVE EXEC 5 21 5 6 3 UNDO EXEC 5 22 5 7 SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 5 23 5 7 1 SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON 5 23 5 7 2 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST FLOW 5 24 5 7 3 DETAILED SELF D...

Page 23: ...ING 7 ENERGY SAVING 7 1 7 1 ENERGY SAVE 7 1 7 1 1 ENERGY SAVER MODES 7 1 Timer Settings 7 1 Return to Stand by Mode 7 2 Recommendation 7 2 7 1 2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS 7 3 7 2 PAPER SAVE 7 5 7 2 1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX COMBINE FUNCTION 7 5 1 Duplex 7 5 2 Combine mode 7 5 3 Duplex Combine 7 6 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES SEE D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 SERVICE MANU...

Page 24: ...ED TABLE OF CONTENTS B838 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION TYPE 4045 SEE SECTION B838 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D346 FAX OPTION TYPE 5000 SEE SECTION D346 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D351 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3040 SEE SECTION D351 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D352 LCT PB3050 SEE SECTION D352 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D353 1200 SHEET LCIT RT3000 SEE SECTION D353 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTEN...

Page 25: ...SM xiii D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 D386 BRIDGE UNIT BU3030 SEE SECTION D386 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D389 1 BIN TRAY BN3040 SEE SECTION D389 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Page 26: ......

Page 27: ...00 REPLACEMENT ADJUSTMENT APPENDIX SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES B408 1000 SHEET FINISHER SR790 B804 B805 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3020 FINISHER SR3030 D381 PRINTER SCANNER OPTION TYPE 5000 B838 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION TYPE 4045 SERVICE TABLES APPENDIX SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES TROUBLESHOOTING D389 1 BIN TRAY BN3040 ENERGY SAVING D386 BRIDGE UNIT BU3030 TAB POSITION 2 TAB POSITION 1 TAB POSITION 3 ...

Page 28: ......

Page 29: ...the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively keep hands away from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts making copies as soon as the warm up period is completed 6 The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands To prevent a fire or explosi...

Page 30: ...al attention If toner is swallowed drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner If there are signs of any problem seek medical attention If toner spills on clothing wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water Never use hot water Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer pack...

Page 31: ...ser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Turn off the main switch before attempting...

Page 32: ...to Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E ring SEF Short Edge Feed LEF Long Edge Feed Cautions Notes etc The following headings provide special information FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine ...

Page 33: ...PRODUCT INFORMATION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 34: ......

Page 35: ...Specifications SM 1 1 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Product Information 1 PRODUCT INFORMATION 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS See Appendices for the following information General Specifications Optional Equipment ...

Page 36: ... 1 COPIER Key Symbol U Unique option C Option also used with other products Item Callout Key Machine Code Copier D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 1 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 ARDF See Note 1 3 C B802 Platen Cover See Note 1 2 C G329 Two Tray Paper Feed Unit 6 C D351 2000 sheet LCT 5 C D352 ...

Page 37: ... 2 8 C B804 B805 Punch Unit See Note 3 C B702 17 2 3 hole US Punch Unit See Note 3 C B702 27 2 4 hole Metric Punch Unit See Note 3 C B702 28 4 hole Scandinavia Key Counter Bracket C A674 HDD for D009 D012 only U D362 DataOverwriteSecurity U D362 Copy Data Security Unit C B829 HDD Encryption Unit C D377 Scanner Accessibility Option C B838 Fax Fax Option for D009 D011 D012 D013 U D346 G3 Interface U...

Page 38: ...gabit Ethernet C G874 IEEE 1284 C B679 IEEE 802 11a g g Wireless LAN C D377 Bluetooth C B826 Memory Unit 256 MB U D362 File Format Converter C D377 NOTE 1 The ARDF and platen cover cannot be installed together 2 The finisher requires the bridge unit and two tray paper feed unit or 2000 sheet LCT The 1000 sheet finisher and 2000 3000 sheet Booklet finisher cannot be installed together 3 The punch u...

Page 39: ...IAR WITH PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS The D091 D092 series are successor models to the D009 D011 D012 D013 series If you have experience with the predecessor products the following information will be of help when you read this manual Different Points from Predecessor Products D091 D092 D009 D011 D012 D013 Scanner Color only Color and B W VM Card Standard Option ...

Page 40: ...D013 D091 D092 1 6 SM 1 4 OVERVIEW 1 4 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Exposure Glass 22 By pass Feed Roller 2 2nd Mirror 23 By pass Separation Roller 3 1st Mirror 24 Duplex by pass transport roller 4 Exposure Lamp 25 Upper Relay Roller ...

Page 41: ...31 Charge Roller 11 Duplex Inverter Gate 32 Fθ Mirror 12 Duplex Entrance Sensor 33 Barrel Toroidal Lens BTL 13 Duplex Inverter Roller 34 Polygonal Mirror Motor 14 Hot Roller 35 Laser Unit 15 Pressure Roller 36 Toner Bottle Holder 16 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 37 Junction Gate 1 17 Duplex Transport Roller 38 Exit Roller 18 Transfer Belt 39 Paper Exit Sensor 19 OPC Drum 40 3rd Mirror 20 Registrati...

Page 42: ...D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 1 8 SM 1 4 2 PAPER PATH 1 ARDF 2 Interchange Unit 3 Duplex Unit 4 By pass Tray 5 Large Capacity Tray LCT 1200 sheet 6 Paper Tray Unit 7 Two Tray Finisher 8 Bridge Unit 9 1 Bin Tray ...

Page 43: ...Overview SM 1 9 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Product Information 1 4 3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...

Page 44: ... Feed Motor 3 Web Motor 12 By pass Paper Feed Clutch 4 Transfer Development Motor 13 Registration Motor 5 Drum Motor 14 Duplex By pass Motor 6 Development Paddle Motor 15 Transfer Belt Contact Motor 7 Tray Lift Motor 1 16 Duplex Inverter Motor 8 Tray Lift Motor 2 17 Paper Exit Motor 9 Paper Feed Clutch 2 ...

Page 45: ...lation firmware versions installed 98 03 09 2012 Updated DataOverWrite Security 101 03 09 2012 Updated DataOverWrite Security 102 106 06 14 2011 Updated Browser Unit type D D377 17 102 103 10 12 2011 Important note Browser Unit type D D377 17 105 03 09 2012 Updated VM Card Type F D009 Series only ...

Page 46: ......

Page 47: ...er LED to go off and then switch the main power switch off Install the machine in a safe place for keeping security Make sure that the operation instructions are kept at a customer s hand The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory...

Page 48: ...m3 2 7 x 10 6 oz yd3 1 Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes 1 Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner 2 Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater 2 Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases 3 Do not install the machine at any location over 2 000 m 6 500 ft above sea level 4 Place the main machine on a strong and level base Inclination o...

Page 49: ...m 0 2 of level 2 1 3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS Place the main machine near the power source providing clearance as shown A Front 75 cm 29 6 B Left 10 cm 4 C Rear 10 cm 4 D Right 55 cm 21 7 The 75 cm 29 6 recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the paper tray only If the operator stands at the front of the main machine more space is required ...

Page 50: ...in machine and easily accessible Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet Avoid multi wiring Be sure to ground the machine 1 Input voltage level North America 120 V 60 Hz More than 12 5 A Europe Asia 220 V to 240V 50 Hz 60 Hz more than 6 8 A 2 Permissible voltage fluctuation 10 to 15 3 Never set anything on the power cord ...

Page 51: ...13 D091 D092 Installation 2 2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently Bridge Unit Needed for the finishers Paper Tray Unit or LCT 2000 sheet Needed for the LCT 1200 sheet and finishers ...

Page 52: ...ference 17 19 21 29 1 3 Operation Instruction Troubleshooting 17 19 29 1 1 4 Operation Instruction About This Machine 17 19 29 1 1 5 Quick Reference Guide Copy 29 1 6 Quick Reference Guide Printer 29 1 7 Quick Reference Guide Scanner 29 1 8 Quick Reference Guide App 2 Me 17 19 29 1 9 CD ROM Instruction 17 29 1 10 CD ROM Printer Instruction for D011 D013 only 17 27 28 29 1 11 CD ROM Scanner Instruc...

Page 53: ...pp 2 Me 17 19 29 1 16 CD ROM SDK 17 19 27 29 1 17 CD ROM P2600 17 19 27 29 1 18 CD ROM Driver 19 only 1 19 Model Name Decal 17 29 1 1 20 Emblem Cover 1 1 21 Stamp 17 1 1 22 Cloth Holder 1 1 23 Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth 1 1 24 Operating Instructions Holder 1 1 25 Ferrite Core 1 1 26 Rivet 1 1 27 Power Supply Cord 1 1 28 Decal Paper Tray 1 1 29 Decal Caution Original 17 1 1 30 Sheet EULA 16 Lang...

Page 54: ... or the optional LCT at the same time Then install the machine and other options Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine You may need them in the future if you transport the machine to another location 1 Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine 2 Remove all the tapes and retainers in trays 1 and 2 and then take out the power cord from tray 1 if applicable 3 Remove the sc...

Page 55: ...o change the emblem that has been already attached remove the panel with a small screwdriver as shown 7 and then install the correct emblem 9 Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays 8 Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper feed unit or LCT Keep these decals for use with these optional units 10 Pull out the feeler 9 for the output tray...

Page 56: ... floor without the optional paper tray unit or a table the cover 1 must be attached to the copier Install the cover 1 at the right side of the copier PCDU Photoconductor and Development Unit 1 Open the front door 2 Open the right door 1 3 Release the lock lever 2 4 Pull out the PCDU 3 and place it on a clean flat surface ...

Page 57: ...ation 5 Remove the two stoppers 4 6 Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface Make sure the area is free of pins paper clips staples etc to avoid attraction to the magnetic development roller 7 Remove the opening cap 5 and then install it in the opening 6 of the PCDU ...

Page 58: ...e entrance seal plate 7 x 2 10 Remove the development roller unit 8 and set it on the paper 11 Pour the developer 9 into the development unit The developer lot number is embossed on the end of the developer package Do not discard the package until you have recorded the lot number p 4 43 Developer ...

Page 59: ...he top of the unit 12 Put the opening cap 4 back in its original place 13 Reassemble the PCDU 14 Re install the PCDU Toner Bottle 1 Open the front door 2 Turn the toner bottle holder lever 1 counterclockwise push down the lever 2 and then pull out the toner bottle holder 3 3 Hold the toner bottle 5 horizontally and shake it 5 or 6 times 4 Unscrew the bottle cap 4 and set the bottle 5 in the holder...

Page 60: ...dure to load paper in the 2nd paper tray Initialize TD Sensor and Developer 1 Connect the main machine to the power outlet switch on the main machine and wait for the fusing unit to warm up 2 Enter Copy SP Mode 3 Press SP Direct to highlight SP Direct enter 2801 and then press 4 When the message prompts you to enter the lot number of the developer enter the 7 digit lot number press Yes and then pr...

Page 61: ...r each tray installed 7 Press Exit twice to return to the main display The 1st 2nd 3rd and 4th paper trays are provided with the paper size switches The detected paper size by the paper size switches has priority over the UP settings However if you change the Auto Detect with the UP setting you can select the paper size 8 Check the copy quality and machine operation Electrical Total Counter The el...

Page 62: ...aner 2 inside the holder The exposure glass cleaner is used to clean the ARDF exposure glass the glass strip to the left of the large exposure glass Operation Instructions Holder 1 Attach the operation instructions holder 1 to the left side of the copier snap rivet x 2 2 If a finisher has been installed attach the operation instructions holder 2 to the rear side of the finisher snap rivet x 2 ...

Page 63: ...4 5812 002 programs the service station fax number The number is printed on the counter list when the meter charge mode is selected This lets the user fax the counter data to the service station App 2 Me Setting D091 D092 only D091 D092 models have VM Card including App 2 Me provider by default Do the following procedure if a customer want to use the App 2 Me 1 Press User Tools key on the operatio...

Page 64: ...rd 8 Prepare newer App 2 Me Provider zip file from Firmware Download Center Unzip the zip file The folder name is 337051920 And then copy the App 2 Me Provider folder in the specified path of VM card The path is SD_Card Drive sdk dsdk dist 337051920 as shown above 9 Turn the SD card label face to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a click 10 Turn on the main pow...

Page 65: ... it a longer distance 1 Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT 2 3 4 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE 1 Do SP 4806 001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position This prevents dust from falling into the machine during transportation 2 Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of paper and tape 3 Do one of the following Atta...

Page 66: ...g bracket 2 2 Screw M4x10 2 3 Spring Washer Screw 1 4 Knob screw 3 2 4 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause injury or property damage Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit ins...

Page 67: ...ion 1 Remove all tape on the paper feed unit 2 Remove the paper trays and remove all tape and padding 3 Grasp the handle 1 and grips 2 of the machine 4 Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit 3 Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine ...

Page 68: ...ed Unit Installation D351 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 2 22 SM 5 Remove the tray 1 and 2 of the machine 6 Fasten the Spring Washer Screw 4 7 Reinstall all trays 8 Attach the securing brackets 5 x 1 each M4x10 ...

Page 69: ...ng tool the cutout 6 is used in step 6 But the cutout 7 is for attaching the tray heater Therefore attach the securing brackets 5 after installing the tray heater if you install the tray heater 9 Load paper into the paper feed unit 10 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 11 Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality ...

Page 70: ... M4x10 2 3 Spring washer screw 1 4 Knob screw 3 2 5 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause injury or property damage Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed The handle a...

Page 71: ...3 D091 D092 Installation 1 Remove all tapes and retainers in the LCT 2 Grasp the handle 1 and grips 2 of the machine 3 Lift the copier and install it on the LCT 3 Hold the handle 1 and grips 2 of the machine when you lift and move the machine ...

Page 72: ...ets 5 x 1 each M4x10 One of the securing brackets is used as a securing tool the cutout 6 is used in step 5 But the cutout 7 is for attaching the tray heater Therefore attach the securing brackets 2 after installing the tray heater if you install the tray heater 8 Load paper into the LCT 9 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 10 Check the LCT operation and copy quality ...

Page 73: ... D013 D091 D092 Installation 2 6 1200 SHEET LCT D353 2 6 1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Front Bracket 1 2 Rear Bracket 1 3 Stud Screw 4 4 Joint Pin 2 5 LCT 1 ...

Page 74: ...owing procedure The Paper Tray Unit D351 or LCT 2000 sheet D352 must be installed before installing this 1200 sheet LCT 1 Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes 2 Remove the stand covers 1 3 Release the locks 2 of the front and rear caster stands 4 Remove the caster stands 3 5 Remove the paper path cover 4 connector cover 5 and the six hole cover 6 ...

Page 75: ... Attach the front 8 and rear brackets 9 8 Pull out the front and rear rails 10 and then hang them on each bracket 11 9 Connect the LCT cable 12 to the main machine 10 Slide the LCT 13 into the main machine 11 Make sure that the front and rear sides of the LCT are closely attached to the main machine ...

Page 76: ... 30 SM 2 7 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B802 2 7 1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 ARDF 1 2 Attention Decal Sheet Top Cover 1 3 Stamp 1 4 Knob Screw 2 5 Stud Screw 2 6 Platen Sheet 1 ...

Page 77: ...INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove the all tapes and shipping retainers 2 Insert the two stud screws 1 on the top of the machine 3 Mount the ARDF 2 by aligning the screw keyholes 3 of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws ...

Page 78: ...DF with the two knob screws 4 6 Remove two screws 5 form the bottom of the ARDF 7 Remove all tapes on the ARDF 8 Place the platen sheet 6 on the exposure glass 9 Align the rear left corner of the platen sheet with the corner 7 on the exposure glass 10 Close the ARDF 11 Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached ...

Page 79: ...2 SM 2 33 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 12 Open the ARDF cover 8 13 Open the feed in guide plate 9 and feed out guide plate 10 14 Install the stamp 11 into the ARDF 15 Close two guide plates 10 9 16 Close the ARDF cover 8 ...

Page 80: ...nt 18 Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine and then check the ARDF operation 19 Make a full size copy Check that the registrations side to side and leading edge and image skew are correct If they are not adjust the registrations and image skew referring to the Copy Adjustments in the section of the Replacements and Adjustments ...

Page 81: ...5 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 2 8 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION G329 1 Install screws 1 x 2 on the top cover as shown 2 Position the platen cover bracket 2 on the heads of the stud screws and slide the platen cover 3 to the left ...

Page 82: ...owing list No Description Q ty 1 1 Bin Tray Unit 1 2 End fence 1 3 Tray Support Bar 1 4 Screws M3 x 16 3 5 Tray 1 2 9 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure If the bridge unit D386 has already been installed on the machine remove it before installing 1 bin tray unit D389 This makes it easy to do the following procedure ...

Page 83: ...D091 D092 Installation 1 Remove all tapes 2 Open the right door of the machine 3 Remove the front right cover 1 x 1 4 Remove the paper exit cover 2 x 1 Keep this screw for step 5 5 Install the 1 bin tray unit 3 x 1 x 1 This screw was removed in step 4 ...

Page 84: ...ray 5 as shown and then attach the end fence 6 7 Install the tray 7 with the tray support bar on the machine x 3 M3 x 16 8 Reinstall the front right cover on the machine and then close the right door of the machine 9 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 10 Check the 1 bin tray unit operation ...

Page 85: ...owing list No Description Q ty 1 Bridge Unit 1 2 Knob screw 1 3 Long Knob Screw 1 4 Holder bracket 1 5 Guide 2 2 10 2INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure If you will install the 1 bin tray D389 on the machine install the 1 bin tray first before installing the bridge unit D386 This makes it easy to do the following procedure ...

Page 86: ...08 B804 or B805 on the machine install it after installing the bridge unit D386 1 Remove all tapes 2 If the sensor feeler 1 is out fold it into the machine 3 Open the right door of the machine 4 Remove the upper inner tray 2 5 Remove the front right cover 3 x 1 6 Remove the connector cover 4 x 1 ...

Page 87: ... 2 41 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 7 Attach the two guides 5 to the cutouts 6 in the inner tray 8 Install the bridge unit 7 in the machine 9 Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw 8 and knob screw 9 ...

Page 88: ...unit cover 10 when installing the front right cover Otherwise you cannot reinstall it 11 Install the optional finisher refer to the finisher installation procedure Holder bracket 11 is used in the installation procedure of the finisher B408 B804 or B805 Do not install it at this time 12 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 13 Check the bridge unit operation ...

Page 89: ... No Description Q ty 1 Rear joint bracket 1 2 Front joint bracket 1 3 Ground earth plate 1 4 Tapping screws M4 x14 4 5 Tapping screws M3 x 8 1 6 Tapping screws M3 x 6 2 B804 or 6 B805 1 7 Upper output tray 1 8 Support Tray 1 9 Lower output tray B804 only 1 10 Cushion with double sided tape 1 11 Small ground earth plate B805 only 2 2 1 Four of these six screws are not used for this model 2 Item No ...

Page 90: ... main machine power cord before starting the following procedure If this finisher is installed on this machine the following options must be installed before installing this finisher Bridge Unit D886 Paper Feed Unit D351 or LCT D352 1 Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher ...

Page 91: ...04 B805 SM 2 45 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 2 Open the front door and then remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the finisher 3 Pull out the jogger unit 1 and then remove all tapes and retainers ...

Page 92: ...the cushion 2 to the finisher Make sure that the cushion is placed within 0 to 1 mm from the edge of the cover 5 Install the ground plate 3 on the finisher x 2 M3 x 6 6 Attach the rear joint bracket 4 x 2 M4 x 14 7 Attach the front joint bracket 5 and the holder bracket 6 x 2 M4 x 14 ...

Page 93: ...t D386 8 Pull the lock lever 7 x 1 9 Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine keeping its front door open until the brackets 4 5 go into their slots 10 Push the lock lever 7 and then secure it x 1 11 Close the front door of the finisher 12 Connect the finisher connector 8 to the machine 13 Install the upper output tray 9 x 1 M3 x 8 14 Only for B804 install the lower output tray 10 ...

Page 94: ...the main power switch of the machine 16 Check the finisher operation Support Tray Installation If a stacking problem occurs several times on the upper output tray 1 put the support tray 2 on the tray as shown Keep this tray in the manual pocket if this tray does not need to be installed ...

Page 95: ...lled in the 2000 3000 Sheet Booklet Finisher B804 B805 2 12 1COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Punch out Waste Unit 1 2 Slide Drive Unit 1 3 Punch Waste Hopper 1 4 Screws M3 x 6 5 5 Side to Side Detection Unit 1 6 Punching Unit 1 ...

Page 96: ...t finisher has been installed disconnect it and pull it away from the machine 1 If the finisher is connected to the copier disconnect the power connector 1 and move the finisher away from the copier 2 Remove the rear cover 2 x 2 and open the front door At the bottom of the rear cover make sure to disconnect the tabs that attach the cover to the frame 3 Remove the guide plate 3 x 2 ...

Page 97: ...ctly at the front and rear 6 Connect the cables 6 of the finisher to the connectors CN601 and CN602 on the punch unit board x 2 x 1 The cables 6 are coiled and attached to the PCB 7 Attach the slide drive unit 7 to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit x 2 x 1 Push in the slide drive unit at when you attach the screw 8 Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the sc...

Page 98: ...ide to side detection unit and connect it at the rear x 2 x 1 x 1 12 Pull the short connector 9 out of the connector 10 then connect the cable 10 of the finisher x 1 This is the 3 pin connector 13 At the front use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part 11 of the cover 14 Install the punch waste transport unit 12 in the finisher 15 Make sure that the punch waste transport unit moves smoothly on ...

Page 99: ...17 Connect the cable 14 and attach the punch waste transport unit x 1 x 1 x 1 18 Set the hopper 15 in its holder 19 Reassemble the finisher and then install it on the main machine 20 Connect the power cord to the outlet and then turn the main power switch on 21 Check the punch unit operation ...

Page 100: ...and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty For this model 1 Front Joint Bracket 1 2 Screw M4 x 14 4 Use 4 3 Knob Screw M4 x 10 1 4 Copy Tray 1 5 Knob Screw M3 x 8 1 6 Screw M3 x 8 1 7 Rear Joint Bracket 1 8 Grounding Plate 1 9 Staple Position Decal 1 10 Rear Joint Bracket 1 Necessary Not necessary ...

Page 101: ... is installed the Bridge Unit D386 and Paper Feed Unit D351 or LCT D352 must be installed before installing this finisher 1 Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes Be sure to keep screw 1 shown at the top left drawing above It will be needed to secure the grounding plate later in this procedure 2 Install the front joint bracket 2 holder bracket 3 x 2 M4 x 14 and rear joint bracket 4 x 2 M4 x 14 ...

Page 102: ...on the finisher x 2 M3 x 8 Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box 4 Open the front door 6 then pull the locking lever 7 5 Align the finisher on the joint brackets and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever 6 Secure the locking lever 1 knob screw M3 x 8 7 Close the front door 8 Install the copy tray 8 1 knob screw M4 x 10 9 Connect the finisher cable 9 to the ma...

Page 103: ...1000 Sheet Finisher B408 SM 2 57 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 10 Attach the staple position decal 10 to the ARDF as shown 11 Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation ...

Page 104: ... COUNTER BRACKET 2 14 1INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Hold the key counter plate nuts 1 on the inside of the key counter bracket 2 and insert the key counter holder 3 2 Secure the key counter holder to the bracket x 2 3 Install the key counter cover 4 x 2 4 Rear cover 5 x 5 ...

Page 105: ...D091 D092 Installation 5 Cut off the part 6 of the rear cover 6 Connect the harness to CN211 7 on the IOB x 3 7 Peel off the double sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner right cover 8 8 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 106: ...1 D012 D013 D091 D092 2 60 SM 2 15 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT 2 15 1INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Rear cover 1 x 3 2 Install the key counter interface board in the location 2 x 4 3 Connect the harness to CN3 on the key counter interface board ...

Page 107: ...Installation 4 Connect the other terminal of the harness to CN214 3 on the IOB x 3 5 Cut off the part 4 of the rear cover 6 Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on the key counter interface board and clamp it with three clamps 5 7 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 108: ...er see ARDF or Platen Cover in the Installation section 2 Rear cover p 4 4 3 ARDF exposure glass and exposure glass with left scale p 4 9 4 Scanner rear frame p 4 13 5 Move the scanner carriage 1 to the right side by rotating the scanner motor 6 Install the heater 2 in the scanner unit x 2 x 1 7 Put the cable through the cutout 3 8 Release the heater relay cable 4 x 1 ...

Page 109: ...ndensation Heater Scanner SM 2 63 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 9 Route the heater relay cable 5 as shown x 3 10 Connect the heater cable 6 to the heater relay cable x 1 11 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 110: ...SM 2 17 TRAY HEATER 2 17 1INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine 2 Connect the connector 1 of the heater to the connector 2 of the main machine 3 Install the heater 3 inside the machine x 1 4 Remove the connector cover 4 x 1 ...

Page 111: ...er SM 2 65 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 5 Release the heater relay connector 5 x 1 6 Connect the heater relay connector to the connector 6 front side of the main frame x 1 7 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 112: ...12 D013 D091 D092 2 66 SM 2 18 TRAY HEATER OPTIONAL PAPER FEED UNIT 2 18 1COMPONENT CHECK No Description Q ty 1 Tray heater 1 2 On standby decal 1 90 or 2 91 3 Harness 2 For G832 1 4 Harness 1 For B800 B801 1 5 Screw M4 x 10 2 Installation procedure 1 ...

Page 113: ...he following procedure For installing the tray heater in the D351 Two tray paper feed unit 1 Remove the rear cover of the mainframe x 6 2 Pull out the two trays from the optional paper feed unit 3 Install the tray heater 1 in the optional paper feed unit x 1 4 Remove the two securing brackets 2 x 1 each and then the rear cover 3 of the optional paper feed unit x 2 ...

Page 114: ... from the mainframe 6 Replace the shoulder screw 4 with the washer screw 5 using the securing bracket 6 x 1 7 Connect the harness 7 to the connector 8 of the tray heater 8 Route the harness 7 as shown and clamp it with four clamps x 4 9 Connect the harness 7 to the connector 9 of the mainframe ...

Page 115: ...ctor cover 10 x 1 11 Release the optional heater relay connector 11 x 1 12 Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector 12 rear side of the main frame x 1 13 Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit 14 Attach the on standby decal 13 to the right hand side of the main power switch ...

Page 116: ...ver of the mainframe x 6 2 Pull out the LCT drawer If the right tray comes out with the left tray push the right tray into the LCT 3 Left tray A x 2 4 Remove the right tray 2 while pressing down the stopper 3 When reinstalling the right tray set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray in making sure to keep the tray level ...

Page 117: ...t SM 2 71 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 5 Install the tray heater 4 in the optional LCT x 1 6 Remove the two securing brackets 5 x 1 each and then the rear cover 6 of the optional LCT x 2 7 Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe ...

Page 118: ...r screw 7 with the washer screw 8 using the securing bracket 9 x 1 9 Connect the harness 10 to the connector 11 of the tray heater 10 Route the harness 10 as shown and clamp it with four clamps x 4 11 Connect the harness 10 to the connector 12 of the mainframe 12 Remove the connector cover 13 x 1 ...

Page 119: ...tion 13 Release the optional heater relay connector 14 x 1 14 Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector 15 rear side of the main frame x 1 15 Reassemble the mainframe and optional LCT 16 Attach the on standby decal 16 to the right hand side of the main power switch ...

Page 120: ... D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 2 74 SM 2 19 HDD OPTION D362 ONLY FOR D009 D012 2 19 1COMPONENT CHECK No Description Q ty For D009 D012 1 HDD Unit 1 2 Screw 3 3 Keytop Copy 2 Keytop Document Server 2 Knob Screw 3 Necessary Not necessary ...

Page 121: ...tallation 2 19 2INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Remove the controller board 1 x 2 2 Install the HDD unit 2 in the controller board x 3 3 Reinstall the controller board in the machine 4 Remove the dummy keytops top and second from the top 5 Install the copy and document server keytops ...

Page 122: ...Do SP5832 001 to format the hard disk 2 Do SP5853 001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk 3 Do SP5846 040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controller board 4 Do SP5846 041 to let the user get access to the address book 5 Turn the main power switch off on ...

Page 123: ... SM 2 77 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 2 20 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT 2 20 1INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure 1 Rear cover 1 x 6 2 Controller unit 2 x 2 ...

Page 124: ...e ICIB 1 copy data security board to CN 111 4 on the BICU x 2 5 Reassemble the machine User Tool Setting 1 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 2 Go into the User Tools mode and select System Settings Administrator Tools Data Security for Copying On 3 Exit the User Tools 4 Check the operation ...

Page 125: ...ON When you remove this option from the machine first set the setting to OFF with the user tool before removing this board If you forget to do this Data Security for Copying feature cannot appear in the user tool settings And then SC165 will appear every time the machine is switched on and the machine cannot be used 5 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option Check All Connections at the...

Page 126: ...ntroller box has one board slot and two SD card slots Make sure that each board and SD card is put in the correct slot The names of the slots for the board and SD cards are embossed on the face of the controller plate SD Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot SD Card 1 RPCS Printer Unit Printer Unit Printer Scanner Unit Data Overwrite Security ...

Page 127: ...ling the optional browser unit VM card or HDD encryption unit Moving applications to an SD card in slot 1 Downloading uploading NVRAM contents Board Slot Slot Board 3 File Format Converter MLB D377 Bluetooth Interface Unit B826 IEEE 802 11a g g D377 IEEE 1284 Interface Board B679 Gigabit Ethernet G874 Only one of these boards can be installed at one time ...

Page 128: ...uetooth 1 Remove the slot cover 1 from the board slot x 2 2 Install the interface board Knob screw x 2 into the board slot 3 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 2 21 3IEEE 802 11A G G WIRELESS LAN Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the follow...

Page 129: ...his section 4 Peel off the double sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners 2 and then attach them 2 at the front left and rear right of the machine 5 Attach the ANT1 having a black ferrite core to the front left of the machine 6 Attach the ANT2 having a white ferrite core to the rear right of the machine ANT1 is a transmission reception antenna and ANT2 is a reception antenna Do not attach them at the ...

Page 130: ...t must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN 3 Select Interface Settings 4 Press Wireless LAN Only the wireless LAN options show 5 Communication Mode Select either 802 11 Ad hoc Ad hoc or Infrastructure 6 SSID Setting Enter the SSID setting The setting is case sensitive 7 Channel You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected Range 1 to 14 default 11 The allowed range for the channel sett...

Page 131: ...s the distance between the machine and the closest PC in the network For the Infrastructure Mode this is the distance between the machine and the closest access point 11 Mbps 140 m 153 yd 5 5 Mbps 200 m 219 yd 2 Mbps 270 m 295 yd 1 Mbps 400 m 437 yd 10 Press Return to Default to initialize the wireless LAN settings Press Yes to initialize the following settings Transmission mode Channel Transmissi...

Page 132: ...the maximum range of the channel settings for the country 5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your country 5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00 UP mode Name Function SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be...

Page 133: ...2 11a g g Wireless LAN IEEE1284 IEEE1394 Bluetooth 1 Remove the slot cover 1 from the board Slot x 2 2 Install the Bluetooth board Knob screw x 2 into the board slot 3 Insert the Bluetooth card into the Bluetooth card adaptor 4 Attach the antenna cap to the Bluetooth card 5 Install the Bluetooth card adaptor into the Bluetooth board 6 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check A...

Page 134: ...owing network interfaces at one time IEEE 802 11a g g Wireless LAN IEEE1284 IEEE1394 Bluetooth 1 Remove the slot cover 1 from the board slot x 2 2 Insert the Gigabit Ethernet Board into the I F slot and fasten it with the screws 3 Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board for USB2 0 User Tools Printer Features List Test Print Configuration Page ...

Page 135: ...t x 2 2 Install the file format converter into the board slot and then fasten it with screws 3 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 4 Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below SP No Title Setting SP5 836 001 Capture Function 0 Off 1 On 1 SP5 836 002 Panel Setting 0 5 Check the operation 6 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option Check All Connections at the en...

Page 136: ...ocedure 1 Remove the slot cover 1 x 1 2 Turn the SD card label face 2 to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 1 until you hear a click 3 Attach the slot cover 1 x 1 4 Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal 3 to the front door 5 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option Check All Connections at the end of this section ...

Page 137: ...001 Installation 1 Check the software version Make sure the following versions are installed Firmware Name Version Firmware Number NCS V7 12 or later D0135754D Websys V1 09 or later D0135755D Printer For D009 D011 D012 D013 V1 05 or later D0135758G Printer For D091 D092 V1 01 or later D0925774B System Copy For D011 D013 V1 08 or later D0135751P System Copy For D009 D012 V1 08 or later D0125751P Sy...

Page 138: ...d and locked in place If it is partially out of the slot push it in gently until it locks in place 6 Reattach the slot cover and turn ON the main switch 7 Do one of the following A or B to enable the IPDS function A Enable the IPDS function via telnet 1 Connect the machine via telnet 2 Execute the following commands msh set ipds up If you want to stop the function msh set ipds down B Enable the IP...

Page 139: ...tomer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed 2 Confirm that Admin Authentication is on User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication On If this setting is Off tell the customer that this setting must be On before you can do the installation procedure 3 Confirm that Administrator Tools is selected and enabled User Tools System S...

Page 140: ...items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation 1 Check the box seals 1 on each corner of the box Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner 2 Open the box Installation Procedure 1 For models which have the VM card do the followings Press User Tools button to enter the User Tools mode Press Extended Feature Settings on the LCD ...

Page 141: ...92 Installation Press Extended Feature Settings on the LCD again Press Startup Setting tab Stop all SDK applications with touching application lines Exit the UP mode and then turn off the machine Remove the VM card from slot 2 2 Remove the slot cover 1 x 1 ...

Page 142: ...from a Device Problem Restoring the encryption key When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed updating the encryption key is required 1 Prepare an SD card which is initialized 2 Make the restore_key folder in the SD card 3 Make an nvram_key txt file in the restore_key folder in the SD card 4 Ask an administrator to input the encryption key t...

Page 143: ...yption unit 1 Prepare an SD card which is initialized 2 Make the restore_key folder in the SD card 3 Make an nvram_key txt file in the restore_key folder in the SD card 4 Input nvclear into the nvram_key txt file 5 Turn on the main power switch 6 Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card storing the encryption key in the machine 7 Turn off the main power switch 8 Insert t...

Page 144: ...gin password Administrator login name Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure 3 Make sure that Admin Authentication is ON System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication If this setting is OFF tell the customer this s...

Page 145: ... the installation 1 Check the box seals 1 on each corner of the box Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner The surfaces of the tapes must be blank If you see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 You can see the VOID marks 2 when you remove each seal In this condition they canno...

Page 146: ...ine is turned on 2 Disconnect the network cable if it is connected 3 Remove the slot cover 1 for SD cards x 1 4 Turn the SD card label face 2 to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 1 until you hear a click 5 Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected 6 Turn on the main power switch 7 Go into the SP mode and push EXECUTE with SP5 878 001 8 Exit the SP mode and turn off ...

Page 147: ...m GW2a_zoffy D3775912A 1 01m 12 Go into the User Tools mode and select System Settings Administrator Tools Auto Erase Memory Setting On 13 Exit the User Tools mode 14 Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon 1 shows 15 Make a Sample Copy 16 Check the overwrite erase icon The icon 2 changes to 3 when job data is stored in the HDD The icon goes back to its usual shape 2 after th...

Page 148: ...up tab Stop all SDK applications with touching application lines Exit UP mode turn off the machine and unplug the power cord Remove the slot cover for SD Cards Remove the SD card VM JAVA from SD Slot 2 2 Turn OFF the machine and unplug the main machine power cord 3 Remove the SD Card Cover 1 and then turn the Browser SD Card 2 label face to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 2 u...

Page 149: ...h Exit twice to go back to the copy screen 21 Turn OFF the main power switch 22 Install the function key for Browser Unit to the place you chose in step 18 23 Turn ON the Main Power Switch 24 When the reaches the Ready condition press the key that you installed in Step 22 NOTE A message will be displayed confirming that the Browser Option was successfully installed 25 Turn OFF the Main Power Switc...

Page 150: ...nd password 7 Touch Extended Feature Settings twice on the LCD 8 Touch Uninstall on the LCD 9 Touch the Browser line 10 A confirmation message appears on the LCD 11 Touch Yes to proceed 12 A reconfirmation message appears on the LCD 13 Touch Yes to uninstall the browser unit 14 You will see Uninstalling the extended feature Please wait and then Completed 15 Touch Exit to go back to the setting scr...

Page 151: ...hear a click 4 Plug the main machine in and turn ON the main power switch Installation will be performed automatically Do not turn the machine OFF or remove the SD Card until installation is complete The installation may take up to 10 minutes to complete Never remove the Java VM Card without first ending the application and then stopping the Java VM card This is done by deselecting the application...

Page 152: ...TER AND P S OPTIONS D009 D012 ONLY Overview This section describes the installation of the following items RPCS Printer Unit Printer Unit Printer Scanner Unit 256 Memory Optional memory is required for each unit Printer Enhance Option Scanner Enhance Option Rev 06 14 2011 ...

Page 153: ...inting capability both RPCS and PCL printer languages are provided The 256 MB memory is required Printer Scanner Unit Type 5000 For customers who require the full range of DS features advanced scanning and printing features such as scan to solutions virtual mailboxes PCL etc The 256 MB memory unit is required Separate Options There are two separate options not provided with the kits 256 MB memory ...

Page 154: ...ion Type 5000 Updates the RPCS unit or Printer Unit by adding the advanced scanning features Kit Contents Check the accessories and their quantities against the list below and the illustration on the next page This is a common list for all the kits Common Accessory Table This common accessory table lists all the items of the following units and options for the D009 D012 Series machines RPCS RPCS P...

Page 155: ...Yes Yes Yes 4 Keytop Set NA 2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Keytop Set EU 2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 The 256 Memory is a separate option and it is not provided in the kits However one memory unit is required for the installation of every print unit 2 The number of keytops provided varies Kit Keytops Copy Document Server Printer Scanner RPCS Unit 1 1 Printer Unit 1 1 1 Printer Scanner Unit 1 1 1 1 Printer E...

Page 156: ...SM Printer Scanner Installation Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord 1 Remove the controller board 1 x 2 2 Install the 256 MB memory DIMM 2 3 Install a hard disk except RPCS Printer Kit p 2 74 4 Reinstall the controller board ...

Page 157: ...allation 5 Remove the SD card slot cover 3 x1 6 Insert the Printer Scanner SD card 4 in SD card slot 1 7 Reattach the cover 8 Connect the LAN cable to the NIC connection 9 Connect the USB cable to the USB connection 10 Remove the 1st 2nd 4th and 5th blank key tops ...

Page 158: ... To enable the USB function enter the SP mode and set SP5985 002 On Board USB to 1 Enable Printer Enhance Scanner Enhance Options Accessory Check Refer to the Common Accessory Table in this chapter Installation Application Merge The installation of the printer enhance option and scanner enhance option are done with SP5873 001 Application Move If you are going to update the RPCS unit with both the ...

Page 159: ...onfirm that the RPCS Unit or Printer Unit SD card is in SD card Slot 1 6 Put the option SD Card Printer Enhance Option or Scanner Enhance Option in SD card slot 2 7 Open the front door 8 Turn the copier on 9 Go into the SP mode and select SP5873 001 10 Touch Execute 11 Read the instructions on the display and touch Execute to start 12 When the display tells you copying is completed touch Exit then...

Page 160: ...ach the cover 18 Return the copied SD card to the customer for safekeeping or tape it to the faceplate of the controller To undo an option update 1 For models which have the VM card do the followings Press User Tools button to enter the User Tools mode Press Extended Feature Settings on the LCD Press Extended Feature Settings on the LCD again Press Startup Setting tab ...

Page 161: ...ules about merging applications on SD cards The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to the target SD card The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application program The service technician may occasionally need to check the SD card and its data to solve problems SD cards must be stored in a safe location at the work site O...

Page 162: ...0 32 MB 9 3 MB RPCS Printer Unit Type 5000 32 MB 6 3 MB Printer Unit Type 5000 32 MB 8 3 MB Printer Enhance Option Type 5000 16 MB 4 MB Scanner Enhance Option Type 5000 16 MB 3 MB DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type I 16 MB 4 MB PostScript3 Unit Type 5000 64 MB 14 6 MB IPDS Unit Type 5000 32 MB 13 5 MB Case 1 PostScript3 is not installed Merge all applications which the customer wants to use into one ...

Page 163: ...tion 2 21 14 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS Plug in the power cord Then turn on the main switch Enter the printer user mode Then print the configuration page User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config Page All installed options are shown in the System Reference column ...

Page 164: ......

Page 165: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 166: ......

Page 167: ...PM Tables SM 3 1 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Installation 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3 1 PM TABLES See Appendices for the following information PM Tables ...

Page 168: ......

Page 169: ...d New 33 03 09 2012 Removed steps 4 and 5 from Drum Removal Procedure 35 03 09 2012 Removed steps 3 and 4 from Drum Re Installation Procedure 41 04 06 2011 Added IMPORTANT message to Developer Roller section 61 03 09 2012 Correct step 10 for Installing New Web Roller ...

Page 170: ......

Page 171: ...IT 1 Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment 2 Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit as they are adjusted in the factory 3 The polygon mirror and F theta lenses are very sensitive to dust Do not open the optical housing unit 4 Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit wi...

Page 172: ...Positioning Pin 4 pc set 1 A2929500 Test Chart S5S 10 pc set 1 VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter FLUKE 187 1 A2309003 Adjustment Cam Laser Unit 1 A2309004 Positioning Pin Laser Unit 1 B6455010 SD Card 1 B6456830 USB Read Writer 1 G0219350 Loop Back Connector 1 4 2 2 LUBRICANTS Part Number Description Q ty A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1 52039502 Silicone Grease G 501 1 ...

Page 173: ...RS 4 3 1 FRONT DOOR UPPER AND LOWER INNER COVER 1 Left Cover p 4 4 2 Open and remove the front door A pin x 2 Upper Inner Cover 1 Open the front door A 2 Upper inner cover B x 2 Lower Inner Cover 1 Remove the front door A pin x 2 2 Shield glass cover C 3 Shield glass D x 2 4 Lower inner cover E ...

Page 174: ...Exterior Covers D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 4 SM 4 3 2 LEFT COVER 1 Left cover A x 6 4 3 3 REAR COVER 1 Rear cover A x 6 ...

Page 175: ... Covers SM 4 5 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 3 4 RIGHT REAR COVER 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Open the right door A 3 Scanner right cover B x 2 4 Right top cover C x 1 5 Right rear cover D x 4 ...

Page 176: ...Front right cover A x 1 3 Operation panel with the scanner front cover B x 6 x 1 x 1 The two screws C are shorter than the other screws installed in the inner two screw holes Make sure that the two screws C are installed in the outer screw holes on the scanner front cover 4 Scanner front cover D x 2 ...

Page 177: ...Exterior Covers SM 4 7 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 5 Operation panel E 4 3 6 PAPER EXIT COVER 1 Front right cover p 4 6 2 Paper exit cover A x 1 ...

Page 178: ...Exterior Covers D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 8 SM 4 3 7 INNER TRAY 1 Left cover p 4 4 2 Upper inner cover p 4 3 3 Paper exit cover p 4 7 4 Inner tray A ...

Page 179: ...eplacement Adjustment 4 4 SCANNER 1 4 4 1 EXPOSURE GLASS 1 Glass cover A x 2 2 ARDF exposure glass B 3 Rear scale C x 3 4 Exposure glass with left scale D Position the black marker E at the front left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass ...

Page 180: ...LENGTH WIDTH SENSORS Monochrome Scanner Model D009 D012 1 Exposure glass with left scale p 4 9 2 Scanner right cover A x 2 3 Lens cover B x 2 4 Original width sensor bracket C x 1 5 Original length sensor bracket D x 2 6 Original width and length sensors E x 1 each ...

Page 181: ... 2 Ground plate p 4 14 3 Original width sensor bracket A x 1 4 Original length sensor bracket B x 1 x 2 5 Original width and length sensors C x 1 each 4 4 3 EXPOSURE LAMP Color Scanner Model D011 D013 D091 D092 1 Operation panel with scanner front cover p 4 6 2 Exposure glass p 4 9 3 Move the 1st scanner carriage A to the cutout B in the front frame ...

Page 182: ...anner left stays C x 2 5 Scanner front frame D x 5 6 Disconnect the connector E x 1 7 Remove the clamp F x 1 8 Remove the pulley G 9 Release the cable clamp H 10 Hold down the snap I and then slide the exposure lamp J to the front side 11 Exposure lamp J ...

Page 183: ...cover p 4 6 2 Exposure glass p 4 9 3 Rear cover p 4 4 4 Scanner rear frame p 4 13 5 Disconnect the exposure lamp cable from the lamp stabilizer x 1 x 2 6 Do steps 7 to 11 in the Color Scanner Model described above 4 4 4 SCANNER MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Scanner left cover A x 2 3 Scanner top rear cover B x 1 4 Scanner rear frame C x 8 x 3 x 2 ...

Page 184: ...or E x 2 spring x 1 After replacing the scanner motor do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual p 4 101 4 4 5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT SBU Monochrome Scanner Model D009 D012 1 Exposure glass p 4 9 2 Original length sensor bracket p 4 10 3 Sensor board unit A x 4 flat cable x 1 ...

Page 185: ...bracket B x 4 4 Ground plate C x 4 5 Sensor board unit D x 4 x 3 x 1 When reassembling Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit SP4 008 Sub Scan Mag p 4 101 SP4 010 Sub Mag Reg p 4 101 SP4 011 Main Scan Reg p 4 101 SP4 688 DF Density Adjustment Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different ...

Page 186: ...MP STABILIZER 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Scanner rear frame p 4 13 3 Lamp stabilizer unit A x 2 x 2 4 Lamp stabilizer CS model x 4 MS model stud x 2 4 4 7 SIO SCANNER IN OUT BOARD 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Scanner rear frame p 4 13 3 SIO board with bracket A x 4 All s ...

Page 187: ...nt Adjustment 4 4 8 SCANNER HP SENSOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Scanner left cover and Scanner top rear cover p 4 13 3 Exposure glass p 4 9 4 Move the 1st scanner carriage A to the right side 5 Remove the mylar B 6 Remove the scanner HP sensor C x 1 x 1 two snaps ...

Page 188: ...Scanner 1 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 18 SM 4 4 9 PLATEN COVER SENSOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Scanner left cover and scanner top rear cover p 4 13 3 Platen cover sensor A x 1 x 1 ...

Page 189: ...th the scanner front cover p 4 6 2 Front frame p 4 11 3 Slide the first scanner to the right to make reassembly easy 4 Front scanner wire clamp A 5 Front scanner wire bracket B x 1 6 Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley C x 1 Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire 1 Position the center ball A in the middle of the forked holder ...

Page 190: ...nd the left end clockwise twice The two red marks D come together when you have done this Stick the wire to the pulley with tape This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation 4 Install the drive pulley on the shaft E Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time 5 Insert the left end into the slit F The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley ...

Page 191: ...rew at this time 7 Remove the tape from the drive pulley 8 Insert a scanner positioning pin L through the 2nd carriage hole M and the left holes N in the front rail Insert another scanner positioning pin O through the 1st carriage hole P and the right holes in the front rail Q 9 Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail 10 Screw the drive pulley to the shaft R 11 ...

Page 192: ...ove smoothly after you remove the positioning pins Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not After replacing the scanner wire do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual p 4 101 4 5 2 REAR SCANNER WIRE 1 Exposure glass p 4 9 2 Scanner rear frame p 4 13 3 Scanner motor p 4 13 4 Rear rail frame A x 5 ...

Page 193: ...by the arrow 4 Pass the ball end A through the drive pulley notch 5 Wind the end with the ring C clockwise shown from the machine s front three times wind the ball end A clockwise shown from the machine s front five times The two red marks D should meet when you have done this 6 Stick the wire to the pulley with tape so you can easily handle the pulley and wire during installation 7 Install the dr...

Page 194: ... PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times When you replace the operation panel When you replace the controller board When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly Do not use items 2 to 9 on the Self Diagnostic Menu These items are for design use only 1 Press press 1 9 9 3 press 5 times to open the Self Diagnostics menu 2 On the ...

Page 195: ... make sure that the marker shows exactly where the screen is touched 6 Press Cancel Then start from Step 2 again if the mark does not show where the screen is touched 7 Press OK on the screen or press when you are finished 8 Touch Exit on the screen to close the Self Diagnostic menu Save the calibration settings ...

Page 196: ...r switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the procedures in this section Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes 4 6 1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below See the next page for removal instructions 4 6 2 LASER UNIT ...

Page 197: ...cover B x 2 4 Glass cap C 5 Shield glass D 6 Lower inner cover E x 2 7 Laser unit connectors E x 3 x 1 Do not disconnect the harnesses on the LD board F unless the LD unit has to be replaced This board is precisely adjusted in the factory 8 Laser unit G x 2 When sliding out the laser unit do not hold the LD board Hold the laser unit ...

Page 198: ... MIRROR MOTOR 1 Laser unit p 4 26 2 Laser unit cover A x 4 3 Polygon mirror motor B x 4 x 1 4 After replacing the polygon mirror motor do the image adjustment p 4 97 4 6 4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR 1 Laser unit p 4 26 2 Laser synchronization detector A x1 x1 ...

Page 199: ...x 1 To avoid damaging the LD board hold it securely when disconnecting the connectors Hold the laser unit casing 5 After replacing the LD board do the Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment described in the following section Keep the lower inner cover removed before doing this adjustment because you need to adjust the adjustor screw D on the LD unit with a screwdriver Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment ...

Page 200: ...ing edge of the printout Correct No vertical stripes appear see the sample following this procedure Wrong Vertical stripes appear see the sample following this procedure 4 Turn the adjustor screw B by 90 degrees clockwise counterclockwise If the image of the printout is getting worse try reverse rotation clockwise counterclockwise 5 Print the test pattern and check it out 6 Try steps 2 to 4 again ...

Page 201: ...Laser Unit SM 4 31 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment Incorrect Vertical stripes appear ...

Page 202: ...t door A 3 Release the lock lever B 4 Pull out the PCDU C and place it on a clean flat surface 5 Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface Make sure the area is free of pins paper clips staples etc to avoid attraction to the magnetic development roller Reinstallation Open the right cover before you install the PCDU in the machine ...

Page 203: ...D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 7 2 DRUM 1 Remove the PCDU p 4 32 2 Toner cap A 3 Insert cap A into the opening of the PCDU B 4 Step 4 has been removed 5 Step 5 has been removed Rev 03 09 2012 ...

Page 204: ...2 D013 D091 D092 4 34 SM 6 Open the PDCU E x 2 7 Bracket F x 1 8 Pull the drum G towards the front the left side in the illustration while releasing the charge roller H using the release levers I and then remove the drum ...

Page 205: ...nds Re installation 1 Replace the drum and close the PCDU x 2 2 Put the opening cap A in the previous procedure back in its original place 3 Step 3 has been removed 4 Step 4 has been removed 5 After replacing the drum do these SPs SP 3001 2 ID sensor initial setting SP 2810 1 Grayscale Setting Rev 03 09 2012 ...

Page 206: ...ck off Pawl Position Adjustment If the pick off pawl has marked the drum with a line the pick off pawl position can be adjusted using either method Changing the spur position Changing the pick off pawl assembly position After re assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re attached to the position p 4 33 ...

Page 207: ...Try to avoid touching the charge roller 4 Cleaning roller D Disengage the cleaning roller on the left to remove it 5 After replacing the charge roller and cleaning roller check the value of SP2001 001 If it is not at the standard value 1500 set SP2001 001 to 1500 If this is not done the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the charge roller voltage will be too high After re assembly make ...

Page 208: ...ng roller p 4 37 3 Remove drum cleaning blade 1 A x 2 Re installation Put toner on the edge of cleaning blade 1 and the mylar at the back side of cleaning blade 1 before re installing this blade After re assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re attached to the position p 4 33 ...

Page 209: ...t Adjustment 4 7 6 ID SENSOR 1 Left cover p 4 4 2 Paper exit cover p 4 7 3 Inner tray p 4 8 4 Exhaust duct p 4 87 5 PCDU p 4 32 6 Fusing unit p 4 56 7 ID sensor bracket A x 2 x 1 8 ID sensor B x 1 Do SP3 001 002 to initialize the ID sensor after replacing ...

Page 210: ...Development D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 40 SM 4 8 DEVELOPMENT 4 8 1 DEVELOPMENT FILTER 1 PCDU p 4 32 2 Open the PCDU p 4 33 3 Upper development cover A x2 4 Development filter B ...

Page 211: ...8 2 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER 1 PCDU p 4 32 2 Open the PCDU p 4 33 3 Upper development cover p 4 40 4 Development roller A Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller Cleaning Procedure 1 PCDU p 4 32 2 Remove the two screws A and open the PCDU as shown above ...

Page 212: ...a sheet of copy paper A to fit the width of the uncovered area of the development roller as shown below 5 Slide the paper A along the length of the roller to clean the toner off the surface 6 Rotate the development roller A in the direction of the arrow until the section you cleaned is no longer visible ...

Page 213: ...photoconductor gap is a very precise adjustment that requires factory precision The Development Roller is not available as a service part 1 PCDU p 4 32 2 Open the PCDU p 4 33 3 Upper development cover p 4 40 4 Development roller A Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller Cleaning Procedure 1 PCDU p 4 32 2 Remove the two screws A and open the PCDU as shown above Rev 04 0...

Page 214: ...e development roller 13 Place a piece of paper G over the toner entrance hole This prevents used toner falling from the drum unit into the development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering with the Vref setting toner density reference voltage 14 Secure the drum unit H to the development unit to close the PCDU x 2 15 Install the PCDU in the machine and close the front and right ...

Page 215: ...nsor A x1 The TD sensor is attached to the casing with double sided tape B Pry it off with the flat head of a screwdriver Use fresh double sided tape to re attach the sensor 5 Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial setting using SP2 801 When performing the TD sensor initial setting cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of paper ...

Page 216: ...ANSFER 4 9 1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT To avoid exposing the drum to strong light cover it with paper if the right cover will be open for a long period 1 Open the right door A 2 Release the lever B 3 Transfer belt unit C Avoid touching the transfer belt surface ...

Page 217: ...9 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 9 2 TRANSFER BELT 1 Transfer belt unit p 4 46 2 Connector A x 1 3 Remove the springs front and rear B 4 Release the hooks front and rear C 5 Transfer belt with rollers D ...

Page 218: ... the transfer belt surface Before installing the new transfer belt clean all the rollers and shafts with alcohol to prevent the belt from slipping When reinstalling the transfer belt make sure that the belt is under the pin F To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation manually turn the rollers and make sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the edges of any of the rollers...

Page 219: ...R OVERFLOW SENSOR 1 Transfer belt unit p 4 46 2 Toner overflow sensor A x 1 x 1 4 9 4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE 1 Transfer belt unit p 4 46 2 Transfer belt p 4 47 3 Transfer belt cleaning blade A x 2 Avoid touching the edge of the new blade Check the new blade for dust or damage ...

Page 220: ...13 D091 D092 4 50 SM 4 10 PAPER FEED 4 10 1PAPER FEED UNIT Tray 1 and Tray 2 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Right rear cover p 4 5 3 Duplex unit p 4 70 4 Pull out tray 1 and tray 2 5 Paper guide plate A hook x 2 6 Paper feed unit B x 2 x 1 ...

Page 221: ...D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 10 2PICK UP FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS Tray 1 and Tray 2 1 Paper feed unit p 4 50 2 Roller holder A x 1 3 Pick up roller B 4 Feed roller C 5 Separation roller D and torque limiter E x 1 ...

Page 222: ...Paper Feed D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 52 SM 4 10 3TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Tray lift motor 1 or 2 A x 2 x 3 ...

Page 223: ... SENSORS Tray 1 and Tray 2 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Right rear cover p 4 5 3 Duplex unit p 4 70 4 Paper feed unit p 4 50 5 Tray lift sensor A x 1 6 Paper end feeler B and paper end sensor C hook x 1 each 7 Relay sensor bracket D x 1 8 Relay sensor E x 1 hook 9 Paper feed sensor bracket F x 1 10 Paper feed sensor G x 1 hook ...

Page 224: ...092 4 54 SM 4 10 5REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Right rear cover p 4 5 3 Duplex unit p 4 70 4 Paper feed unit for tray 1 p 4 50 5 Paper Trays 1 and 2 6 Paper dust box A 7 Pull out the paper dust container B 8 Remove two screws C ...

Page 225: ...ew E 9 Dust container rail F E x 1 10 Sensor bracket G x 1 You can only access the screw on the sensor bracket from the inside paper tray location of the machine 11 Registration sensor H x 1 hooks Reinstall the registration sensor It is very difficult to secure the sensor bracket to the frame First attach the sensor bracket with tape temporarily ...

Page 226: ...he procedures in this section The fusing unit can cause serious burns 1 Turn off the main power switch 2 Open the right door 3 Pull up the lock levers A 4 Pull the fusing unit B until you hear a click The lock levers lock the fusing unit again at this time to prevent the fusing unit from falling down 5 Pull up the lock levers A again and then remove the fusing unit B ...

Page 227: ... D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 11 2WEB ROLLER UNIT 1 Fusing unit p 4 56 2 Web roller unit A x 2 4 11 3BRAKE PAD 1 Web roller unit p 4 57 2 Web left cover A front x 2 rear stepped screw x 2 3 Web top frame B x 2 ...

Page 228: ...SM 4 Web left frame C x 2 5 Brake pad D 4 11 4WEB HOLDER ROLLER AND WEB ROLLERS 1 Web roller unit p 4 57 2 Web left cover p 4 57 3 Web top frame p 4 57 4 Web left frame p 4 57 5 Front gear bracket A x 2 6 All gears and bushings rear side B x 2 ...

Page 229: ...2 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 7 Rear gear bracket C x 2 8 All gear and bushings rear side D x 2 spring x 1 9 Front bracket E x 2 10 Web holder roller F holder x 2 spring x 2 11 Web take up roller G 12 Web supply roller H ...

Page 230: ...side Installing new web rollers 1 Install the web supply roller A first Make sure that the web sheet is under the pin B 2 Install the web take up roller C Make sure that the printed number D is outside the web take up roller 3 Reinstall the rear gear bracket p 4 58 4 Reinstall the front and rear gears and bushings p 4 58 5 Reinstall the rear gear bracket p 4 58 ...

Page 231: ...ling G in the arrow direction to remove the slack in the web sheet 9 Reinstall the web unit 10 If you install a new cleaning web reset SP 7806 008 and SP7804 005 press Execute on the LCD 4 11 5PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER 1 Fusing unit p 4 56 2 Fusing exit guide A lock x 2 3 Fusing front upper cover B x 3 4 Fusing rear upper cover C x 3 5 Fusing outer guide D front x 1 rear stepped screw x 1 Re...

Page 232: ...unit E x 4 7 Pressure roller cleaning roller F spring x 2 holder x 2 4 11 6THERMOSTAT 1 Fusing unit p 4 56 2 Web roller unit p 4 57 3 Fusing top cover A front x 1 rear stepped screw x 1 4 Thermostat holder B x 2 5 Thermostat cover C x 2 6 Thermostat D terminal x 2 ...

Page 233: ...D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 11 7THERMISTOR 1 Fusing unit p 4 56 2 Web roller unit p 4 57 3 Fusing top cover p 4 62 4 Pull the two tabs A 5 Disconnect the two terminals B 6 Sensor stays C x 1 each 7 Thermistors D x 2 x 1 ...

Page 234: ...sing unit p 4 56 2 Web roller unit p 4 57 3 Fusing top cover p 4 62 4 Fusing top frame A x 5 The cords on this frame are still connected to the fusing unit at this time Be careful not to damage the cords when removing the hot roller stripper B 5 Hot roller stripper B spring x 1 ...

Page 235: ... 11 9FUSING LAMPS 1 Fusing unit p 4 56 2 Web roller unit p 4 57 3 Fusing top cover p 4 62 4 Connector cover A x 2 5 Fusing top frame with connector B x 9 6 Fusing front lower cover C x 2 7 Fusing front frame D x 3 8 Fusing rear lower cover E x 2 9 Fusing rear frame F x 5 ...

Page 236: ...er bracket H x 1 12 Terminal base I x 3 13 Rear holder bracket J x 1 14 Fusing lamp Center 550W K 15 Fusing lamp End 750W L 4 11 10 HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER 1 Fusing lamps Center and End p 4 65 2 Hot roller A snap ring x 2 gear x 2 bushing x 2 3 Pressure roller B x 2 bushing x 2 ...

Page 237: ... D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 12 PAPER EXIT 4 12 1PAPER EXIT UNIT 1 Fusing unit p 4 56 2 Fusing exhaust fan duct p 4 95 3 Paper exit unit A x 3 x 2 4 12 2FUSING EXIT PAPER OVERFLOW AND PAPER EXIT SENSORS ...

Page 238: ... 1 3 Paper exit sensor B x 1 hooks Paper Overflow Sensor 1 Paper exit unit p 4 67 2 Paper overflow sensor C x 1 hooks Fusing Exit Sensor 1 Paper exit unit p 4 67 2 Sensor bracket D x 2 3 Fusing exit sensor E x 1 x 1 4 12 3JUNCTION JAM SENSOR 1 Paper exit unit p 4 67 2 Paper guide A x 3 3 Junction jam sensor B x 1 ...

Page 239: ...Paper Exit SM 4 69 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 12 4PAPER EXIT MOTOR 1 Paper exit unit p 4 67 2 Motor cover A x 1 3 Paper exit motor B x 2 x 2 x 1 ...

Page 240: ...2 4 70 SM 4 13 DUPLEX 4 13 1DUPLEX UNIT 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Right rear cover p 4 5 3 Open the lower door A at the duplex unit 4 Release the tab B and remove the lower door spring x 2 5 Open the right door 6 Release the front link C x 1 ...

Page 241: ...ustment 7 Keep the right door fully open 8 Push up the duplex unit a little bit while pressing the bracket D to lock the spring E Do not let the duplex unit open fully before releasing the wire step 9 Otherwise the lock for the spring E is released 9 Wire F x 1 ...

Page 242: ...ush the projection G 11 Duplex unit x 3 ground cable x 1 4 13 2RIGHT DOOR COVER 1 Open the duplex door A and by pass tray 2 Right door cover B x 4 4 13 3DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR 1 Right door cover p 4 70 2 Open the right door 3 Duplex door sensor A x 1 hook ...

Page 243: ...justment 4 13 4DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Right door cover p 4 70 2 Open the right door 3 Duplex entrance guide A x1 stepped screw x 2 4 Duplex entrance sensor bracket B x 1 x 1 5 Duplex entrance sensor C hooks 4 13 5DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR 1 Transfer belt unit p 4 46 ...

Page 244: ...t door rear cover A x 3 3 Remove the shaft B x 1 4 Transfer belt unit holder C x 1 x 1 When re installing the transfer belt unit holder make sure that the spring D correctly hooks onto the frame 5 Guide plate E two hooks 6 Duplex exit sensor F x 1 hooks ...

Page 245: ...75 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 13 6DUPLEX BY PASS MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Frame A x 4 3 Duplex By pass motor bracket B x 2 x 1 4 Duplex By pass motor C x 4 bushing x 8 timing belt x 1 ...

Page 246: ...Duplex D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 76 SM 4 13 7DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1 Right door cover p 4 70 2 Open the right door 3 Right door rear cover A x 3 4 Duplex door B 5 Duplex guide plate C x 3 ...

Page 247: ...Duplex SM 4 77 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 6 Bracket D x 2 7 Duplex inverter motor E x 3 x 1 ...

Page 248: ... tray cover B x 4 4 By pass paper size sensor C x 1 When reinstalling the by pass paper size sensor 1 Adjust the projection E of the left side fence bar it must be centered 2 Install the by pass paper size sensor so that the hole D in this sensor faces the projection E of the left side fence bar 3 Reassemble the copier 4 Plug in and turn on the main power switch ...

Page 249: ...e Input Check Display on the LCD Paper Size Display Paper Size Display A3 SEF 00001110 A5 SEF 00001011 B4 SEF 00001100 B6 SEF 00000011 A4 SEF 00001101 A6 SEF 00000111 B5 SEF 00001001 Smaller A6 SEF 00001111 4 14 2BY PASS PAPER END SENSOR 1 Right door cover p 4 72 2 By pass feed unit cover A x 2 3 By pass paper end sensor B x 1 hooks ...

Page 250: ...80 SM 4 14 3BY PASS PICK UP FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER TORQUE LIMITER 1 Right door cover p 4 72 2 By pass feed unit cover p 4 79 3 By pass pick up roller A hook 4 By pass feed roller B x 1 5 By pass separation roller C x 1 6 Torque limiter D ...

Page 251: ...91 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 14 4BY PASS FEED CLUTCH 1 Open the right door 2 Right door rear cover p 4 73 3 Transfer belt unit p 4 46 4 Transfer belt unit holder p 4 73 5 By pass feed clutch holder A x 2 6 By pass feed clutch B x 1 x 1 ...

Page 252: ...Drive Area D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 82 SM 4 15 DRIVE AREA 4 15 1PAPER FEED CLUTCH Tray 1 and Tray 2 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Clutch bracket A x 2 x 1 bushing x 1 3 Paper feed clutch B x 1 ...

Page 253: ...D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 15 2DEVELOPMENT PADDLE MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Development paddle motor A x 4 x 1 4 15 3TRANSFER DEVELOPMENT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Transfer development motor A x 4 x 1 ...

Page 254: ...Drive Area D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 84 SM 4 15 4DRUM MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Drum motor A x 4 x 1 4 15 5FUSING MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Fusing motor A x 4 x 1 ...

Page 255: ...09 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 15 6WEB MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Bracket A x 1 x 1 3 Web motor B x 1 x 1 4 15 7PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Right rear cover p 4 5 3 Paper feed motor A x 2 x 1 ...

Page 256: ...5 8TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Right rear cover p 4 5 3 Transfer belt contact motor A x 2 x 1 4 15 9REGISTRATION MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Right rear cover p 4 5 3 Registration motor bracket A x 3 x 1 4 Registration motor B x 2 x 1 ...

Page 257: ...rea SM 4 87 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 15 10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR 1 Left cover p 4 4 2 Upper inner cover p 4 3 3 Inner Tray p 4 8 4 Exhaust duct A x 2 5 Toner supply motor B hooks x 1 ...

Page 258: ...1 D092 4 88 SM 4 16 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4 16 1CONTROLLER UNIT 1 Controller unit A x 2 4 16 2HDD UNIT STANDARD FOR D011 D013 D091 D092 Before replacing the HDD unit Copy the address book data to an SD card from the HDD with SP5846 051 if possible ...

Page 259: ...he work site without the consent of the client If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD the HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping The HDD may contain proprietary or classified Confidential Secret information Specifically the HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary files created automatically during copy j...

Page 260: ... 3CONTROLLER BOARD The battery on the control board can explode if replaced incorrectly Dispose of the old battery in accordance with the instructions Before replacing the controller board in the model without HDD When you replace the controller board in a model without a HDD address book data can be copied from an old controller board to a new controller board using an SD card Copy the address bo...

Page 261: ...Ms away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damage NVRAM data Make sure the NVRAMs are correctly installed on the controller board Make sure that the DIP switch settings on the old controller board are the same for the new controller board Do not change the DIP switches on the controller board in the field After installing the controller board 1 For a model wi...

Page 262: ... D092 4 92 SM installation procedure for p 2 93 HDD Encryption Unit 3 Turn the main power switch off on 4 16 4MOTHER BOARD 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Controller unit p 4 88 3 Exhaust fan duct A x 2 x 1 4 Controller box B x 6 x 2 x 3 5 Mother board C x 6 ...

Page 263: ...Electrical Components SM 4 93 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Replacement Adjustment 4 16 5BICU 1 Controller box p 4 92 2 BICU A x 7 x all 4 16 6IOB 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 IOB A x 6 x all ...

Page 264: ...12 D013 However the DIP switches are set differently for each machine Set the DIP switches on the new IOB board to the same settings as the old board 1 Set the bit switches on the new IOB to the same settings as the old IOB 4 16 7PSU 1 Left cover p 4 4 2 PSU A x 4 x all 3 Three clamps B These clamps will be used for the new PSU ...

Page 265: ...ment Adjustment 4 16 8HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY BOARD 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Right rear cover p 4 5 3 High voltage power supply board A x 3 x all 4 16 9FUSING EXHAUST FAN 1 Rear cover p 4 4 2 Fusing exhaust duct A x 2 x 1 3 Separate the duct hooks 4 Fusing exhaust fan B ...

Page 266: ...fan Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine 4 16 10 CONTROLLER FAN 1 Controller box p 4 92 2 Fan cover A x 2 3 Controller fan B x 1 When installing the controller fan Make sure that the controller fan is installed with its decal facing upward ...

Page 267: ...otor Polygon Mirror Motor Paper Side Fence Memory All Clear 4 17 2PRINTING 1 Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments 2 Use the Trimming Area Pattern SP2 109 1 No 14 to print the test pattern for the following procedures Registration Leading Edge Side to Side 1 Check the leading edge registration A for each paper type and paper feed station and a...

Page 268: ...ain SP1 001 4 By pass Thick 1 SP1 001 5 By pass Thick 2 SP1 001 6 Duplex Plain SP1 001 7 Duplex Thick 1 SP1 001 8 2 Check side to side registration B for each paper feed station and adjust with the following SP modes SP No Specification By pass SP1 002 1 0 4 0 mm Tray 1 SP1 002 2 Tray 2 SP1 002 3 Tray 3 SP1 002 4 Tray 4 SP1 002 5 LCT SP1 002 6 Duplex SP1 002 7 ...

Page 269: ...d left edge D blank margins and adjust them with the following SP modes SP No Specification Leading Edge SP2 103 1 3 0 mm 0 0 to 9 0 mm Trailing Edge SP2 103 2 Left SP2 103 3 2 0 mm 0 0 to 9 0 mm Right SP2 103 4 Duplex Trailing Edge L Size Plain SP2 103 5 1 0 mm 0 0 to 4 0 mm Duplex Trailing Edge M Size Plain SP2 103 6 0 8 mm 0 0 to 4 0 mm Duplex Trailing Edge S Size Plain SP2 103 7 0 6 mm 0 0 to ...

Page 270: ...or less Main Scan Magnification 1 Use SP2 109 001 no 5 Grid Pattern to print a single dot pattern 2 Check magnification and then SP2 102 Magnification Adjustment Main Scan to adjust magnification if required Specification 2 Parallelogram Image Adjustment Do the following procedure if a parallelogram prints while adjusting the printing registration or printing margin using a trimming area pattern T...

Page 271: ...the position of the laser unit E 1 Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam See the illustration above 2 Tighten the adjustment bracket 3 Print the trimming area pattern to check the image If the results are not satisfactory repeat steps 5 1 to 5 3 4 17 3SCANNING Before doing the following scanner adjustments perform or check the printing registration side to side adjustment an...

Page 272: ...e a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the leading edge A and side to side B registration and adjust them with the following SP modes if necessary SP No Specification Leading Edge SP4 010 1 0 2 0 mm Side to side SP4 011 1 0 2 5 mm Magnification Use the S5S test chart to perform the following adjustment Sub Scan Magnification ...

Page 273: ...T Registration 1 Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3 DLT paper 2 Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations 3 Check the registration and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary SP No Specification Side to side 1st side SP6 006 1 0 0 mm 3 mm Side to side 2nd side SP6 006 2 Leading Edge SP6 006 3 0 0 mm 5 mm Leading Edge 1st side ...

Page 274: ...s 5 times to open the Self Diagnostics menu 2 On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust or press 1 3 Use a pointed not sharp tool to press the upper left mark 4 Press the lower right mark after it appears 5 Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker appears exactly where the screen is touched If the mark does not appear where the screen is touched press Cancel and repeat f...

Page 275: ...SERVICE TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 19 20 03 09 2012 Added IMPORTANT NOTE to NVRAM Upload Download ...

Page 276: ......

Page 277: ...or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data 5 1 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION The service program SP mode is used to check electrical data change modes and adjust values Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED ...

Page 278: ...ode Lock to OFF After he or she logs in User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Service Mode Lock OFF This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on 2 If you must use the printer bit switc...

Page 279: ...ep The setting can be adjusted in the range 9 value reset to 3 0 after an NVRAM reset and the value can be changed in 0 1 mm steps with each key press Value stored in NVRAM After a RAM reset this default value factory setting is restored MS Monochrome Scanner Model D009 D012 CS Color Scanner Model D011 D013 D091 D092 DFU Denotes Design or Factory Use Do not change this value Japan only The feature...

Page 280: ...ice Program Mode Tables D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 5 4 SM 5 2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES 5 2 1 SP TABLES See Appendices for the following information System SP Tables Printer SP Tables Scanner SP Tables ...

Page 281: ...tc 5 Press Start twice Ignore the Place Original messages to start the test print 6 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode display Test Pattern Table SP2 109 001 Printing test pattern No Test Pattern No Test Pattern 0 None 13 Independent Pattern 4 dot 1 Vertical Line 1 dot 14 Trimming Area 2 Vertical Line 2 dot 15 Hound s Tooth Check Vertical 3 Horizontal Line 1 dot 16 Hound s Tooth Ch...

Page 282: ...YK 1 Gradation main scan A 14 Color patch CMYK 2 Gradation main scan B 15 Gray pattern 1 3 Gradation main scan C 16 Gray pattern 2 4 Gradation main scan D 17 Gray Pattern 3 5 Gradation sub scan 1 18 Shading pattern 6 Grid pattern 19 Thin line pattern 7 Slant grid pattern 20 Scanned Grid pattern 8 Gradation RGBCMYK 21 Scanned Gray scale 9 UCR pattern 22 Scanned Color patch 10 Color patch 16 1 23 Sc...

Page 283: ... 1 All Data List 2 SP Mode Data List 3 UP Mode Data List 4 Logging Data List 5 Self Diagnostics Results List 6 Non Default 7 NIB Summary 8 NetFile Log 21 Copy UP Mode List 22 Scanner SP Mode List 23 Scanner UP Mode List 2 Press Execute on the touch panel 3 Select Single Face or Both Face 4 After printing the list press Close to return to the SP mode display 5 Press Exit twice to close the SP Mode ...

Page 284: ...e checked with SP1 109 1 Execute SP5 802 to perform a free run of about 50 sheets 2 Open SP1 109 1 press and then press Yes to confirm the selection 3 Press Copy Window to return to the copy window 4 Place an OHP sheet A4 8 5 x 11 LEF on the by pass feed tray 5 Press Start twice The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for about 10 seconds then it exits automatically 6 Check the nip bandwidth A Chec...

Page 285: ...f you want to initialize all modules or select the appropriate number from the table below 5801 001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 15 below 002 Engine Clear Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings 003 SCS Initializes default system settings SCS System Control Service settings operation display coordinates and ROM update information 004 IMH Memory Clear Init...

Page 286: ...g a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 011 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings IP addresses also the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings WebStatusMonitor settings and the TELNET settings NCS Network Control Service 012 R FAX Initializes the job login ID SmartNetMonitor for Admin job history and local storage file numbers 014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS Delivery Contr...

Page 287: ...adjustments p 4 97 p 4 101 Do the touch screen calibration p 4 104 Referring to the SMC data lists re enter any values which had been changed from their factory settings Do SP 3 001 2 ID Sensor Initial Setting 6 Check the copy quality and the paper path and do any necessary adjustments 5 3 5 SOFTWARE RESET The software can be reboot when the machine hangs up Use the following procedure Turn the ma...

Page 288: ...ngs in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Hold down and then press System Settings You must press first 3 When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings press Yes 4 When the message tells you that the settings have been reset press Exit ...

Page 289: ...et to their defaults Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Hold down and then press Copier Document Server Settings You must press first 3 When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings press Yes 4 When the message tells you that the settings have been reset press Exit ...

Page 290: ...lways handle SD cards with care Do not bend or scratch them Do not let the SD card get exposed to shock or vibration Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an application to it If not downloading fails and a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware upgrade Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software Upload me...

Page 291: ... 6 Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place You will hear it click Make sure the SD card locks in place To remove the SD push it in to unlock the spring lock Then release it so it pops out of the slot 7 Disconnect the network cable from the copier if the machine is connected to a network 8 Switch the main power switch on After about 45 seconds the initial version update screen ap...

Page 292: ...e updating The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated 12 Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the Update is Done message or follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel 13 Press in the SD card to release it Then remove it from the slot 14 Switch the copier on for normal operation 15 Error Messages An error message shows in the first line if...

Page 293: ...ORS An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download The error code consists of the letter E and a number E20 for example Error Message Table Code Meaning Solution 20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is installed correctly or use a different SD card 21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD 22 Cannot decompress compressed data Inco...

Page 294: ...6 Cannot write module Cause other than E34 E35 SD update data is incorrect The data on the SD card is for another machine Acquire correct update data then install again 40 Engine module download failed Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the BCU board 42 Operation panel module download failed Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try a...

Page 295: ...the NVRAM Data Upload to the SD Card according to the procedure below 3 Perform the Memory Clear SP5801 001 or 002 4 Perform the NVRAM Data Download from the SD Card according to the procedure below 5 Manually input the data listed above 5 5 1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA SP5 824 1 Turn OFF the main switch 2 Remove the SD card cover x 1 3 Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 4 Turn ON the main switch 5 ...

Page 296: ... card as a destination card But if PostScript3 is to be installed use the PostScript3 card as a destination card because moving the data from the PostScript3 card is not licensed from the maker of this software Use caution when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure 1 The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card to another SD card Authenticatio...

Page 297: ...uring a firmware upgrade or application merge 1 Turn the main switch off 2 Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied into this SD card 3 Insert the SD card having stored the application program to SD Card Slot 2 The application program is copied from this SD card 4 Turn the main switch on 5 Start the SP mode 6 Select SP5 873 001 Move Exec 7 Follow the message...

Page 298: ...s during a firmware upgrade or application merge 1 Turn the main switch off 2 Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 The application program is copied back into this card 3 Insert the SD card having stored the application program to SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied back from this SD card 4 Turn the main switch on 5 Start the SP mode 6 Select SP5 873 002 Undo Exec 7 Follow th...

Page 299: ...d on the controller waits for the initial settings of the copy engine to take effect and then starts an independent self diagnostic test program The self diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart shown below and checks the CPU memory HDD and so on An SC code is displayed in the touch panel if the self diagnostic program detects any malfunction or abnormal condition ...

Page 300: ...Self Diagnostic Mode D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 5 24 SM 5 7 2 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST FLOW ...

Page 301: ...d in order to put the machine in the detailed self diagnosis mode No Name G02119350 Parallel Loopback Connector 5 7 4 EXECUTING DETAILED SELF DIAGNOSIS Follow this procedure to execute detailed self diagnosis 1 Switch off the machine and connect the parallel loopback device to the Centronics I F port 2 Hold down press and hold down and then while pressing both keys at the same time switch on the m...

Page 302: ...periencing problems with the machine follow the procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD Then ask the user to reproduce the problem 5 8 2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG The debug information cannot be saved the until the Save Debug Log function has been switched on and a target has been selected 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Under 5857 Sa...

Page 303: ...llowing items for selection 1 Engine SC Error Saves data when an engine related SC code is generated 2 Controller SC Error Saves debug data when a controller related SC Code is generated 3 Any SC Error Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering code number 4 Jam Saves data for jams More than one event can be selected Example 1 To Select Items 1 2 4 Touch the appropriate items s P...

Page 304: ...hooting 6 Next select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information Touch 5859 Under 5859 press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record Enter the appropriate 4 digit number then press Refer to the two tables below for the 4 digit numbers to enter for each key The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered The following keys can be set with the ...

Page 305: ...0 Key No Copy Printer Scanner Web 1 2222 SCS 2 2223 SRM 3 256 IMH 4 1000 ECS 5 1025 MCS 6 4848 COPY 4400 GPS 5375 Scan 5682 NFA 7 2224 BCU 4500 PDL 5682 NFA 6600 WebDB 8 4600 GPS PM 3000 NCS 3300 PTS 9 2000 NCS 2000 NCS 6666 WebSys 10 2224 BCU 2000 NCS The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero 0 ...

Page 306: ...5 859 Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy Printer Scanner and Web memory modules The initial settings are all zero These settings remain in effect until you change them Be sure to check all the settings especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10 To switch off a key setting enter a ze...

Page 307: ...the customer engineer is not on site please instruct customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze In order to use this feature the customer engineer must have previously switched on the Save Debug Feature SP5857 001 and selected the hard disk as the save destination SP5857 002 1 When the error occurs...

Page 308: ...012 D013 D091 D092 5 32 SM 5 9 DIP SWITCHES 5 9 1 I O BOARD DIP SW101 Location Bit 6 7 8 Japan ON ON OFF North America OFF ON OFF Europe ON OFF OFF China OFF OFF ON Taiwan OFF ON ON Korea ON OFF ON Asia ON ON ON ON Up OFF Down ...

Page 309: ...TROUBLESHOOTING REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 310: ......

Page 311: ...Service Call Conditions SM 6 1 D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 Trouble shooting 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS For Service Call Conditions information see Appendices ...

Page 312: ... detect the original size properly APS and ARE do not function correctly Original Width 2 S4 313 11 SIO Open Shorted CPU cannot detect the original size properly APS and ARE do not function correctly Original Length 1 S5 313 8 SIO Open Shorted CPU cannot detect the original size properly APS and ARE do not function correctly Original Length 2 S6 313 5 SIO Open Shorted CPU cannot detect the origina...

Page 313: ...played after copying Web End S10 208 16 IOB Open CPU detects the web end even the web is not used up Shorted CPU cannot detect the web end even the web is used up TD Toner Density S11 213 14 IOB Open The add toner indicator blinks even if there is toner in the development unit Shorted SC390 is displayed Toner Overflow S13 217 B15 IOB Open CPU cannot detect the toner overflow even the waste toner i...

Page 314: ...he Paper End indicator does not light even if there is no paper on the by pass tray By pass Paper Size S18 217 B9 10 12 13 IOB Open Paper size error Shorted Paper Feed 1 S9 216 A4 IOB Open Shorted No symptom but this may cause Jam A Jam 11 and some pieces of paper are remaining at the paper feed unit when tray 1 is opened Relay 1 S20 216 A7 IOB Open Jam A Jam 3 11 Shorted Jam A B Jam 1 Paper End 1...

Page 315: ...End 2 S25 216 B10 IOB Open The Paper End indicator lights even if paper is placed in the paper tray 2 Shorted The Paper End indicator does not light even if there is no paper in the paper tray 2 Tray Lift 2 S26 216 B13 IOB Open Shorted SC502 is displayed Registration S27 209 2 IOB Open Jam A Jam 8 17 Shorted Jam A B Jam 1 Paper Size 1 S28 209 4 5 6 8 IOB Open Shorted Paper size error in tray 1 Pap...

Page 316: ...per Height 2 S33 210 15 IOB Open Shorted Junction Jam S34 221 A10 IOB Open Shorted Jam C Jam 24 64 Paper Exit S35 221 B2 IOB Open Jam C Jam 20 Shorted Jam C Jam 1 Fusing Exit 221 B5 Open Jam C Jam 19 Shorted Jam C Jam 1 Paper Overflow 221 B8 Open Paper overflow message is not displayed when a paper overflow condition exists Shorted Paper overflow message is displayed when a paper overflow conditio...

Page 317: ... PSU Open Doors Covers Open is displayed even if the front or right door is closed Shorted The LCD goes blank when the front or right door is opened Interlock 2 SW3 913 2 PSU Open Open Cover is displayed even if the front or right door is closed Shorted The LCD goes blank when the front or right door is opened Right Door SW4 221 B10 IOB Open Open Cover is displayed even if the right door is closed...

Page 318: ... 125V 10A 250V Open Cover is displayed Power to Interlock Switch FU24 10A 125V 10A 250V Open Cover is displayed Power to Interlock Switch FU25 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V Alert LED turns on and operation panel does not turn on Power to MB FU26 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V Stack paper in the optional paper feed unit or LCT is not detected SC 503 is issued after opening and closing the tray 3 or 4 Power to optional ...

Page 319: ...ENERGY SAVING REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 320: ......

Page 321: ...he energy saved will be different For example if the timers are all set to 240 min the grey area will disappear and no energy is saved before 240 min expires Timer Settings The user can set these timers with User Tools System settings Timer setting Panel off timer 10 sec 240 min Panel Off Mode Default setting 1minute Auto off timer 1 240 min Off Sleep Mode Default settings 1 minute Normally Panel ...

Page 322: ...se and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use If it is necessary to change the settings please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is not too long Try with a shorter setting first such as 30 min then go to a longer one such as 60 min if the customer is not satisfied If the timers are all set to the maximum value the machine will not begin saving energy un...

Page 323: ...e used as a reference value because the power consumption specifications are measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply To get an exact measurement at the customers site a watt meter must be used to measure the actual energy consumed To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed At the start of the measurement period read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 At the end of the me...

Page 324: ...1081 8 001 Operating Time 21089 0 21386 0 297 0 321294 6 Ready mode stand by 214 0 002 Standby Time 306163 0 308046 0 1883 0 402962 0 Energy mode Panel off 214 0 003 Energy Save Time 71386 0 75111 0 3725 0 797150 0 Off Sleep mode 7 0 005 Off mode Time 508776 0 520377 0 11601 0 81207 0 Total Time of Data d min 17506 0 Total Time of Data d 60min Hour 291 77 Total Power Consumption of Data e Wmin 160...

Page 325: ...EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX COMBINE FUNCTION Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used This means that less energy overall is used for paper production which improves the environment 1 Duplex Reduce paper volume in half 2 Combine mode Reduce paper volume in half ...

Page 326: ...page original the total counter goes up by 3 The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides For one duplex page the duplex counter goes up by 1 For a duplex job of a three page original the duplex counter will only increase by 1 even though two sheets are used Total counter SP 8581 001 Duplex counter SP 8411 001 Single sided with combine mode SP 8421 004 Duplex with combine mode SP...

Page 327: ... 10 5 20 20 10 10 20 10 If combine mode is used the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained previously The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of duplex combine jobs 2 in 1 mode Originals Simplex Sheet used Duplex Sheets used Paper Saved Total counter SP8501 001 Duplex counter SP8421 004 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 2 1 2 2 ...

Page 328: ...ode Originals Simplex Sheet used Duplex Sheets used Paper Saved Total counter SP8501 001 Duplex counter SP8421 005 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 2 2 2 4 4 1 3 2 2 5 5 2 3 3 3 6 6 2 4 3 3 7 7 2 5 4 4 8 8 2 6 4 4 9 9 3 6 5 5 10 10 3 7 5 5 11 11 3 8 6 6 12 12 3 9 6 6 ...

Page 329: ...D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES ...

Page 330: ......

Page 331: ...7 1 2 2 TWO TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT 1 8 1 2 3 LCT 2000 SHEET 1 8 1 2 4 LCT 1200 SHEET 1 9 1 2 5 1 BIN TRAY UNIT 1 9 1 2 6 BRIDGE UNIT 1 10 1 2 7 1000 SHEET FINISHER 1 10 Upper Tray 1 10 Lower Tray 1 11 1 2 8 3000 SHEET FINISHER 1 12 1 2 9 2000 SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER 1 14 1 2 10 PUNCH UNIT FOR 2000 3000 SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER1 17 1 2 11 USB SPECIFICATIONS 1 18 1 2 12 IEEE 802 11A G G 1 18 1 2 13 BLUET...

Page 332: ...SC Tables SC6xx 3 23 SC Tables SC7xx 3 30 SC Tables SC8xx 3 39 SC Tables SC9xx 3 57 4 APPENDIX SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES 4 1 4 1 SYSTEM SP TABLE 1 4 1 4 1 1 SP1 XXX FEED 4 1 4 2 SYSTEM SP TABLE 2 4 19 4 2 1 SP2 XXX DRUM 4 19 4 3 SYSTEM SP TABLE 3 4 37 4 3 1 SP3 XXX PROCESS 4 37 4 4 SYSTEM SP TABLE 4 4 40 4 4 1 SP4 XXX SCANNER 4 40 4 5 SYSTEM SP TABLE 5 4 80 4 5 1 SP5 XXX MODE 4 80 4 6 SYSTEM SP ...

Page 333: ...4 241 APS Original Size Detection 4 242 4 9 2 OPTIONS 4 243 2000 3000 Sheet Booklet Finisher B804 B805 4 243 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 4 247 4 10 OUTPUT CHECK 4 249 4 10 1 COPIER 4 249 4 10 2 1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 4 255 4 10 3 2000 3000 SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER 4 256 4 11 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE 4 259 4 11 1 PRINTER SP TABLES 4 259 4 12 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE 4 266 4 12 1 SP TABLES 4 266 ...

Page 334: ......

Page 335: ...APPENDIX GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 336: ......

Page 337: ...er Size Paper tray Duplex A3 11 x 17 A5 LEF By pass tray 12 x 18 305 x 457 2 mm A3 11 x 17 A6 SEF Non standard sizes Paper tray Width 182 297 mm 7 2 11 7 Length 210 mm 431 8 mm 8 3 17 0 By pass tray Width 90 305 mm 3 6 12 1 Length 148 457 2 mm 5 8 18 1 Copy Paper Weight Paper tray Duplex 60 169 g m2 16 45 lb By pass 52 220 g m2 16 57 lb Reproduction Ratios 7R5E Metric version 400 200 141 122 115 9...

Page 338: ... Continuous Copy 1 to 999 operation panel entry Paper Capacity without options 1 200 sheets 550 sheets tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by pass tray Paper Capacity with options 4 400 sheets 550 sheets tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by pass tray 1200 sheet LCT and 2000 sheet LCT Paper Output A4 81 2 x 11 and smaller 500 sheets B4 and larger 250 sheets Power Source North America 120V 60 Hz More than...

Page 339: ...iginal Archive More than 2 500 A4 pages for document server ITU T No 4 Chart Toner Replenishment Cartridge exchange 630 g Total Counter Electric counter Noise Emission Copying Mainframe Only Full System D009 D011 D091 70 dB A or less 74 dB A or less D012 D013 D092 72 dB A or less 76 dB A or less Noise Emission StandBy Mainframe Only Full System D009 D011 D091 45 dB A or less 45 dB A or less D012 D...

Page 340: ...ia 143 W EU Asia 148 W Panel Off NA 104 W NA 104 W EU Asia 105 W EU Asia 105 W Sleep Mode NA 5 5 W NA 5 5 W EU Asia D009 D011 5 7 W D091 5 3 W EU Asia D012 D013 5 6 W D092 5 3 W Maximum Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 In the above Panel Off condition the polygonal mirror motor i...

Page 341: ... dpi For D009 D011 D012 D013 only PS3 300 600 dpi PCL5e 300 600 dpi PCL6 600 dpi IPDS 300 600 dpi Resident Fonts PCL 45 fonts International 13 fonts PS3 Option fonts PS3 Connectivity Std Ethernet RJ 45 network port 10Base T 100Base TX USB 2 0 Option IEEE802 11a g g Wireless LAN Bluetooth IEEE1284 Centronics Parallel Gigabit Ethernet Network Protocols TCP IP IPX SPX AppleTalk Auto Switching RAM Max...

Page 342: ...1200 dpi When used as a Network TWAIN scanner 100 200 300 400 600 dpi When used as a network delivery scanner Scan to Folder Scan to Email or Document Server storage Grayscales 8 bits pixel Interface Ethernet 10 100BASE TX Wireless LAN 802 11a g g Compression Method MH MR MMR Binary Picture Processing JPEG Grayscale Processing PDF High Compression Processing CS model only Video Memory Capacity MS ...

Page 343: ... lb Table Capacity 100 sheets 81 4 g m2 22 lb Original Standard Position Rear left corner Separation Feed belt and separation roller Original Transport Roller transport Original Feed Order From the top original Supported Magnification Ratios Copy 32 to 200 Fax Color 32 6 to 200 Black white 48 9 to 200 Power Source DC 24V 5V from the scanner unit Power Consumption Less than 60W Dimensions W x D x H...

Page 344: ...Power Consumption Less than 50 W Max Less than 35 W Ave Dimensions W x D x H 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm 22 8 x 24 4 x 10 2 Weight 26 kg 57 3 lb 1 2 3 LCT 2000 SHEET Paper Size A4 LEF LT LEF Paper Weight 60 g m2 to 169 g m2 16 lb to 45 lb Tray Capacity 2 000 sheets 80 g m2 20lb Remaining Paper Detection 5 steps 100 70 30 10 Empty Right Tray 4 steps 100 70 30 Empty Left Tray Power Source DC 24 V 5 V f...

Page 345: ...0 75 30 10 End Power Source 24 Vdc 5 Vdc from copier printer Power Consumption 55 W Max 25 W Ave Weight 14 kg 30 8 lb Size W x D x H 348 mm x 540 mm x 290 mm 13 7 x 21 3 x 11 4 1 2 5 1 BIN TRAY UNIT Paper Size Standard Size A3 DLT to A6 HLT SEF Paper Weight 60 to 169 g m2 16 to 45 lb Tray Capacity 125 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb A4 Power Source DC 24 V 5 V from the copier Power Consumption Less than 1 W ...

Page 346: ... 52 g m2 to 253 g m2 16 lb to 78 lb Power Source DC 24 V 5 V form the copier printer Dimensions W x D x H 415 mm x 412 mm x 111 mm 16 3 x 16 2 x 4 4 Weight 5 kg 11 lb 1 2 7 1000 SHEET FINISHER Upper Tray Paper Size A3 to A6 11 x 17 to 5 5 x 8 5 Paper Weight 60 to 157 g m2 16 to 42 lb Paper Capacity 250 sheets A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF or smaller 50 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 or smaller 30 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or ...

Page 347: ...mode 1 000 sheets A4 LT or smaller 80 g m2 20 lb 500 sheets A3 B4 DLT LG 80 g m2 20 lb Staple mode 80 g m2 20 lb number of sets Set Size 2 to 9 10 to 50 Size 10 to 30 31 to 50 A4 LT LEF B5 LEF 100 100 to 20 100 to 20 A4 LT SEF 100 50 to 10 50 to 10 A3 B4 DLT LG 50 50 to 10 Staple positions 1 Staple 2 positions Front Rear 2 Staples 2 positions Upper Left Staple Replenishment Cartridge 5 000 staples...

Page 348: ... Power Source From base unit Proof Tray Stack Capacity 250 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 or smaller 50 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or larger Paper Size A5 A3 SEF A6 SEF A6 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 11 x 17 SEF 12 x 18 SEF Paper Weight 52 g m2 163 g m2 14 lb 43 lb Shift Tray Stack Capacity 3 000 sheets A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 1 500 sheets A3 SEF A4 SEF B4 SEF B5 11 x 17 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 12 x 18 SEF 500 sheets A5 LEF 100 ...

Page 349: ... 8 5 x 14 or larger Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets A4 LEF A3 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 8 5 x11 LEF 11 x 17 SEF Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange 5000 pins per cartridge Stapled Stack Capacity same size Paper Size Pages Set Sets A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 20 50 pages 150 60 sets 2 19 pages 150 sets A4 SEF B5 8 5 x 11 SEF 15 50 pages 100 30 sets 2 14 pages 100 sets Others 15 30 pages 100 33 sets 2 14 pages 100 s...

Page 350: ...it Power Source From base unit Proof Tray Stack Capacity 250 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 or smaller 50 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or larger Paper Size A5 A3 SEF B6 SEF A6 LEF 5 5 x 8 5 to 11 x 17 SEF 12 x18 SEF Paper Weight 52 g m2 163 g m2 14 lb 43 lb Shift Tray Stack Capacity 2 000 sheets A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 1 000 sheets A3 SEF A4 SEF B4 SEF B5 11 x 17 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 12 x18 SEF 500 sheets A5 LEF 1...

Page 351: ...2 90 g m2 17 lb Bond 28 lb Bond Staple Position Top Bottom 2 Staple Top slant Staples Capacity Same Paper Size 50 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 or smaller 30 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or larger Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets A4 LEF A3 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 11 x 17 SEF Booklet Stapling 15 sheets A4 SEF A3 SEF B5 SEF B4 SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 11 x 17 SEF 12 x 18 SEF ...

Page 352: ...tridge Corner Staple Capacity Same Size A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 13 50 pages 2 12 pages A4 SEF B5 8 5 x 11 SEF 10 50 pages 2 9 pages Others 10 30 pages 2 9 pages Mixed Size A4 LEF A3 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 11 x 17 SEF 2 30 pages Booklet Staple Capacity A4 SEF A3 SEF B5 SEF B4 SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 11 x 17 SEF 12 x 18 SEF 2 5 pages 6 10 pages 11 15 pages ...

Page 353: ... 000 sheets EU 2 holes Up to 14 000 sheets EU 4 holes Up to 7 000 sheets Scandinavia 4 holes Up to 7 000 sheets Paper Weight 52 g m2 163 g m2 14 lb Bond 43 lb Bond Paper Sizes NA 2 holes SEF A5 to A3 5 5 x 8 5 to 11 x 17 LEF A5 to A4 5 5 x 8 5 8 5 x 11 NA 3 holes SEF A3 B4 11 x 17 LEF A4 B5 8 5 x 11 EU 2 holes SEF A5 to A3 5 5 x 8 5 to 11 x 17 LEF A5 to A4 5 5 x 8 5 8 5 x 11 EU 4 holes SEF A3 B4 1...

Page 354: ...equency Band 802 11a 5 GHz 802 11b 2 4 GHz 802 11g 2 4 GHz Data Transfer Speed 802 11a 54 Mbps 802 11b 11 Mbps 802 11g 54 Mbps Security Standards IEEE 802 11 WEP WPA WPA2 IEEE 802 11i Enterprise Mode 1 2 13 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS Transmission Specifications Based on Bluetooth V1 1 Data Transfer Speed 1 Mbps Profile Hard Copy Cable Replacement Profile HCRP Serial Port Profile SPP BIP Distance Bet...

Page 355: ...APPENDIX PM TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 356: ......

Page 357: ... Replace L Lubricate I Inspect EM 160K 320K 800K Note Scanner Optics Reflector C Optics cloth 1st Mirror C Optics cloth 2nd Mirror C Optics cloth 3rd Mirror C Optics cloth Scanner Guide Rails C Do not use alcohol Exposure Glass C C Cleaner Toner Shield Glass C C Dry cloth or cleaner APS Sensor C Dry cloth Exposure Glass Sheet through C C Cleaner Drum OPC Area OPC Drum I R Charge Roller R Charge Ro...

Page 358: ...s R Spurs C C Dry cloth ID Sensor C C Perform SP3 001 2 after blower brush cleaning Cleaning Entrance Seal C Blower brush Replace if required Side Seal I Development Unit Development Drive Gears C Dry cloth Development Filter R Development filter front R Development filter rear R Developer I R Entrance Seal I Side Seal I Development Roller C Dry cloth ...

Page 359: ...ower brush Feed Rollers I C Water Pick up Rollers I C Water Separation Rollers I C Water By pass Feed Roller I C Water By pass Pick up Roller I C Water By pass Separation Roller I C Water Paper Feed Guides I C Dry cloth Relay Rollers I C Water Bottom Plate Pad I C Water Bottom Plate Pad By pass feed I C Water Registration Sensor I C Blower brush By pass Feed Roller Gear I L Silicone Grease G 501 R...

Page 360: ... Water Entrance Sensor C Water Exit Sensor C Water Transfer Belt Unit Transfer Belt C R Dry cloth To prevent damage to the cleaning blade always replace these items together Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade R Transfer Belt Rollers C Dry cloth Entrance Seal C Dry cloth Transfer Entrance Guide C C Dry cloth Used Toner Tank I C Empty the tank ...

Page 361: ...ush Fusing Exit Sensor I I Blower brush Paper Exit Rollers I I Water Junction Transport Roller I I Water Paper Exit Guide I I Water Due to their durability and extended service life the feed rollers separation rollers and pick up rollers of the mainframe optional paper trays and LCT are not replaced at PM 1 Lubricate the by pass feed clutch gear with Silicone Grease G501 every P M ...

Page 362: ...and Paper Exit Fusing Entrance and Exit Guide Plates C Water or alcohol Hot Roller R Pressure Roller R Fusing Thermistors R Cleaning Roller Bushings L Grease Barrierta JFE 55 2 Hot Roller Strippers R Paper Exit Guide Ribs C Water or alcohol Web Supply Roller R Web Holder Roller R Brake Pad R ...

Page 363: ...EM 120K Originals Note ARDF for originals Pick up Roller R Damp cloth alcohol Feed Belt R Damp cloth alcohol Separation Roller R Damp cloth alcohol Sensors C Blower brush Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth alcohol Replace if required White Plate C Dry or damp cloth Drive Gear L Grease G501 Transport Roller C Damp cloth alcohol Exit Roller C Damp cloth alcohol Inverter Roller C Damp cloth alcohol Idle...

Page 364: ...rs C Dry or damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad C Dry or damp cloth LCT D352 EM 150K 300K 450K Note LCT 2000 sheet Bottom Plate Pad C Dry or damp cloth SR5020 B408 EM 150K 300K 450K Note 1000 Sheet Finisher Rollers C Water or alcohol Discharge Brush C C Dry cloth Sensors C Blower brush Jogger Fences I I Replace if required ...

Page 365: ...805 EM Note 2000 3000 Sheet Booklet Finisher Rollers C Water or alcohol Discharge Brush C Dry cloth Sensors C Blower brush Jogger Fences I Replace if required Punch Unit Punch Chads C Discard chads Bridge Unit D386 EM Note Bridge Unit Rollers C Dry or damp cloth Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth Sensors C Blower brush ...

Page 366: ...PM Tables D009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 2 10 SM Appendix 1 Bin Tray Unit D389 EM Note 1 Bin Tray Unit Rollers C Dry or damp cloth Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth Sensors C Blower brush ...

Page 367: ...APPENDIX SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 7 03 09 2012 Corrected SC 220 8 03 09 2012 Corrected SC 221 25 12 28 2010 SC636 ...

Page 368: ......

Page 369: ... are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected Turn the operation switch or main switch off and on C The SC history is updated The machine can be operated as usual The SC will not be displayed Only the SC history is updated D Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs displayed on the operation panel These are re displayed if the error occurs again Turn the o...

Page 370: ...t board disconnect and reconnect the connectors and then test the machine Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the problem Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB If a motor lock error occurs check the mechanical load before you decide to replace the motor or sensors When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode the machine cannot display the SC number If this occu...

Page 371: ...ive BICU defective The peak white level is less than 64 255 digits 8 bits when scanning the shading plate The shading data peak does not reach the specified threshold 120 D Scanner home position error 1 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the OFF condition during initialization or copying SIB B W SIB Color or scanner drive motor defective Scanner motor defective Harness between SIB an...

Page 372: ...rce disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between SIB and scanner HP sensor disconnected Scanner wire timing belt pulley or carriage defective BICU defective 141 D Black level detection error Color Scanner model only The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp Defective SBU BICU defective 142 D White level detection error Color Scanner model only The...

Page 373: ... White plate mounting is incorrect or defective Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty SBU SCNB defective BICU defective Harness connections 144 D 001 SBU connection error The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from the energy save mode Defective SBU Defective harness Defective detection port on the BICU D 002 SBU serial communication error The power ON of t...

Page 374: ...rty white plate Incorrect position or width of white plate scanning SP4015 BICU board defective SBU board defective 161 D BICU error The error result of self diagnostic by the ASIC on the BICU is detected Defective BICU Defective connection between BICU and SBU 165 D Copy Data Security Unit error The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data security function is set ON with the i...

Page 375: ...ec after the polygon motor switched off 204 D Polygon motor error 3 XSCRDY signal error The SCRDY_N signal remains HIGH for 200 ms while the LD unit is firing Polygon motor driver board harness loose or broken Polygon motor driver board defective Laser optics unit defective BICU defective 220 D Laser synchronizing detection error start position LD0 The laser synchronizing detection signal for the ...

Page 376: ...ror The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time The BICU generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration sensor switches on 231 D FGATE OFF error The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time The BICU generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration sensor switches on BICU defective BICU Controller board harness...

Page 377: ...D Charge roller bias correction leak The charge roller bias correction is performed twice even if the maximum charge roller bias 2000V is applied to the roller ID sensor defective Worn charge roller Charge roller damaged 320 D Development roller bias leak The development roller bias leak is detected for 60 ms after the high voltage has been supplied to the development unit Development bias leak Br...

Page 378: ...development puddle motor Defective development puddle motor Defective harness Defective IOB 350 D ID sensor pattern test error One of the following readings occurred 10 times in the ID sensor output when the ID sensor pattern was checked 1 Vsp 2 5V 2 Vsg 2 5V 3 Vsp 0V 4 Vsg 0V ID sensor connector defective Poor ID sensor connector connection I O board IOB defective Poor writing of ID sensor patter...

Page 379: ...ve or dirty ID sensor connector defective Poor ID sensor connection I O board IOB defective Scanning system defective High voltage supply board defective Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum 355 C Grayscale measurement error When the grayscale control result is the maximum and it does not operate correctly and these cases are detected 15 times ID sensor defective or dirty The l...

Page 380: ... sensor 372 D TD sensor adjustment error Vts is less than 1 8V or 4 8V or more during TD sensor initialization Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack TD harness sensor disconnected loose or defective TD sensor defective Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected defective 396 D Drum motor error The machine detects a lock signal error from the drum motor for 2 seconds after the drum...

Page 381: ...d back bias from the transfer belt is more than 4V for 60 msec while the transfer belt bias is output The A D conversion level is 20 or less for 60 msec The PWM duty is 24 or more for 60 msec Power pack broken Defective harness Disconnected connector 441 D Transfer Development motor error The machine detects a lock signal error from the transfer development motor for 2 seconds after the transfer d...

Page 382: ... 10 seconds If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height the paper height position is detected again At this time the tray lift sensor should de activate within 1 5 sec after the paper bottom plate starts to drop If it does not deactivate within 1 5 sec a message will prompt the user to reset Tray 1 After two attempts to release the error by re setting the pap...

Page 383: ...ad Tray lift sensor connection loose disconnected or damaged Tray lift sensor defective Tray lift motor connection loose disconnected or damaged Tray lift motor defective 503 3rd tray lift malfunction optional paper feed unit or LCT 1 B For the paper feed unit SC 503 01 occurs if the lift sensor does not turn on within 10 seconds after the tray lift motor has turned on For the LCT SC 503 01 occurs...

Page 384: ...r connector disconnection For the LCT Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection Defective tray motor or connector disconnection Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection 504 4th tray lift malfunction optional paper feed unit 1 B For the paper feed unit When the tray lift motor turns on the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds If this condition o...

Page 385: ...ft motor defective or disconnected Tray lift sensor defective or disconnected 2 B Both tray lift sensor and lower limit sensor are turned on at the same time when the main power is turned on or the right door is closed Tray lift motor defective or disconnected Tray lift sensor defective or disconnected Lowe limit sensor defective or disconnected 530 D Fusing exhaust fan motor error The IOB does no...

Page 386: ...ect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on the paper exit cooling fan motor Defective paper exit cooling fan motor or connector disconnection Defective IOB Disconnected harness 540 D Fusing motor error The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 2 seconds after turning on the fusing motor Motor overload Defective fusing motor or connector disconnection Defective IOB Disconnecte...

Page 387: ...ng overheat error 1 software detection A fusing temperature at the center of over 230 C 446 F is detected for 1 second by the fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing roller Power supply unit defective I O board IOB defective BICU defective TRIAC short on PSU PSU defective 544 A Fusing overheat error 1 hardware detection A fusing temperature at the center over 250 C is detec...

Page 388: ...ted zero cross signal is less than 45 Defective fusing lamp relay Defective fusing lamp relay circuit Unstable power supply 551 A Fusing thermistor open end The thermistor end detects 0 C or less for 5 sec Fusing thermistor end disconnected Fusing thermistor end connector defective 552 A Fusing temperature warm up error end This SC is generated if the following condition occurs The thermistor end ...

Page 389: ...4 A Fusing overheat error 1 hardware detection A fusing temperature at the end over 250 C is detected by the fusing temperature monitor circuit in the BICU board I O board IOB defective BICU defective 555 A Fusing lamp consecutive full power 1 After warm up the fusing lamp remains at full power for 15 seconds without the hot roller rotating Disconnected or defective thermistors ends Defective fusi...

Page 390: ...error persists replace the fusing unit SC559 does not operate until SP1159 has been set to 1 ON This sets the machine to count the number of occurrences of paper late jams in the fusing unit The default setting is 0 OFF SC559 is issued after the third occurrence of a paper late jam in the fusing unit Once this SC has been issued the machine cannot be used until the service technician removes the c...

Page 391: ...ected mechanical counter Defective mechanical counter 620 B Communication error between IOB and ADF After the ARDF is detected the break signal occurs or communication timeout occurs Incorrect installation of ARDF ARDF defective IOB board defective External noise 621 D Communication timeout error between IOB and finisher or mailbox A break low signal is received from the finisher or the mailbox Di...

Page 392: ...tive main control board of the peripheral Defective BICU or IOB Disconnected peripheral 623 D 2nd Paper Bank communication error This SC is not issued for this machine When a communication error signal between the 1st paper bank and 2nd paper bank is received Loose connector 630 C CSS communication error A communication error occurred during communication with the CSS Communication line error 632 ...

Page 393: ...ry error 635 B MF accounting device error 4 The accounting device sends the controller the report that indicates the battery voltage error has occurred Defective controller of the MF accounting device Battery error 636 SD Card Error 001 B Expanded authentication module error 1 There is no expanded authent ication module in the machine 2 The SD card or the expanded authentication module file is bro...

Page 394: ...the remote service modem Embedded RCG M 001 B Authentication error The authentication for the Embedded RCG M fails at a dial up connection Incorrect SP settings Disconnected telephone line Disconnected modem board Check and set the correct user name SP5816 156 and password SP5816 157 004 B Incorrect modem setting Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting Same as 001 Check and set the correc...

Page 395: ...en though the setting of the modem board is installed with a dial up connection Same as 001 1 Install the modem board 2 Check and reset the modem board setting with SP5816 3 Replace the modem board 651 C Incorrect dial up connection 001 Program parameter error 002 Program execution error An unexpected error occurs when the modem Embedded RCG M tries to call the center with a dial up connection Cau...

Page 396: ...pond with the prescribed time when the machine is turned on Connections between BICU and controller board are loose disconnected or damaged 1 Replace the BICU 2 Replace the controller board 671 D BICU error The model code from the BICU is not correct when the machine is turned on Install the correct BICU for this model ...

Page 397: ...ontroller issues a command to check the communication line with the controller at 30 second intervals the controller fails to respond twice Controller stalled Controller board installed incorrectly Controller board defective Operation panel connector loose or defective The controller is not completely shutdown when you turn the main switch off Check the setting of SP5875 001 If the setting is set ...

Page 398: ...s on counterclockwise the pick up roller HP sensor does not detect the home position of the pick up roller Defective pick up roller HP sensor Defective pick up motor Defective DF drive board 721 B Finisher jogger motor error The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor output does not change within the specified number of pulses The 1st failure issues an original jam message a...

Page 399: ...n failure causes a jam error and the 2nd failure causes this SC code Defective stack feed out HP sensor Overload on the stack feed out motor Defective stack feed out motor Defective main board Disconnected or defective harness 725 B Finisher exit guide plate motor error After moving away from the guide plate position sensor the exit guide is not detected at the home position within the prescribed ...

Page 400: ...ract within the prescribed time after the shift jogger motor 2 switches on The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Shift jogger motor 2 disconnected defective Shift jogger motor 2 overloaded due to obstruction Shift jogger 2 HP sensor disconnected defective 728 B Shift jogger retraction motor error The side fences do not retract within the prescribed ti...

Page 401: ...isconnected defective Shift tray motor of the upper tray overloaded due to obstruction 740 B Finisher corner stapler motor error The 1st detection failure causes a jam error and the 2nd failure causes this SC code For the 2000 3000 sheet booklet finisher Staple movement is not finished after a certain time For the 1000 sheet finisher The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time...

Page 402: ...movement is not finished within a certain time The 1st detection failure causes a jam error and the 2nd failure causes this SC code Motor overload Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor Loose connection of the stapler movement motor Defective stapler home position sensor Defective stapler movement motor 743 B Booklet stapler motor error 1 The 1st detection failure causes a jam error ...

Page 403: ... connection of the rear stapler motor Defective rear stapler motor 750 B 1000 2000 3000 sheet booklet finisher Tray lift motor error The 1st detection failure causes a jam error and the 2nd failure causes this SC code The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the specified time after the tray raises or lowers 753 B Return roller motor error This occurs during the operation...

Page 404: ...inisher folder plate motor error The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time The 1st detection failure causes a jam error and the 2nd failure causes this SC code Folder plate HP sensor disconnected defective Folder plate motor disconnected defective Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction 763 B Punch movement motor error The punch unit moves b...

Page 405: ...d loose defective Defective motor 765 B Folding unit bottom fence lift motor The folding unit bottom fence movement is not finished within a certain time The 1st detection failure causes a jam error and the 2nd failure causes this SC code Motor harness loose broken Motor drive obstructed Motor defective 766 B Clamp roller retraction motor error The clamp roller movement is not finished within a ce...

Page 406: ...ction loose Motor overloaded 770 B Shift motor error The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1 86 seconds after the shift motor has turned on at power on or during its operation Defective shift motor Defective shift motor HP sensor 791 D Bridge unit error The machine recognizes the finisher but does not recognize the bridge unit Defective connector Broken harness 792 B Finisher er...

Page 407: ...tive controller board 817 D Monitor Error This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot loader attempts to read the self diagnostic module system kernel or root system files from the OS Flash ROM or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted OS Flash ROM data defective change the controller firmware SD card data defective use another S...

Page 408: ...61 6420 6469 7200 00 bad dir 0x696e 0x69742064 init died 0x766d 0x5f706167 vm_pageout VM is full 554C UL USB error Error in the OS init died vm_pageout VM is full Cache Error System program defective Controller board defective Optional board defective Replace controller firmware For more details about this SC code error execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code The error...

Page 409: ...c error code with the program address where the error occurs System firmware problem Defective controller 1 Turn the main switch off and on 2 Reinstall the controller system firmware 3 Replace the controller When the problem cannot be fixed with the above procedure the following information displayed on the screen needs to be fed back to a technical support center SC code Detailed error code Progr...

Page 410: ...gnosis error ASIC The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the CPU timer If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range this SC code is displayed System firmware problem Defective RAM DIMM Defective controller Replace the controller board 50A1 Video bridge device ASIC error 1 The CPU does not detect the video bridge device Defective I F between the video bridge de...

Page 411: ...nostic command is set for the HDD but the device remains busy for over 6 s HDD defective HDD harness disconnected defective Controller board defective 3004 No response to the self diagnostic command from the ASIC to the HDDs HDD defective 823 B Self diagnostic error NIB XXXX Detailed error code 6101 MAC address check sum error The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum st...

Page 412: ...Error RTC optional NVRAM 1501 The one second counted by the RTC is different from the one second counted by the CPU on the controller Defective the RTC device 15FF The RTC device is not detected Defective RTC device NVRAM without RTC installed Discharged backup battery 827 D Self diagnostic error Standard SDRAM DIMM XXXX Detailed error code 0201 Verification error Error detected during a write ver...

Page 413: ...Self diagnostic error Optional RAM XXXX Detailed error code 0301 Verification error Error detected during a write verify check for the optional RAM SDRAM DIMM Loose connection Defective SDRAM DIMM Defective controller Turn the main switch off and on Replace the SDRAM DIMM Replace the controller 0302 Memory structure data error The memory structure data error for the optional RAM SDRAM DIMM is dete...

Page 414: ...e the IPU 50B1 Could not initialize or read the bus connection Check for loose connections at the mother board Replace the IPU 50B2 Value of the SSCG register is incorrect Check for loose connections at the mother board Replace the IPU 835 C Self diagnostic error Centronic device 1102 Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error IEEE1284 connector error Centronic loopback connecto...

Page 415: ...verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator via the I2C bus Defective clock generator Defective I2C bus Defective I2C port on the CPU Replace the controller board 839 C USB NAND Flash ROM error 9101 The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read Defective controller board 9110 The USB NAND Flash ROM controller is disconnected Defective controller baord 851 B IEEE 139...

Page 416: ...he board that holds the wireless LAN but not to the wireless LAN card Bluetooth Wireless LAN card missing was removed 855 B Wireless LAN error 3 An error is detected on the wireless LAN card 802 11a g g or Bluetooth Wireless LAN card defective Wireless LAN card connection incorrect 856 B Wireless LAN error 4 An error was detected on the wireless LAN card Bluetooth Wireless LAN card defective PCI c...

Page 417: ...ace the controller board 1 Encryption key setting for HDD error The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD Defective SATA chip on the controller board Replace the controller board 2 NVRAM data encryption error 1 An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted Defective NVRAM on the controller board Replace the NVRAM 30 NVRAM data encryption error 2 An error occurs before the NV...

Page 418: ...t from the one on the HDD 1 Install the HDD correctly 2 Initialize the HDD 9 Power failure during the data encryption The data encryption NVRAM and HDD has not been completed Power failure during the data encryption Initialize the HDD 10 Data read write error The DMAC error is detected twice or more Same as SC863 860 B HDD startup error at main power on HDD is connected but a driver error is detec...

Page 419: ...ective 862 D Bad sector number error The number of bad sectors in the HDD image data area goes over 101 Defective HDD Format the HDD with SP5 832 002 Replace the HDD 863 D HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally due to bad sectors generated during operation HDD defective Note If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition the bad sector information is wri...

Page 420: ...es not contain this license data or if the result of the check shows that the license data in the program on the SD card is incorrect then the checked program cannot execute and this SC code is displayed Program missing from the SD card Download the correct program for the machine to the SD card 867 D SD card error 2 SD card removed The SD card in the slot is removed while the machine is on Insert...

Page 421: ... book data Reset the user information with SP5832 006 HDD Formatting User Information Replace the HDDs 872 B HDD mail receive data error The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly at power on The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly can neither read nor write while processing incoming email HDD defective The machine is turned off while the HDD is being accessed ...

Page 422: ...n error occurs while the machine deletes data from the HDD Note The source of this error is the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit D362 running from an SD card Turn the main switch off on and try the operation again 876 CTL D Log Data Error An error is detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating 001 ...

Page 423: ...lid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data 1 Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 2 Ask the customer s administrator to disable the HDD encryption setting with a user tool 004 Log Data Error 4 Unusual HDD encryption function due to defective NVRAM data Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 005 Log Data Error 5 Installed a NVRAM or HDD which was used in another machine 1 Reinstall the previous N...

Page 424: ... installed 1 Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card D362 2 Check and reinstall the SD card D362 878 D TPM system authentication error The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM security chip Incorrect updating for the system firmware Defective flash ROM on the controller board Replace the controller board 880 B File Format Converter MLB error A request to get access to the MLB is ...

Page 425: ...hange the controller firmware Insufficient memory 921 D Printer font error A necessary font is not found in the SD card A necessary font is not found in the SD card The SD card data is corrupted 925 B Net File function error The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used or a NetFile management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue The HDDs are defective and they cannot be debugge...

Page 426: ... 12 Specified partition does not exist 13 Device file does not exist Recovery from SC 925 Procedure 1 If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors SC860 to SC865 with SC 925 do the recovery procedures for SC860 to SC865 Procedure 2 If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors SC860 to SC865 turn the machine power off and on If this is not the solution for the problem then initialize the...

Page 427: ...received fax documents that are scheduled for delivery Then erase them 2 In the User Tools mode do Document Management Batch Delete Transfer Documents 3 Do SP5832 011 then turn the machine power off and on Procedure 3 If Procedure 2 is not the solution for the problem do SP5832 001 HDD Formatting All then turn the machine power off and on SP5832 001 erases all document and address book data on the...

Page 428: ...991 including the software file name line number and so on 1 is the recommended method because another SC could write over the information for the previous SC 992 D Undefined error Defective software program An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred 994 C Application Item Error The number of executed application items on the operation panel reach the maximum limit for the operation panel...

Page 429: ...operation panel Software bug A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not installed correctly 998 D Software Error 4 Application cannot start Register processing does not operate for an application within 60 s after the machine power is turned on No applications start correctly and all end abnormally Software bug A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is n...

Page 430: ......

Page 431: ...APPENDIX SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 21 03 09 2012 Corrected SP 2105 30 03 09 2012 Corrected SP 2895 263 01 04 2011 BitSwitch 6 bit 7 has been added ...

Page 432: ......

Page 433: ... TABLES 4 1 SYSTEM SP TABLE 1 4 1 1 SP1 XXX FEED 1001 Leading Edge Registration Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation timing 001 Tray Plain 9 to 9 0 0 1 mm step 002 Tray Thick 1 003 Tray Thick 2 004 By pass Plain 005 By pass Thick 1 006 By pass Thick 2 007 Duplex Plain 008 Duplex Thick 1 ...

Page 434: ...Tray 2 004 Tray 3 005 Tray 4 006 LCT 007 Duplex 1003 Registration Buckle Adjustment Adjusts the paper feed motor timing Paper feed motor timing determines the amount of paper buckle at Registration A setting causes more buckling 001 Tray 1 Plain 9 to 5 4 1 mm step 002 Tray 1 Thick 1 003 Tray 1 Thick 2 004 Tray 2 3 4 Plain 005 Tray 2 3 4 Thick1 006 Tray 2 3 4 Thick2 007 By pass Plain 9 to 5 2 1 mm ...

Page 435: ...able 001 Detection Timing 15 to 15 0 5 mm step 002 LG Detection 0 to 1 0 1 0 LT SEF 1 LG 1103 Fusing Idling Switches fusing idling on off When on printing will not start until enough time has elapsed so the hot roller can reach optimum temperature This ensures even heat on the hot roller Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is incomplete this may occur if the room is cold You must switch ...

Page 436: ...Determines the on time from the present temperature detected by the thermistor on the hot roller and the temperature of 1 cycle before 1 Phase hysterisis control Sets the upper and lower limits for the temperature at the lower temperature the fusing lamp is on and at the higher temperature the fusing lamp is off Change this setting to 0 only if the user has excessive electrical noise or interferen...

Page 437: ...g 001 Roller Center C1b C1 5b 100 to 170 140 1 deg C1c C1 5c 100 to 170 150 1 deg Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller 002 Roller Ends C1b C1 5b 100 to 170 145 1 deg C1c C1 5c 100 to 170 155 1 deg Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller 003 Re load Temp Minus Roller Center 0 to 60 0 1 deg Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller Th...

Page 438: ... 2 011 Roller Center Thin C1b C1 5b 100 to 170 130 1 deg C1c C1 5c 100 to 170 140 1 deg 012 Roller Ends Thin C1b C1 5b 100 to 170 135 1 deg C1c C1 5c 100 to 170 145 1 deg 013 Roller Center OHP Plain 100 to 170 150 1 deg 014 Roller Ends OHP Plain 100 to 170 155 1 deg 015 Roller Center OHP Thick 016 Roller Ends OHP Thick 100 to 170 160 1 deg 017 Roller Center Special 1 C1b C1 5b 100 to 170 140 1 deg...

Page 439: ...prescribed temperature adjustable with SP1105 028 to 37 If you enable this feature also set SP 1105 38 to a convenient value for the customer 024 Feed Waiting M Thick 025 Feed Waiting Thick 1 026 Feed Waiting Thick 2 027 Feed Waiting Thin 028 Feed Wait Center Minus Plain Adjusts the offset value for each re load temperature to exit the feed waiting mode 0 to 60 0 1 deg 029 Feed Wait Ends Minus Pla...

Page 440: ...perature Display 001 Roller Center Displays the temperature of the fusing unit 20 to 250 0 1 deg 002 Roller Ends 003 Machine Inside at Power On Displays the temperature inside the machine 20 to 250 0 1 deg 004 Machine Inside 1109 Fusing Nip Band Check Checks the fusing nip band 001 Execution 002 Idling Rotation Time 0 to 120 60 1 sec Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109 001 0...

Page 441: ...machine off on does not reset this jam counter The counter is reset after the cause of the jam has been removed and a sheet of paper successfully passes the fusing exit sensor 1801 Motor Speed Adjustment Adjusts the speeds of each motor Each step decreases or increases motor speed in 0 05 increments Regist Registration motor Feed Feed motor Duplex Duplex By pass motor Inverter Duplex inverter moto...

Page 442: ... 90 Thick 2 4 to 4 0 4 0 1 014 Duplex_CCW 154 Thick 1 015 Duplex_CCW 180 Plain 4 to 4 2 3 0 1 016 Duplex_CCW 230 Plain 017 Inverter_CW 90 Thick 2 4 to 4 0 0 1 018 Inverter_CW 154 Thick 1 019 Inverter_CW 180 Plain 020 Inverter_CW 230 Plain 021 Inverter_CCW 90 Thick 2 022 Inverter_CCW 154 Thick 1 023 Inverter_CCW 180 Plain 024 Inverter_CCW 230 Plain 025 Exit_CW 90 Thick 2 026 Exit_CW 154 Thick 1 027...

Page 443: ...dge 154 Thick 1 031 Bridge 180 Plain 032 Bridge 230 Plain 033 OpcMot 90 4 to 4 0 0 01 034 OpcMot 154 035 OpcMot 180 036 OpcMot 230 037 TransferMot 90 038 TransferMot 154 039 TransferMot 180 040 TransferMot 230 041 FusingMot 90 042 FusingMot 154 043 FusingMot 180 044 FusingMot 230 045 DevPuddleMot 4 to 4 0 0 1 ...

Page 444: ...100 92 1 C1c C1 5c EU 0 to 100 90 1 C1c C1 5c ASIA NA 0 to 100 92 1 Adjusts the threshold for web near end 005 Web Motor Interval Thick 1 3 to 130 11 2 0 1 sec Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation thick 1 006 Web Motor Interval Thick 2 3 to 130 16 8 0 1 sec Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation thick 2 007 Paper Interval Time 0 to 10 5 1 sec Adjusts the threshold for paper feeding Whe...

Page 445: ...s Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the fusing idling state 1903 Cleaning Web Setting 001 Total Paper Counter 0 to 999999999 0 1 sec Displays the total paper feeding time 002 Total Web Motor Drive Time 0 to 999999999 0 1 sec Displays the total time of web motor rotation 1907 Paper Feed Timing Adj DFU 001 Feed Solenoid ON Plain 10 to 40 0 2 5 mm 002 Feed Solenoid ON Thick 003 Feed Soleno...

Page 446: ...N 10 to 10 0 1 mm 013 Exit Roller Shift 180 014 Exit Roller Shift 230 015 Exit Junction Solenoid ON 016 Exit Junction Solenoid OFF 017 Bridge Junction Solenoid ON 018 Bridge Junction Solenoid OFF 019 1 Bin Junction Solenoid ON 020 1 Bin Junction Solenoid OFF 021 Shift Motor ON 1 to 1 0 0 1 mm 1908 Paper Bank Feed Timing Adj DFU 001 Feed Clutch ON Plain 10 to 10 0 1 mm 002 Feed Clutch ON Thick ...

Page 447: ... Temp Thick 2 005 Temp Thin 006 ON OFF Low Plain Turns on or off the CPM down setting for each paper type and ambient temperature 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On 007 ON OFF Low M Thick 008 ON OFF Low Thick 1 009 ON OFF Low Thick 2 010 ON OFF Low Thin 011 ON OFF Medium Plain 012 ON OFF Medium M Thick 013 ON OFF Medium Thick 1 014 ON OFF Medium Thick 2 015 ON OFF Medium Thin 016 Waiting Time Low Plain Adjusts...

Page 448: ...ode 100 to 200 120 1 deg If the temperature of the fusing unit is less than the temperature specified with these SPs the machine changes the CPM adjustable with SP1916 36 to 45 027 Temp Low Plain 028 Temp Low Thick 1 029 Temp Low Thick 2 030 Temp Low Thin 031 Temp Medium Plain 032 Temp Medium M Thick 033 Temp Medium Thick 1 034 Temp Medium Thick 2 035 Temp Medium Thin 036 CPM Low Plain Adjusts the...

Page 449: ... to 15 15 5 cpm 040 CPM Low Thin Adjusts the CPM in the CPM down mode C1b C1 5b 20 to 35 35 5 cpm C1c C1 5c 30 to 45 45 5 cpm 041 CPM Medium Plain 042 CPM Medium M Thick 043 CPM Medium Thick 1 Adjusts the CPM in the CPM down mode C1b C1 5b 5 to 15 15 5 cpm C1c C1 5c 5 to 25 25 5 cpm 044 CPM Medium Thick 2 Adjusts the CPM in the CPM down mode 5 to 15 15 5 cpm 045 CPM Medium Thin Adjusts the CPM in ...

Page 450: ...justs the Off On interval of the transfer belt contact motor On means that the transfer belt is in contact with the drum 002 Off Time Adjust 0 to 100 20 10 msec Adjusts the On Off interval of the transfer belt contact motor Off means that the transfer belt is away from the drum 1950 Tray Lock at Jam 0 or 1 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON Not used ...

Page 451: ...1 2005 Bias Control 001 Bias Correction 1 0 1 to 1 0 85 0 05 step Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction When the value of VSDP VSG is greater than this value the charge roller voltage increases by 30 V e g from 500 to 530 002 Bias Correction 2 0 1 to 1 0 9 0 05 step Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction When the value of VSDP VSG is greater...

Page 452: ...ts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins L Size 297 1 mm or more length M Size 216 1 to 297 mm length S Size 216 mm or less length 001 Leading Edge 0 to 9 3 0 1mm 002 Trailing Edge 003 Left 0 to 9 2 0 1mm 004 Right 005 Duplex Trail L Size Plain 0 to 4 1 0 1mm 006 Duplex Trail M Size Plain 0 to 4 0 8 0 1mm 007 Duplex Trail S Size Plain 0 to 4 0 6 0 1mm 008 Duplex Left Plain 0 to 1 ...

Page 453: ... LD1 Printer Fax 50 to 79 44 D009 D011 25 D012 D013 D091 D092 1 004 LD2 Printer Fax 2106 POL REV TIME Polygon motor rotation time 001 PRE TIME 0 to 60 10 1 sec Adjusts the time of polygon motor rotation before a job If this is set to 0 this SP is not activated 002 POST TIME 0 to 60 0 1 sec Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation after a job If this is set to 0 the polygon motor never switch...

Page 454: ...nd s Tooth Check Vertical 16 Hound s Tooth Check Horizontal 17 Black Band Horizontal 18 Black band Vertical 19 Checker Flag Pattern 20 Grayscale Vertical Margin 21 Grayscale Horizontal Margin 22 Two Beam Density Pattern 23 Full Dot Pattern 24 All white Pattern 002 Density 0 to 15 15 1 Set the density of the test pattern which is output in SP2109 001 This SP is not used for the Grayscale patterns 2...

Page 455: ...r supplied every second by the toner supply motor The length of time the motor remains on is determined by the data read by the TD sensor and ID sensor Increasing this value reduces the toner supply clutch on time Use a lower value if the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of black 002 Correction Data 25 to 300 300 25 Displays the toner supply correction coefficient K It...

Page 456: ... 100 1 sheet Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing Forces creation of the ID sensor pattern to prevent low density copies for customers who use the copier for long copy jobs 2213 Toner End Setting Selects the detection type for toner end 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 90 copies 1 No copies 2 10 copies 90 copies Toner end is determined if a low density image Vref Vt 10 is detected 90 times after ...

Page 457: ...0 3 After the test put back the old development unit and change SP2 220 back to the original value 2221 Reverse Interval Drum Transfer 0 to 2000 0 100 sheets Adjusts the threshold for the reverse rotation of the drum and development transfer motors This helps the drum and transfer belt cleaning operations This reverse rotation will interrupt a multiple printing job 2223 Vt Display 001 Current 0 to...

Page 458: ...ea is set highly than normal the print image is easily come out If the leading transfer current is set as same the black line is come out due to exfoliation leave 001 Image Area 1st Side 10 to 100 45 1 A Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper 002 Image Area 2nd Side 10 to 100 40 1 A Adjusts the transfer current for printing the second side of the paper 003 Leading Ed...

Page 459: ...ading Edge 10 to 100 20 1 A Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper fed from the by pass tray Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and high temperature conditions 008 No Image Area 10 to 100 15 1 A Adjusts the transfer current for copying 2309 Current Paper Size Correction 001 Paper Lower Width a 1 to 150 150 1 mm Adjusts ...

Page 460: ...a 1 to 3 1 0 1 Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less than the setting of SP2 309 2 005 By pass Plain gamma 1 to 3 1 1 0 1 Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less than the setting of SP2 309 1 006 By pass Plain delta 1 to 3 1 1 0 1 Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is ...

Page 461: ...er Tray Thin beta 021 By pass Thin gamma 1 to 3 1 1 0 1 022 By pass Thin delta 023 Paper Tray Special 1 alpha 1 to 3 1 0 1 024 Paper Tray Special 1 beta 025 By pass Special 1 gamma 1 to 3 1 1 0 1 026 By pass Special 1 delta 027 Paper Tray Special 2 alpha 1 to 3 1 0 1 028 Paper Tray Special 2 beta 029 By pass Special 2 gamma 1 to 3 1 1 0 1 030 By pass Special 2 delta 031 Paper Tray Special 3 alpha ...

Page 462: ... the TD sensor or adding new developer 2802 TD Sensor Manual Setting Allows you to adjust the TD sensor output manually for the following 001 VTS 1 to 5 4 78 0 01vol Adjusts the TD sensor output VT Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that already contains toner For example when using a development unit from another machine for test purposes To adjust VT use a si...

Page 463: ...rum motor reverse after the end of a job 2912 Transfer Reverse Rotation 002 Interval 0 to 10 3 1 Sets the reverse time of the transfer development motor after the end of a job 2914 Paper Setting 001 C alpha 0 to 400 150 10vol Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from the by pass tray The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of SP...

Page 464: ...ith a small width is fed from the by pass tray The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of SP2 309 1 Use this SP when an image problem see 2 914 1 occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by pass feed tray 004 B delta 0 to 300 50 10vol Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the by pass tray The paper width below which t...

Page 465: ...belt and the blade increases and could cause the blade to bend or scour the surface of the belt 001 0 OFF 1 ON 0 to 1 0 1 002 Pattern Interval 1 to 100 15 1 sheet 003 Pattern Number 1 to 3 1 1 line 004 Pattern LD Power 0 to 15 2 1 2972 Grayscale Limit SSP Controls the halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the OPC The halftone density is detected by the ID sensor and the machine adjust...

Page 466: ...job or if the door is opened and closed charge correction is executed 2974 Image Density 001 Adjustment Mode 1 to 5 3 1 Adjusts image density Changing this setting adjusts development bias and ID sensor output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density 2975 Near End Setting Detection Time 0 to 2000 0 10 sec Sets a time for toner supply motor rotation for issuing the toner near end warning...

Page 467: ...t to 0 SP2976 is disabled SP2976 is automatically set to zero by toner end recovery Time 0 to 7 000 000 0 1 msec 2977 Toner End Status Indicates the toner near end or end condition 001 Near End 0 to 10 0 1 0 Not detected 1 Detected by SP2975 001 2 Vt 10 Vref 0 2 and Vsp 0 6 3 Vt 10 Vref 0 45 4 0 45 Vt 10 Vref 0 2 and toner end counter 300 5 to 10 Not used 002 End 0 to 10 0 1 0 Not detected 1 Vsp 2...

Page 468: ...r and carrier initialization before the charge input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in the polarity of the carrier The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually decrease and cause lower charge output Setting the charge output to increase after a specified number of copies can compensate for this effect ...

Page 469: ...itial setting ID sensor output for the bare drum VSG is adjusted automatically to 4 0 0 2 V Press Execute to start Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the ID sensor replacing the drum or clearing NVRAM 3045 Toner End Setting ON OFF DFU 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On 3103 P Sensor Output Displays the current VSG VSP VSDP and grayscale control If the P sensor does not detect the P pattern VSP 5 ...

Page 470: ...er Stripper Cleaning Cleaning A 15 sec off on cycle for the fusing motor Cleaning B Off 45 sec and On 15 sec cycle for the fusing motor 001 1st Cleaning Interval Sets the threshold for the 1st cleaning mode Cleaning A is done once 0 to 5 5 1 sheets 002 1st Cleaning Mode Setting Sets the number of additional execution times of the 1st cleaning mode 0 to 5 0 1 times 003 2nd Cleaning Interval Sets th...

Page 471: ... for the 3rd cleaning mode Cleaning A is done twice and Cleaning B is done N times N is specified with SP3905 006 50 to 999 100 1 sheets 006 3rd Cleaning Mode Setting Sets the number of execution times of the 3rd cleaning mode 0 to 5 0 1 times All fans remain on during cleaning and then switch off 60sec after the cleaning cycle ends 007 Cleaning Priority Setting 0 to 1 0 1 sheets 0 Priority to pri...

Page 472: ...o 1 0 0 1 4010 Scanner Leading Edge Registration ADJ Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning Press to toggle 2 to 2 0 0 1 mm As you enter a negative value the image moves toward the leading edge 4011 Scanner Side to Side Registration ADJ Adjusts side to side registration for scanning Press to toggle CS 2 5 to 2 5 0 0 1 mm MS 4 2 to 4 2 0 0 1 mm As you enter negative values the image wil...

Page 473: ... by the gap between the original and the scale of the scanner unit 001 Book Leading Edge 0 to 3 1 0 1 mm 002 Book Trailing Edge 0 to 3 0 0 1 mm 003 Book Left 0 to 3 1 0 1 mm 004 Book Right 0 to 3 0 0 1 mm 005 ADF Leading Edge 0 to 3 0 0 1 mm 007 ADF Right 0 to 3 0 0 1 mm 008 ADF Left 0 to 3 0 0 1 mm 4013 Scanner Free Run Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off 001 Lamp ON 0 to...

Page 474: ...st warning This warning does not stop the job Before switching this setting on clean the ADF scanning glass and the white plate above the scanning glass 002 Detect Level Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass This SP is available only after SP4020 1 is switched on 0 to 8 4 1 If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued raise the setting to increa...

Page 475: ...inal 1 A5 HLT lengthwise SEF 2 A5 HLT Sideways LEF If 0 is selected Cannot detect original size will be displayed 4305 Original Size Detection 0 to 3 0 1 step 0 Normal Detection the machine detects A4 LT size as A4 or LT depending on the paper size setting 1 A4 sideways LT Lengthwise 2 LT sideways A4 Lenghtwise 3 8K 16K 4400 Scanner Erase Margin These SPs set the area to be masked during platen bo...

Page 476: ... 3 3 Gradation main scan C 18 Shading pattern 4 Gradation main scan D 19 Thin line pattern 5 Gradation sub scan 1 20 Scanned Grid pattern 6 Grid pattern 21 Scanned Grid scale 7 Slant grid pattern 22 Scanned Color patch 8 Gradation K 23 Scanned Slant Grid C 9 Check pattern 16 24 Scanned Slant Grid D 10 Gray patch 16 1 25 Gray Scale 18 text 11 Gray patch 16 2 26 Gray Scale 18 photo 12 Gray patch 64 ...

Page 477: ...0 Scan Image Path Selection 001 Black Reduction ON OFF 0 to 1 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Uses or does not use the black reduction image path 002 SH ON OFF 0 to 1 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON Uses or does not use the shading image path 4460 Digital AE Setting Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode You can adjust its level for each scanning method platen ADF 001 Lower Limit CS 0 to 1020 364 4 digit MS...

Page 478: ... 004 RY Phase Option R G B Specifies the printer vector correction value 0 to 255 0 1 005 008 YR Phase Option R G B 009 012 YG Phase Option R G B 013 016 GY Phase Option R G B 017 020 GC Phase Option R G B 021 024 CG Phase Option R G B 025 028 CB Phase Option R G B 029 032 BC Phase Option R G B 033 036 BM Phase Option R G B 037 040 MB Phase Option R G B 041 040 MR Phase Option R G B 045 048 RM Pha...

Page 479: ...FF Sets the MTF level Modulation Transfer Function designed to improve image contrast Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect 006 Smoothing 0 x1 1 7 High 0 to 7 4 1 Use to remove jaggies if they appear Set higher for smoother images 007 Brightness 1 255 1 to 255 128 1 Set higher for darker set lower for lighter 008 Contrast 1 255 1 to 255 128 1 Set higher for more contrast set lower...

Page 480: ...r stronger effect lower for weaker effect 006 Smoothing 0 x1 1 7 High 0 to 7 4 1 Use to remove jaggies if they appear Set higher for smoother images 007 Brightness 1 255 1 to 255 128 1 Set higher for darker set lower for lighter 008 Contrast 1 255 1 to 255 128 1 Set higher for more contrast set lower for less contrast 009 Ind Dot Erase 0 x1 1 7 High 0 to 7 0 1 Sets the erasure level of Irregular D...

Page 481: ...canner detection 003 HP Detection Disable Executes the AGC with the scanner detection 4604 FGATE Open Close Opens or closes the FGATE signal This SP automatically returns to the default status close after exiting this SP 0 to 1 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON 4606 White Balance Target R This value is the target value of red for the white level adjustment CS model only 0 to 1023 784 1 digit 4607 White Balance Targe...

Page 482: ... rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the SBU color printing speed 003 Latest RE Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU color printing speed 004 Latest RO Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the SBU color printing speed 005 Latest RE B W 0 to 255 128 1...

Page 483: ...he SBU black and white printing speed RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal 4624 Black Level Rough Fine Adj Display CS model only 001 Latest GE Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU color printing speed 002 Latest GO Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the S...

Page 484: ...reen signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 006 Latest GO B W 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 007 Latest GE B W 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the even red signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 008 Latest GO B W 0 to 255 128 1 digit...

Page 485: ...d blue signal in the SBU color printing speed 003 Latest BE Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the SBU color printing speed 004 Latest BO Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in the SBU color printing speed 005 Latest BE B W 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the black offse...

Page 486: ...nd white printing speed BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal 4628 Gain Adjustment Display CS model only Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red Only for the color scanner 001 Latest RE Color 0 to 255 0 1 digit 002 Latest RO Color 003 Latest RE B W 004 Latest RO B W 4629 Gain Adjustment Display Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green SP462...

Page 487: ...Latest BE B W 004 Latest BO B W 4640 SBU Black Level Loop CS model only Displays the black level adjustment time for each mode The black level adjustment is done twice The 1st adjustment decides the reference value for the 2nd adjustment 001 Loop Count 1st Color 0 to 20 0 1 002 Loop Count 1st B W 003 Loop Count 2nd Color 004 Loop Count 2nd B W 4641 SBU White Level Loop Displays the white level adj...

Page 488: ...justment 2 003 White Level Adjustment 0 x 0000 to 0 x 003F 0 1 Hex Bit 0 Gain adjustment error even Bit 1 Gain adjustment error odd Bit 2 White level error RE Bit 3 White level error RO Bit 4 White level error BE Bit 5 White level error BO 4647 SBU Error Displays the result of the SBU connection check Power On 0 to 1 0 1 0 OK 1 SBU connection check failure If the SBU connection check fails SC144 0...

Page 489: ...r printing speed 003 Previous RE Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even red signal in the SBU color printing speed 004 Previous RO Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the SBU color printing speed 005 Previous RE B W 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous black off...

Page 490: ...inting speed RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal 4655 Black Level 1 Rough Fine Adj Display CS model only 001 Previous GE Color 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU color printing speed 002 Previous GO Color 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the SB...

Page 491: ...al in the SBU black and white printing speed 006 Previous GO B W 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 007 Previous GE B W 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 008 Previous GO B W 0 t...

Page 492: ... Previous BE Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the SBU color printing speed 004 Previous BO Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in the SBU color printing speed 005 Previous BE B W 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous black offset value rough ad...

Page 493: ...ue signal in the SBU black and white printing speed BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal 4658 Gain Adjustment Display CS model only Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red 001 Previous RE Color 0 255 64 1 digit 002 Previous RO Color 003 Previous RE B W 004 Previous RO B W 4659 Gain Adjustment Display Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the c...

Page 494: ...e previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even red signal in the SBU color printing speed 002 Before Previous RO Color 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the SBU color printing speed 003 Before Previous RE Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the even re...

Page 495: ...1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 007 Before Previous RE B W 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the even red signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 008 Before Previous RO B W 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset val...

Page 496: ...ious GE Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU color printing speed 004 Before Previous GO Color 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the SBU color printing speed 005 Before Previous GE B W 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd blac...

Page 497: ...ck and white printing speed GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal 4663 Black Level 2 Rough Fine Adj Display CS model only 001 Before Previous BE Color 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal in the SBU color printing speed 002 Before Previous BO Color 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjus...

Page 498: ...d white printing speed 006 Before Previous BO B W 0 to 255 112 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the odd blue signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 007 Before Previous BE B W 0 to 255 128 1 digit Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 008 Before Previous BO B ...

Page 499: ...tting RE Color 0 to 255 0 1 digit Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the even red signal in the SBU color printing speed 004 Factory Setting RO Color 0 to 255 0 1 digit Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the SBU color printing speed 005 Factory Setting RE B W 0 to 255 0 1 dig...

Page 500: ...E Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal 4674 Black Level 2 Rough Fine Adj Display CS model only 001 Factory Setting GE Color 0 to 255 0 1 digit Displays the factory setting value of the 2nd black offset level rough adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU color printing speed 002 Factory Setting GO Color 0 to 255 0 1 digit Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level rough ...

Page 501: ...lack and white printing speed 006 Factory Setting GO B W 0 to 255 0 1 digit Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the SBU black and white printing speed 007 Factory Setting GE B W 0 to 255 0 1 digit Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU black and...

Page 502: ... 255 0 1 digit Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the SBU color printing speed 004 Factory Setting BO Color 0 to 255 0 1 digit Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in the SBU color printing speed 005 Factory Setting BE B W 0 to 255 0 1 digit Displays the f...

Page 503: ...ry Setting BE B W 0 to 255 0 1 digit Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in the SBU black and white printing speed BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal 4677 Gain Adjustment Display Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red SP4677 003 and 004 are used only for the color scanner model 001 Factory Setting...

Page 504: ... Setting GO Color 003 Factory Setting GE B W 004 Factory Setting GO B W 4679 Gain Adjustment Display CS model only Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue 001 Factory Setting BE Color 0 255 0 1 digit 002 Factory Setting BO Color 003 Factory Setting BE B W 004 Factory Setting BO B W 4685 Gray Balance Setting Adjusts the gray balance of the red signal for each scanning mo...

Page 505: ...ce Setting Adjusts the gray balance of the blue signal for each scanning mode 001 B Book Scan CS 512 to 511 14 1 digit MS 512 to 511 25 1 digit 002 B DF Scan 4688 DF Density Adjustment Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different 50 to 150 100 1 4690 White Peak Level Displays the ...

Page 506: ... level scanning 001 GE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit 002 GO 003 GE BK 004 GO BK 4692 White Peak Level Displays the peak level of the white level scanning 001 BE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit 002 BO 003 BE BK 004 BO BK 4693 Black Peak Level Displays the peak level of the black level scanning 001 RE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit 002 RO 003 RE BK 004 RO BK ...

Page 507: ...5 Black Peak Level Display the peak level of the black level scanning 001 BE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit 002 BO 003 BE BK 004 BO BK 4802 DF Shading Free Run 001 Lamp ON 0 to 1 0 1 Executes the scanner free run of the shading movement with exposure lamp on or off Press OFF to stop this free run Otherwise the free run continues 002 Lamp OFF 4803 Home Position Adjustment DFU 1 to 1 0 0 1 mm 001 Adjusts the h...

Page 508: ...re shipping the machine to another location Cycling the machine power off on also returns the exposure lamp to its home position 4903 Filter Setting This SP code sets the threshold value for independent dot erase These adjustments are effective only for the Custom Setting original type The 0 setting disables independent dot erase A higher setting detects more spurious dots for erasing However this...

Page 509: ...ut 001 Execution ON OFF Copies the settings of the previous black level adjustment and gain adjustment to the factory settings 002 Execution Flag 0 to 1 0 1 Displays the execution flag of the factory setting input 1 means that the scanner settings have been adjusted at the factory 4918 Manual Gamma Adjustment DFU Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for black in Photo mode or Letter mode T...

Page 510: ...images 1 Scanner I F RGB images 2 RGB images done by Shading correction Shading ON Black offset ON 3 Shading data 4 Inner pattern data Gray scale 5 RGB images done by Line skipping correction 6 RGB images done by Digital AE 7 RGB images done by Vertical line correction 8 RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction 9 RGB image done by Filtering correction 10 RGB images done by Full color ADS 11 RGB ...

Page 511: ...evel 0 to 9 4 1 step 0 weakest sensitivity 9 strongest sensitivity 002 Range Selection Selects the Highlight correction level 0 to 9 4 1 step 0 weakest skew correction 9 strongest skew correction 4994 Text Photo Detection Level Adj Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF High Compression PDF Setting 0 to 2 1 1 0 Text priority 1 Normal 2 Photo priority ...

Page 512: ...e main power switch off and on 5045 Accounting Counter Counter Method Selects whether the printer counter is displayed on the LCD 0 to 1 0 1 0 Displays total counter only 1 Displays both total counter and printer counter 5047 Paper Display Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD 0 to 1 0 1 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed 5055 Display IP Address Display or does not display the IP address o...

Page 513: ...n Display Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD 0 to 1 0 1 0 Not display 1 Display 5104 A3 DLT Double Count SSP Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3 DLT Yes counts except from the bypass tray When Yes is selected A3 and DLT paper are counted twice that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively 5112 Non Std Paper Sel Determines whether a non standard paper size ca...

Page 514: ...Key Card Deduct 002 External Optional Counter Type Enables the SDK application This lets you select a number for the external device for user access control Note SDK refers to software on an SD card 0 to 3 0 1 0 None 1 Expansion Device 1 2 Expansion Device 2 3 Expansion Device 3 5114 Optional Counter I F 001 MF Key Card Extension Use this SP and change the setting to 1 only when the 5 MF Key Card ...

Page 515: ... Clear Opt Counter Removal Selects if mode clear is done for an optional counter when an optional counter is removed 0 Yes Always mode clear 1 StandBy Mode clear before after a job 2 No No mode clear 5121 Counter Up Timing Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed in or at paper exit 0 to 1 0 1 0 Feed 1 Exit 5126 F Size Original Setting Selects F size original setting 0 t...

Page 516: ... Japan 1 North America 2 Europe After changing the setting turn the copier off and on If the paper size of the archive files stored on the HDD is different abnormal copies could result 5150 Bypass Length Setting Sets up the by pass tray for long paper 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off Default 1 On Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long With this SP selected on paper jams are not detected in the paper pa...

Page 517: ... log in to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted 1 On Printer bit switches can be adjusted 5179 By pass Tray Paper Size Error 0 to 1 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON This SP determines whether a paper size error prompt appears when the machine detects the wrong paper size for the job and during feed from the by pass tray 5181 Paper ...

Page 518: ...1 LT LEF 014 Tray 4 2 0 A3 1 DLT 015 Tray 4 3 0 B4 1 LG 016 Tray 4 4 0 B5 LEF 1 Exe LEF 017 LCT 0 to 2 1 0 A4 LEF 1 LT LEF 2 B5 LEF 5186 RK4 Setting Japan only Enable or distance the prevention for RK4 Accounting device Disconnection If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to 1 Enable the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops 0 to 1 0 1 5188 Copy Nv Version Di...

Page 519: ... is center minus is left is right 004 Duplex Printout High Low Position Vertically positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing 10 to 10 0 1 mm 0 is center minus is down is up 5302 Set Time 002 Sets the time clock for the local time This setting is done at the factory before delivery The setting is GMT expressed in minutes 1440 to 1440 1 min Japan 540 Tokyo NA 300 NY EU 60 Par...

Page 520: ...n this SP For months 1 to 9 the 0 cannot be input in the first digit so the eight digit setting for 2 or 3 becomes a seven digit setting 1st and 2nd digits The month 1 to 12 3rd digit The week of the month 1 to 5 4th digit The day of the week 0 to 6 Sunday to Saturday 5th and 6th digits The hour 00 to 23 7th digit The length of the advanced time 0 to 9 1 hour step 8th digit The length of the advan...

Page 521: ... SP5 307 1 is set to 1 5401 Access Control DFU This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data 103 Default Document ACL Whenever a new login user is added to the address book in external certification mode for Windows LDAP RDH the default document ACL is updated according to this SP setting 0 to 3 0 1 0 View 1 Edit 2 Edit Delete 3 Full control Note This SP setting is ign...

Page 522: ...n Method 230 SDK certification device 240 Detail Option Enables or disables the log out confirmation option Bit 0 Log out confirmation option 0 Enable default 1 Disable Selects the automatic log out time Bit 1 and 2 Automatic log out timer reduction 00 60 seconds default 01 10 seconds 10 20 seconds 11 30 seconds 5404 User Code Count Clear Clears the counts of the user codes assigned by the key ope...

Page 523: ...for the local address book account 002 Lockout Threshold 1 to 10 5 1 Sets the maximum trial times for accessing the address book account 003 Cancellation On Off 0 to 1 0 1 0 OFF Lockout is not cancelled 1 ON Lockout is cancelled if a user ID and password are correctly entered after the lockout function has been executed and a specific time has passed Turns on or off the cancellation function of th...

Page 524: ... to 60 15 1 min 5415 Password Attack 001 Permissible Number 0 to 100 30 1 times Sets the threshold number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to gain illegal access to the system 002 Detect Time 0 to 10 5 1 sec Sets a detection time to count a password attack 5416 Access Information 001 Access User Max Num 50 to 200 200 1 Sets the number of users for the access exclusion and pas...

Page 525: ...eed of certification when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected 004 Attack Max Num 50 to 200 200 1 Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected 5420 User Authentication These settings should be done with the System Administrator These functions are e...

Page 526: ... before a user can use the printer application 051 SDK1 0 or 1 0 1 0 ON 1 OFF Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the SDK application 061 SDK2 071 SDK3 5481 Authentication Error Code These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed 001 System Log Disp 0 or 1 0 0 OFF Default 1 ON Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a ...

Page 527: ...ion without a user code 5501 PM Alarm 001 PM Alarm Interval Sets the PM alarm interval 0 to 9999 0 1 k copies step 0 No PM alarm 002 Original Count Alarm DFU Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not If this is 1 the PM alarm function is enabled 0 No 1 Yes 5504 Jam Alarm Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level document misfeeds are not included 0 to 3 3 1 s...

Page 528: ... 1 On Switches the control call on off for the paper supply DFU 0 Off 1 On 0 No alarm 1 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number transfer sheets for each paper size A3 A4 B4 B5 DLT LG LT HLT 002 Staple Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On Switches the control call on off for the stapler installed in the finisher DFU 0 Off 1 On 0 No alarm 1 Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used 003 Toner Supply Al...

Page 529: ...isables initiating a call 0 to 1 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 002 Continuous Jams 003 Continuous Door Open 011 Jam Detection Time Length Sets the length of time to determine the length of an unattended paper jam 3 to 30 10 1 minute 012 Jam Detection Continuous Count Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to initiate a call 2 to 10 5 1 time 013 Door Open Time Length Sets the length of time the...

Page 530: ...ched off the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs 001 SC Call 0 or 1 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON 002 Service Parts Near End Call 003 Service Parts End Call 004 User Call 006 Communication Information Test Call 0 or 1 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON 007 Machine Information Notice 008 Alarm Notice 009 Non Genuine Toner Alarm 010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call 011 Supply Management Report Call 012 Jam Door Open Call ...

Page 531: ...oad is performed make sure to print out the SP Data List before performing SP5801 001 Memory Clear or SP5801 002 Memory Clear Engine 001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 15 below 002 Engine Clear Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings 003 SCS Initializes default system settings SCS System Control Service settings operation display coordinates and ROM update ...

Page 532: ...SP bit switches and the printer CSS counter 009 Scanner application Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes 010 Web Service Network application Deletes the Netfile NFA management files and thumbnails and initializes the Job login ID Netfiles Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software ...

Page 533: ...y and local storage file numbers 014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS Delivery Control Service settings 015 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS User Information Control Service settings 016 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS Machine Information Report Service settings 017 CCS Initializes the CCS Certification and Charge control Service settings 018 SRM Memory Clear Initializes the SRM System...

Page 534: ...received from sensors and switches p 4 236 Input Check 5804 Output Check Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes p 4 249 Output Check 5810 SC Reset Fusing SC Reset Resets all level A service call conditions such as fusing errors To clear the service call touch Execute on the LCD then turn the main power switch off on 5811 Machine No Setting DFU Code Set This SP presents t...

Page 535: ...Supply Inputs the telephone number of the supplier displayed on the user mode screen 004 Operation Allows the service center contact telephone number to be displayed on the user mode screen 5816 Remote Service 001 I F Setting Selects the remote service setting 0 to 2 2 1 step 0 Remote service off 1 CSS remote service on 2 Remote service on 002 CE Call Performs the CE Call at the start or end of th...

Page 536: ...calling the RCG 0 to 1 0 1 step 0 Uses the RCG certification 1 Does no use the RCG certification 008 RCG Connect Timeout Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to 90 30 1 second step 009 RCG Write Timeout Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to 100 60 1 second step 010 RCG Read Timeout Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to 100 6...

Page 537: ...d flag 0 Installation not completed 1 Installation completed 022 RCG C Regist Detail This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation status 0 RCG device not registered 1 RCG device registered 2 Device registered 023 Connect Type N M This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Internet connection 1 Dial up connection 061 Cert Expire Timing DFU Proximity ...

Page 538: ... port number of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded RC Gate N and the gateway This setting is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate N This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report 065 Proxy User Name This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name The length of the name is limited to 31 characters Any character beyond the 31st character is ig...

Page 539: ...of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL 11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection 12 The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the certification update request 13 The notification of the request for certification update...

Page 540: ...vent 17 The certification update request has been received from the GW URL the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed but a certification error has been received and the rescue certification is being recorded 18 The rescue certification of No 17 has been recorded and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update ...

Page 541: ...ion 4 Notification of a common certification without ID2 5 Notification that no certification was issued 6 Notification that GW URL does not exist 069 CERT Up ID The ID of the request for certification 083 Firmware Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update 084 Non HDD Firm Up This setting determines if the firmware can be updated even without the HDD installed 0 Not allowed update 1 All...

Page 542: ...000000___________ indicates Common certification 090 CERT Subject Displays the common name of the Remote certification subject CN the following 17 bytes Spaces are displayed as underscores _ Asterisks indicate that no Remote certification exists 000000___________ indicates Common certification 091 CERT Serial No Displays serial number for the Remote certification Asterisks indicate that no Remote ...

Page 543: ...ote certification is enabled 150 Selection Country Not used 151 Line Type Automatic Judgment Not used 152 Line Type Judgment Result Not used 153 Selection Dial Push Not used 154 Outside Line Outgoing Number Not used 156 Dial Up User Name Not used 157 Dial Up Password Not used 161 Local Phone Number Not used 162 Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming Not used 163 Access Point Not used ...

Page 544: ...Embedded RCG Gate is set 1 The Embedded RCG Gate is being set Only Box registration is completed In this status Remote device cannot communicate with this device 2 The Embedded RCG Gate is set In this status the Remote device cannot communicate with this device 3 The Remote device is being set In this status the Embedded RCG Gate cannot be set 4 The Remote module has not started 202 Letter Number ...

Page 545: ...ation update error 8 Other error 9 Confirmation executing 205 Confirm Place Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in answer to the confirmation request Displayed only when the result is registered at the Gateway 206 Register Execute Executes Embedded RCG Registration 207 Register Result Displays a number that indicates the registration result 0 Succeeded 2 Reg...

Page 546: ...quiry registration attempted without acquiring device status 12003 Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous registration 12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification and ID2 12005 Remote communication is prohibited The device has an Embedded RC gate related problem 12006 A confirmation request was made after the confirmation had been already complete...

Page 547: ... out of service 2390 Program out of service 2391 Two registrations for same device 2392 Parameter error 2393 RCG device not managed 2394 Device not managed 2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal 2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal 2397 Incorrect ID2 format 2398 Incorrect request number format 209 Instl Clear Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate setup NOTE Turn off and on the main po...

Page 548: ...e Address 001 CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code After you change this setting you must turn the machine off and on 002 RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG Remote Communication Gate destination for call processing at the remote service center 00000000h to FFFFFFFFh 1 ...

Page 549: ...canner application scanning counters system settings Engine SP Data Therefore whenever an NVRAM Upload Download is performed make sure to print out the SP Data List before performing SP5801 001 Memory Clear or SP5801 002 Memory Clear Engine 5825 NVRAM Data Download Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine After downloading is completed remove the card and turn the machine power o...

Page 550: ... Resumes printing spooled jog 0 Clears spooled job 069 Job Spooling Protocol This SP determines whether job spooling is enabled or disabled for each protocol This is a 8 bit setting 0 to 1 1 1 0 No spooling 1 Spooling enabled 0 LPR 4 BMLinks Japan Only 1 FTP Not Used 5 DIPRINT 2 IPP 6 Reserved Not Used 3 SMB 7 Reserved Not Used 090 TELNET 0 OFF 1 ON Disables or enables Telnet operation If this SP ...

Page 551: ... consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each These notations can be abbreviated See Note IPV6 Addresses below this table 147 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 1 These SPs are the IPv6 stateless addresses 1 to 5 referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11b in the format Stateless Address Prefix Length The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of ...

Page 552: ...ns can be abbreviated See Note IPV6 Addresses below this table Note IPV6 Addresses Ethernet and the Wireless LAN 802 11 reference the IPV6 Link Local address Prefix Length The IPV6 address consists of 128 bits divided into 8 blocks of 16 bits aaaa bbbb cccc dddd eeee ffff gggg hhhh The prefix length is inserted at the 17th byte Prefix Range 0x0 to 0x80 The initial setting is 0x40 64 For example th...

Page 553: ...igits are abbreviated as or fe80 0 0 0 207 40ff 340e only the last null set before 340e is abbreviated as 161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting Enable or disables the automatic setting for IPv6 stateless 0 or 1 1 1 1 Enable 0 Disable 236 Web Item visible Displays or does not display the Web system items 0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff 0 x ffff 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed bit0 Net RICOH bit1 Consumable Supplier bit...

Page 554: ...ays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web system 0 to 1 1 1 0 Not display 1 Display 242 Web Link2 Name Same as 239 243 Web Link2 URL Same as 240 244 Web Link2 visible Same as 241 5831 Initial Setting Clear DFU 002 Copier up application Clears the initial setting of copier 5832 HDD Formatting Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize then press When the execution...

Page 555: ...is function disabled the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized displayed or selected 0 to 1 0 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 002 Panel Setting Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from the initial system screen 0 to 1 0 1 0 Disable 1 Enable The setting for SP5836 001 has priority 071 Reduction for Copy Color 0 to 3 2 1 DFU 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 0...

Page 556: ...1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 083 Format Copy B W Other 0 to 3 1 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 084 Format for Printer Color 0 to 0 0 1 DFU 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 085 Format for Printer B W 0 to 3 1 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 086 Format for Printer B W HQ 0 to 3 2 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 091 Default for JPEG 5 to 95 50 1 Set...

Page 557: ...n of the wireless LAN This bandwidth setting varies for different countries 1 to 14 1 1 JPN 1 to 14 NA 1 to 11 EU 1 to 13 008 Transmission speed 0 x 00 to 0 x FF 0 x FF to Auto 0 x FF to Auto Default 0 x 11 55M Fix 0 x 10 48M Fix 0 x 0F 36M Fix 0 x 0E 18M Fix 0 x 0D 12M Fix 0 x 0B 9M Fix 0 x 0A 6M Fix 0 x 07 11M Fix 0 x 05 5 5M Fix 0 x 08 1M Fix 0 x 13 0 x FE reserved 0 x 12 72M reserved 0 x 09 22...

Page 558: ... whether the CTS self function is turned on or off 0 to 1 1 1 0 Off 1 On This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 044 11g Slot Time Selects the slot time for IEEE802 11 0 to 1 0 1 0 20 m 1 9 m This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 045 WPA Debug Lvl Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application 1 to 3 3 1 1 Info 2 warning 3 error This SP...

Page 559: ...the User Tools key These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry button on the User Tools screen 001 Toner Name Setting Black 007 Org Stamp 011 StapleStd1 012 StapleStd2 Standard Staples for B804 B805 013 StapleStd3 Standard Staples for B408 014 StapleStd4 021 StapleBind1 022 StapleBind2 Booklet Staples for B804 023 StapleBind3 ...

Page 560: ...Capture related 2 Certification related 3 Address book related 4 Machine management related 5 Output related printing delivery 6 Repository related 001 Setting 1 Default 00000000 do not change Netfiles Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 002 Setting 2 Adjusts the debug program mode setting Bit7 5682 mmseg log setting 0 Date Hour Minute Second 1 Min...

Page 561: ...0 x 01 Full Speed 0 x 04 Auto Change 002 Vendor ID Sets the vendor ID Initial Setting 0x05A Ricoh Company 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 1 DFU 003 Product ID Sets the product ID 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 1 DFU 004 Device Release No Sets the device release number of the BCD binary coded decimal display 0000 to 9999 100 1 DFU Enter as a decimal number NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized as the BCD ...

Page 562: ...set the length of time that the message is shown when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device 0 to 999 300 1 sec 008 IP Address Secondary Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery server for Scan Router This SP lets you set only the IP address and does not refer to the DNS setting Range 000 000 000 000 ...

Page 563: ...r exists Bit0 1 Sender specification required if set to 1 Bit6 is set to 0 011 Delivery Svr Capability Ext These settings are for future use They will let you increase the number of registered devices in addition to those registered for SP5845 010 There are eight bits Bit 0 to Bit 7 All are unused at this time 013 Server Scheme Primary 014 Server port Number Primary 1 to 65535 80 1 015 Server URL ...

Page 564: ...or Delivery Server Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable After clearing the ID the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on 003 Maximum Entries Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle 2000 to 20000 2000 1 step If a val...

Page 565: ...server 1 to 255 60 1 step 040 Addr Book Migration USB HDD This SP moves the address book data from the SD card or flash ROM on the controller board to the HDD You must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP 1 Turn the machine off 2 Install the HDD 3 Turn the machine on 4 Do SP5846 040 5 Turn the machine off on Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the HDD with...

Page 566: ...Turn the machine off 2 Install the new HDD 3 Turn the machine on 4 The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically However at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system administrator or key operator 5 Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041 After this SP executes successfully any user can access the address book 043 Addr Book Media Displays the slot numbe...

Page 567: ...n to the SD card Do this SP before replacing the controller board or HDD The operation may not succeed if the controller board or HDD is damaged 052 Restore All Addr Book Copies back all directory information from the SD card to the flash ROM or HDD Upload the address book from the old flash ROM or HDD with SP5846 51 before removing it Do SP5846 52 after installing the new HDD 053 Clear Backup Inf...

Page 568: ... 2 3 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 062 Complexity Option 1 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password 0 to 32 0 1step This SP does not normally require adjustment This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password ...

Page 569: ...he conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the length of the password 0 to 32 0 1step This SP does not normally require adjustment This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book 065 Complexity Option 4 Use this SP to set the c...

Page 570: ...e data sent externally by the Net File page reference function 5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by NetFile NetFile refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 002 Rate for Copy B W Text 0 to 6 0 1 0 1x 1 1 2x 2 1 3x 3 1 4x 4 1 5x 5 1 8x 6 2 3x1 003 Rate for Copy B W Other 0 to 6 0 1 005 Rate for Printer B W...

Page 571: ...itches access control on and off 0000 OFF 0001 ON 004 Acc Ctrl User Directory Lower 4 Bits 007 Acc Ctrl Comm Log Fax Lower 4 Bits 009 Acc Ctrl Job Control Lower 4 Bits 011 Acc Ctrl Device Management Lower 4 Bits 021 Acc Ctrl Delivery Lower 4 Bits 022 Acc Ctrl User Administration Lower 4 Bits 099 Repository Download Image Setting 100 Repository Download Image Max Size Specified the max size of the ...

Page 572: ...g No information is available at this time 5849 Installation Date Displays or prints the installation date of the machine 001 Display The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation Date or Inst Date 002 Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter 0 to 1 1 0 OFF No Print 1 ON Print 003 Total Counter When the total number of pages...

Page 573: ... 5853 Stamp Data Download Push Execute to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard disk Then these stamps can be used by the system If this is not done the user will not have access to the fixed stamps Confidential Secret etc You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the HDD Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP 5856 ...

Page 574: ... number of the log to be written to the SD Card 009 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the SD Card A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card 010 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any K...

Page 575: ...his SP the machine must be cycled off and on 013 Free Space on SD Card Displays the amount of space available on the SD card 014 Copy SD to SD Latest 4MB Copies the last 4MB of the log written directly to the card from shared memory onto an SD card 015 Copy SD to SD Latest 4MB Any Key This SP copies the log on an SD card the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory to...

Page 576: ... Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors 002 Controller SC Error 0 OFF 1 ON Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors 003 Any SC Error 0 to 65535 0 1step 004 Jam 0 OFF 1 ON Stores jam errors 5859 Debug Log Save Function 001 Key 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the controller board 9999999 to 9999999 1 002 Key 2 003 K...

Page 577: ...1 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail 0 to 1 1 1 0 No 1 Yes 022 SMTP Auth From Field Replacement Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated 0 to 1 0 1 0 No From item not switched 1 Yes From item switched 025 SMTP Auth Direct Sending Select the authent...

Page 578: ...or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail 0 or 1 0 0 Not added 1 Added 5870 Common Key Info Writing Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS specifications 001 Writing These SPs are for future use and currently are not used 003 Initialize 5873 SD Card Appli Move Allows you to move applications from one SD card another For more see SD Card Appli Mo...

Page 579: ...he machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code If the same SC occurs again the machine does not reboot 1 The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs 002 Reboot Type 0 to 1 0 1 0 Manual reboot 1 Automatic reboot 5878 Option Setup 001 Data Overwrite Security Press Execute to initialize the Data Overwrite Security option for the copier For more see DataOverwriteSecurity Unit in the ...

Page 580: ...n sending 5 Forbid download 6 Forbid delete 7 Forbid guest user 50 DocSvr Format Selects the display type for the document box list 0 to 2 0 1 0 Thumbnail 1 Icon 2 Details 51 DocSvr Trans Sets the number of documents to be displayed in the document box list 5 to 20 10 1 100 Set Signature 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 Signature for each e mail 1 Signature for all e mails 2 No signature Selects whether the sign...

Page 581: ...is SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 lower slot The operation stores The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER The file is saved as a text file txt prefixed with the number of the machine 1 Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 lower slot 2 Select SP5887 then touch EXECUTE Touch Execute in the message when you are promp...

Page 582: ... RICOH Aficio MP 5000 4 SAVIN 9040b 5 SAVIN 9040 6 SAVIN 9050b 7 SAVIN 9050 8 Gestetner MP 4000B 9 Gestetner MP 4000 10 Gestetner MP 5000B 11 Gestetner MP 5000 12 LANIER MP 4000B LD040B 13 LANIER MP 4000 LD040 14 LANIER MP 5000B LD050B 15 LANIER MP 5000 LD050 16 NRG MP 4000B 17 NRG MP 4000 18 NRG MP 5000B 19 NRG MP 5000 20 infotec MP 4000B 21 infotec MP 4000 22 infotec MP 5000B 23 infotec MP 5000 ...

Page 583: ...0 or 1 0 0 Light 1 Full 5985 Device Setting The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller Use this SP to enable and disable these features In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller board these SP codes must be set to 1 001 On Board NIC 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Function limitation When the Function limitation is set On board NIC is limited o...

Page 584: ...echanical counter device is removed If it is detected SC610 occurs 0 OFF 1 ON 5990 SP Print Mode 001 All Data List Prints out the SMC sheets 002 SP Mode Data List 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program ...

Page 585: ...se 001 Adjust Side to Side 1st Side 3 to 3 0 0 1 mm step 002 Adjust Side to Side 2nd Side 003 Leading Edge 5 to 5 0 0 1 mm step 005 Leading Edge 1st Side 3 to 3 0 0 1 mm step 006 Leading Edge 2nd Side 2 5 to 2 5 0 0 1 mm step 007 Trailing Edge Erase 10 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 6007 ADF Input Check 001 Original B5 Sensor 0 Paper not detected 1 Paper detected 002 Original A4 Sensor 003 Original LG Sensor...

Page 586: ...013 Registration Sensor 014 Exit Sensor 015 Top Cover Sensor 0 ADF cover closed 1 ADF cover open 016 Lift Sensor 0 ADF closed 1 ADF open 017 Inverter Sensor 0 Paper not detected 1 Paper detected 018 Pick up HP Sensor 0 HP Pick up roller Up 1 Not HP Pick up roller Down 019 Original Stopper HP Sensor 0 HP Stopper UP 1 Not HP Stopper Down ...

Page 587: ... 007 Inverter Motor Fwd 008 Inverter Motor Rev 011 Junction Gate Solenoid 012 Stamp Solenoid 6009 ADF Free Run Performs an ARDF free run in duplex mode Press ON to start press OFF to stop Note This is a general free run controlled from the copier 001 Free Run Simplex 002 Free Run Duplex 003 Free Run Stamp 6010 ADF Stamp Position Adjustment 5 to 5 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the horizontal position of th...

Page 588: ... Original Size Detection Priority 0 or 1 0 0 Setting 1 1 Setting 2 NA Setting 1 Setting 2 DLT SEF Folio SEF 11 x 15 LG SEF Foolscap SEF LT SEF US EXE 8 x 10 LT LEF US EXE LEF EU ASIA DLT SEF 8K 267 x 390 mm LT SEF 16K 195 x 267 mm LT LEF 16K 267 x 195 mm 6017 Sheet Through Magnification 5 to 5 0 0 1 step Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for ADF mode Use the key to toggle between...

Page 589: ...1 On for all original sizes 6128 Punch Position Sub Scan Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction For B804 B805 001 2 Hole DOM Japan 7 5 to 7 5 0 0 5 mm 002 3 Hole NA 003 4 Hole EU 004 5 Hole SCAN 005 2 Hole NA 006 1 Hole DOM Japan 6129 Punch Position Main Scan Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction For B804 B805 001 2 Hole DOM Japan 2 to 2 0 0 4 mm 002 3 Hole NA 0...

Page 590: ...each paper size For B804 B805 001 A3 SEF 5 to 5 0 0 25 mm 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF 006 B5 LEF 007 DLT SEF 008 LG SEF 009 LT SEF 010 LT LEF 011 12 x 18 012 Other 6131 Skew Correction Control Selects the skew correction control for each paper size For B804 B805 001 A3 SEF 0 to 1 1 1 mm 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF ...

Page 591: ...Jogger Fence Fine Adj This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the finisher stapling tray in the Booklet Finisher B804 B805 The adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed 001 A3 SEF 1 5 to 1 5 0 0 5 mm 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF 006 B5 LEF 007 DLT SEF 008 LG SEF 009 LT SEF 010 LT LEF 011 12 x 18 012 Other ...

Page 592: ...le position to the front side 3 5 to 3 5 0 1 step 6134 Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher B804 001 A3 SEF 3 to 3 0 0 2 mm Value Shifts staple position toward the crease Value Shifts staple position away from the crease 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 B5 SEF 005 DLT SEF 006 LG SEF 00...

Page 593: ... stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher B804 001 A3 SEF 3 to 3 0 0 2 mm Value Shifts staple position toward the crease Value Shifts staple position away from the crease 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 B5 SEF 005 DLT SEF 006 LG SEF 007 LT SEF 008 12 x 18 009 Other 6136 Book Fold Repeat Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher B804 2 to 30 2 1 time step ...

Page 594: ...un for booklet stapling 003 Free Run 3 B408 Not used B793 Shipping free run Simulates standby conditions during shipping 004 Free Run 4 Not used 6139 FIN KIN INPUT Check Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher B408 p 4 236 Input Check 6140 FIN EUP INPUT Check Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher B804 B805 p 4 236 Inpu...

Page 595: ...nce and the sides of the stack Value Increases the distance between the output jogger fence and the sides of the stack Value Decreases the distance between the output jogger fences and the sides of the stack 1 5 to 1 5 0 0 5 mm 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 LEF 006 A5 LEF 007 DLT SEF 008 LG SEF 009 LT SEF 010 LT LEF 011 HLT LEF 012 Other 6149 Max Pre Stack Sheet 0 to 3 3 1 sheets step Th...

Page 596: ...l 6800 Sheet Conversion Thick Paper Permits punching including tab sheets Note Do not change this setting 1 to 3 3 1 sheet 1 1 Sheet 2 2 Sheets 3 3 Sheets 6910 Shading Control 001 ON OFF 0 to 1 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON Enables or disables the shading adjustment for DF mode 002 Shading Interval A 0 to 60 3 1 sec DFU 003 Shading Interval B 0 to 120 60 1 DFU ...

Page 597: ...he total number of service calls that have occurred 7403 SC History 001 Latest Displays the most recent 10 service calls 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 7502 Total Paper Jam Counter Displays the total number of paper jams 7503 Total Original Jam Counter Displays the total number of original jams ...

Page 598: ...ensor at the precise time A Check out paper lag paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time 1 At power On 3 Tray 1 On 4 Tray 2 On 5 Tray 3 On 6 Tray 4 On 7 LCT On 8 Bypass On 9 Duplex On 11 Vertical Transport 1 On 12 Vertical Transport 2 On 14 Bank Transport Sn 2 On 17 Registration On 19 Fusing Exit On 20 Paper Exit On 21 Bridge Exit On 22 Bridge Trans...

Page 599: ...ank Transport 1 Off 54 Bank Transport 2 Off 57 Registration Sensor Off 58 LCT Feed Sensor Off 60 Paper Exit Off 61 Bridge Exit Off 62 Bridge Transport Off 64 Junction Gate Sensor Off 65 Duplex Exit Off 66 Duplex Entrance Off in 67 Duplex Entrance Off out 100 Finisher Entrance KIN 101 Finisher Shift KIN 102 Finisher Staple KIN 103 Finisher Exit KIN 105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor KIN 106 Finisher Jogg...

Page 600: ... Motor EUP 201 Finisher Shift Motor EUP 202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor EUP 203 Finisher Staple Motor EUP 204 Finisher Folder Motor EUP 206 Finisher Punch Motor EUP 7505 Original Jam Location Displays the total number of original jams by location These jams occur when the original does not activate the sensors A Check in paper late error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the p...

Page 601: ...er Sensor On 8 Original Exit Sensor On 53 Separation Sensor Off 54 Skew Correction Sensor Off 55 Interval Sensor Off 56 Registration Sensor Off 57 Inverter Sensor Off 58 Original Exit Sensor Off 7506 Jam Count by Paper Size 005 A4 LEF Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size 006 A5 LEF 014 B5 LEF 038 LT LEF 044 HLT LEF 132 A3 SEF 133 A4 SEF 134 A5 SEF 141 B4 SEF 142 B5 SEF ...

Page 602: ...15 11 44 50 2000 where CODE is the SP7504 number see above SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex TOTAL is the total jam error count SP7502 DATE is the date the jams occurred 7507 2 Latest 1 7507 3 Latest 2 7507 4 Latest 3 7507 5 Latest 4 7507 6 Latest 5 7507 7 Latest 6 7507 8 Latest 7 7507 9 Latest 8 7507 10 Latest 9 Size Code Size Code Size Code A4 S 05 A3 L 84 DLT L A0 A5 S 06 A4 L 85 LG L A4 ...

Page 603: ...s the SP7505 number see above SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex TOTAL is the total jam error count SP7503 DATE is the date the jams occurred 002 Last 1 003 Last 2 004 Last 3 005 Last 4 006 Last 5 007 Last 6 008 Last 7 009 Last 8 010 Last 9 Size Code Size Code Size Code A4 S 05 A3 L 84 DLT L A0 A5 S 06 A4 L 85 LG L A4 B5 S 0E A5 L 86 LT L A6 LT S 26 B4 L 8D HLT L AC HLT S 2C B5 L 8E Others FF...

Page 604: ...lays the fusing unit counter pages 005 Rotation PCU 0 999999999 0 1 mm Displays the PCD rotation counter distance 006 Rotation Transfer 0 999999999 0 1 mm Displays the transfer unit rotation counter distance 007 Rotation Fuser 0 999999999 0 1 mm Displays the fuser unit rotation counter distance 008 Rotation PCU 0 255 0 1 Displays the PCD rotation counter Distance PM 009 Rotation Transfer 0 255 0 1...

Page 605: ...s the PM counter To reset press 001 Paper Resets the PM counter of the paper 002 Clear PCD Resets the PM counter of the PCD Drum and Development unit except developer 003 Clear Transfer Resets the PM counter of the transfer unit 004 Clear Fuser Resets the PM counter of the fuser unit 005 Clear Web Reset the PM counter of the web unit 006 Clear All Clear Resets all PM counter ...

Page 606: ...age Heat Roller 0 to 999999 0 1 page Displays the parts counter pages of the hot roller 006 Page Pressure Roller 0 to 999999 0 1 page Displays the parts counter pages of the pressure roller 007 Page Cleaning Roller 0 to 999999 0 1 page Displays the parts counter pages of the cleaning roller 008 Page Thermistor 0 to 999999 0 1 page Displays the parts counter pages of the thermistors 009 Page Stripp...

Page 607: ...isplays the parts counter rotations of the hot roller 015 Rotation Pressure Roller 0 to 999999999 0 1 mm Displays the parts counter rotations of the pressure roller 016 Rotation Cleaning Roller 0 to 999999999 0 1 mm Displays the parts counter rotations of the cleaning roller 017 Rotation Thermistor 0 to 999999999 0 1 mm Displays the parts counter rotations of the thermistors 018 Rotation Stripper ...

Page 608: ...e Resets the parts counter of the transfer belt cleaning blade 005 Heat Roller Resets the parts counter of the hot roller 006 Pressure Roller Resets the parts counter of the pressure roller 007 Cleaning Roller Resets the parts counter of the cleaning roller 008 Web Resets the parts counter of the cleaning web 009 Thermistor Resets the parts counter of the thermistors 010 Stripper Resets the parts ...

Page 609: ...will occur if the device is installed but disconnected 002 Error Staple The request for a staple count failed at power on This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected 7827 MF Error Counter Clear Japan Only Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826 Japan Only 7832 Self Diagnose Result Display Execute to open the Self Diagnostics Result Display to view details about error...

Page 610: ...Clears the count Memory All Clear SP5801 resets this counter to zero 7853 Replacement Counter 001 PCD 0 to 255 0 1 Displays the replacement counter of the PCD Drum and Development unit 002 Transfer 0 to 1 0 1 Displays the replacement counter of the transfer unit 003 Fuser 0 to 1 0 1 Displays the replacement counter of the fusing unit 004 Web 0 to 1 0 1 Displays the replacement counter of the clean...

Page 611: ...revious PCD 002 Page Transfer 0 999999 0 1 page Displays the previous counter pages of the previous transfer unit 003 Page Fuser 0 999999 0 1 page Displays the previous counter pages of the previous fusing unit 004 Rotation PCD 0 999999999 0 1 mm Displays the previous counter rotations of the previous PCD 005 Rotation Transfer 0 999999999 0 1 mm Displays the previous counter rotations of the previ...

Page 612: ...nter rotations PM of the previous fusing unit 010 Rotation Web 0 to 255 0 1 Displays the previous counter rotations PM of the previous cleaning web 7950 Replacement Date 001 PCD 0 to 1 0 1 Displays the replacement date of the PCD 002 Transfer 0 to 1 0 1 Displays the replacement date of the transfer unit 003 Fuser 0 to 1 0 1 Displays the replacement date of the fusing unit 004 Web 0 to 1 0 1 Displa...

Page 613: ...unit 005 PCD Rotation 0 to 255 255 1 days Displays the remaining counter rotations of the PCD 006 Transfer Rotation 0 to 255 255 1 days Displays the remaining counter rotations of the transfer unit 007 Fuser Rotation 0 to 255 255 1 days Displays the remaining counter rotations of the fusing unit 009 PCD 0 to 255 100 1 Displays the remaining counter of the PCD 010 Transfer 0 to 255 100 1 Displays t...

Page 614: ...he PM yield of the transfer unit Pages 003 Fuser Page 0 to 9999999 160000 1 sheet Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit Pages 005 PCD Rotation 0 to 999999999 199000 1 mm Sets the PM yield of the PCD Rotations 006 Transfer Rotation 0 to 999999999 277000 1 mm Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit Rotations 007 Fuser Rotation 0 to 999999999 54880000 1 mm Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit Rotations...

Page 615: ...tion distance in the environment 10 C T 17 C 003 17 T 23 0 to 99999999 0 1 mm Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment 17 T 23 004 23 T 27 0 to 99999999 0 1 mm Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment 23 T 27 005 27 T 32 0 to 99999999 0 1 mm Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment 27 T 32 006 32 T 0 to 99999999 0 1 mm Displays the PCU rotation distance of th...

Page 616: ... the document server SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server Specifically the following questions can be answered How is the document server actually being used What application is using the document server most frequently What data in the document server is being reused Most of the SPs in this group a...

Page 617: ...rom the document server window or from another mode such as from a printer driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode window Sometimes they include occasions when the user uses a file that is already on the document server Each counter will be discussed case by case O Other applications external network applications for example Refers to network applications such as Web Image Mon...

Page 618: ...de Comb Combine Comp Compression Deliv Delivery DesApl Designated Application The application Copy Fax Scan Print used to store the job on the document server for example Dev Counter Development Count no of pages developed Dup Duplex Duplex printing on both sides Emul Emulation FC Full Color FIN Post print processing i e finishing punching stapling etc Full Bleed No Margins GenCopy Generation Copy...

Page 619: ...erver LSize Large paper Size Mag Magnification MC One color monochrome NRS New Remote Service which allows a service center to monitor machines remotely NRS is used overseas CSS is used in Japan Org Original for scanning OrgJam Original Jam Palm 2 Print Job Manager Desk Top Editor A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network and allows files...

Page 620: ...nd currently not available Rez Resolution SC Service Code Error SC code displayed Scn Scan Sim Simplex Simplex printing on 1 side S to Email Scan to E mail SMC SMC report printed with SP5990 All of the Group 8counters are recorded in the SMC report Svr Server TonEnd Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send Transmission YMC Yellow Magenta Cyan YMCK Yellow Magenta Cyan BlacK All of the Group 8 SPs ar...

Page 621: ... job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is specified A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending When a fax is received to fax memory the F counter increments but the L counter does not the document server is not used A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F counter the fax destinations in the broadcast are not counted separately A fax broadcas...

Page 622: ...er by each application to reveal how local storage is being used for input 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel 8012 C Jobs LS 8013 F Jobs LS 8014 P Jobs LS 8015 S Jobs LS 8016 L Jobs LS 8017 O Jobs LS When a scan job is sent to the document server the S counter increments When you enter document server m...

Page 623: ...a copy job that was stored on the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server the C and P counters both increment When a job already on the document server is printed with another application the L counter increments When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application the S counter increments If the original was scanned from within docum...

Page 624: ...work application Desk Top Binder Web Image Monitor etc the L counter increments 8041 T TX Jobs LS These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server that were later accessed for transmission over the telephone line or over a network attached to an e mail or as a fax image by I Fax 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note Jobs merged for sending are counted separately The L counter counts the n...

Page 625: ...8056 L TX Jobs DesApl 8057 O TX Jobs DesApl If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor for example then the O counter increments 8061 T FIN Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total the finishing methods The finishing method is specified by the application 8062 C FIN Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only The finishing method is specified by th...

Page 626: ...ethods for jobs executed by an external application over the network The finishing method is specified by the application 806x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode When a stored copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the document server the L counter increments See SP8066 1 806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode 806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode 806x 4 Bo...

Page 627: ...bs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job 8075 S Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job 8076 L Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document server mode window at t...

Page 628: ...73 Interrupted jobs paper jam etc are counted even though they do not finish If a job is paused and re started it counts as one job If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job then the job is counted at the time the error occurs For copy jobs SP 8072 and scan jobs SP 8075 the total is calculated by multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned One du...

Page 629: ... or black and white sent by fax directly on a telephone line Note Color fax sending is not available at this time 001 B W Black TX These counters count jobs not pages This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application including documents stored on the document server If the mode is changed during the job the job will count with the mode set when the job started If the same d...

Page 630: ... stored on the document server as fax images using I Fax Note Color fax sending is not available at this time 001 B W Black TX These counters count jobs not pages The counters for color are provided for future use the color fax feature is not available at this time The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending not when the job is sent 8131 T S to Email Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs ...

Page 631: ...he job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router Scan to Email or Scan to PC or if one job is sent to more than one destination each send is counted separately For example if the same document is sent by Scan to Emai...

Page 632: ...unted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled Even if several files are combined for sending the transmission counts as one job 8151 T Deliv Jobs PC 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a PC Scan to PC Note At the present time 8151 and ...

Page 633: ... for sending the transmission counts as one job 8161 T PCFAX TX Jobs These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission jobs A job is counted from when it is registered for sending not when it is sent 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note At the present time these counters perform identical counts 8163 F PCFAX TX Jobs This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application and sending the data out to the...

Page 634: ... stored the S count is 4 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button in the Copy mode window the C count is 6 and the L count is 6 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored the C count is 6 If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages the L count is 6 8201 T LSize Scan PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8203 F Lsize Scan Pgs 0 to 9999...

Page 635: ...he Copy mode screen 8212 C Scan PGS LS 8213 F Scan PGS LS 8215 S Scan PGS LS 8216 L Scan PGS LS Reading user stamp data is not counted If a job is cancelled the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet the S count is 4 If pages are copied but not stored on the document server these counters do not change If both side...

Page 636: ...number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning The front side is determined by which side the user loads face up 002 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed f...

Page 637: ...rd size 005 Platen Book mode Raising the ADF and placing the original directly on the platen 006 Simplex Duplex Selectable Select Simplex Duplex on the operation panel If the scan mode is changed during the job for example if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode the count is done for the last selected mode The user cannot select mixed sizes or non standard sizes with the fax application so if...

Page 638: ...obs 8245 S Scan PGS Org 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs 8246 L Scan PGS Org 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8241 8242 8243 8245 8246 824x 1 Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x...

Page 639: ...at Centering Positive Negative 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note The count totals the number of times the edit features have been used A detailed breakdown of exactly which features have been used is not given 8252 C Scan PGS ImgEdt 8255 S Scan SGS ImgEdt 8256 L Scan PGS ImgEdt 8257 O Scan PGS ImgEdt The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation p...

Page 640: ...e total number of pages scanned by the Copy application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 442 8303 F Scan PGS Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 443 8305 S Scan PGS Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These ...

Page 641: ...11 T Scan PGS Rez 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings 8315 S Scan PGS Rez 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings Note At the present time 8311 and 8315 perform identical counts 831x 1 1200dpi...

Page 642: ...r 8382 C Total PrtPGS 8383 F Total PrtPGS 8384 P Total PrtPGS 8385 S Total PrtPGS 8386 L Total PrtPGS 8387 O Total PrtPGS When the A3 DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104 1 A3 DLT page is counted as 2 When several documents are merged for a print job the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on...

Page 643: ... counter for the application used to print the pages is incremented The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel 0 to 9999999 0 1 8402 C PrtPGS LS 8403 F PrtPGS LS 8404 P PrtPGS LS 8405 S PrtPGS LS 8406 L PrtPGS LS Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L count Fax jobs done with Web Image Mon...

Page 644: ...ation 8424 P PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application 8425 S PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the scanner application 8426 L PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by b...

Page 645: ...x 9 8 8pages on 1 side 8 Up 842x 10 9 9 pages on 1 side 9 Up 842x 11 16 16 pages on 1 side 16 Up 842x 12 Booklet 842x 13 Magazine These counts SP8421 to SP8427 are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption Pages that are only partially printed with the n Up functions are counted as 1 page Here is a summary of how ...

Page 646: ...999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below regardless of which application was used 8432 C PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application 8434 P PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the ...

Page 647: ...s 2 843x 2 Series Book The number of pages printed in series one side or printed as a book with booklet right left pagination 843x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were applied including page numbering and date stamping 8441 T PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications 8442 C PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999...

Page 648: ...t by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 8447 O PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications 844x 1 A3 844x 2 A4 844x 3 A5 844x 4 B4 844x 5 B5 844x 6 DLT 844x 7 LG 844x 8 LT 844x 9 HLT 844x 10 Full Bleed 844x 254 Other Standard 844x 255 Other Custom ...

Page 649: ...y not used 008 Tray 7 Currently not used 009 Tray 8 Currently not used 010 Tray 9 Currently not used 8461 T PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications These counters are not the same as the PM counter The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers However these counts are based on ou...

Page 650: ...pe the number pages printed by the fax application 8464 P PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application 8466 L PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 846x 1 Normal 846x 2 Recycled 846x 3 Special 846x 4 Thick 846x 5 ...

Page 651: ... well Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also counted Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce Enlarge copying are counted The magnification rates of blank cover sheets slip sheets etc are automatically...

Page 652: ...Emul 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed 001 RPCS 002 RPDL 003 PS3 004 R98 005 R16 006 GL GL2 007 R55 008 RTIFF 009 PDF 010 PCL5e 5c 011 PCL XL 012 IPDL C 013 BM Links Japan Only 014 Other SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application Print jobs output to the document server are not counted ...

Page 653: ...mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax application Note Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available 8524 P PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application 8525 S PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application 8526...

Page 654: ...0 to 9999999 0 1 8581 T Counter 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output regardless of the application used In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine Note This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines For this machine the count is done for black only 8591 O Counter ...

Page 655: ... to 999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number 002 B W Black TX If a document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color At the present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are the same The counts include error pages If a document is sent to more than one d...

Page 656: ... Fax 002 B W Black TX If a document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color At the present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same The counts include error pages If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission the count is done for each destination Polling transmissi...

Page 657: ...is stored on the HDD If the job is cancelled before it is stored the pages are not counted If Scan to Email is used to send a 10 page document to 5 addresses the count is 10 the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together If Scan to PC is used to send a 10 page document to 5 folders the count is 50 the document is sent to each destination of the SMB FTP server Due to restrictions on some devic...

Page 658: ...liv PGS Svr 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by the Scan application 001 B W 002 Color The B W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router server If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes the counts are not done The count is executed even if regardless of con...

Page 659: ...ent with Scan to PC with the Scan application 001 B W 002 Color 8681 T PCFAX TXPGS These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax These SPs are provided for the Fax application only so the counts for SP8681 and SP8683 are the same 0 to 9999999 0 1 8683 F PCFAX TXPGS This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application from the PC through the copier to the destination When sending the sa...

Page 660: ... LS 8693 F TX PGS LS 8694 P TX PGS LS 8695 S TX PGS LS 8696 L TX PGS LS Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count If several documents are merged for sending the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast the F count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination 8701 T...

Page 661: ... scanned into the document server counted by the formats listed below 001 JPEG JPEG2000 002 TIFF Multi Single 003 PDF 004 Other 005 High Compression PDF 8715 S Scan PGS Comp 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan application counted by the formats listed below 001 JPEG JPEG2000 002 TIFF Multi Single 003 PDF 004 Other 005 High Compression PDF ...

Page 662: ...se SPs count the frequency of use number of rotations of the development rollers for black and other color toners Note For machines that do not support color the Black toner count is the same as the Total count 8781 Pixel Coverage Ratio This SP displays the number of toner bottles used The count is done based on the equivalent of 1 000 pages per bottle 8791 LS Memory Remain This SP displays the pe...

Page 663: ...er than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 10 steps This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines For this machine the count is done for black only 8851 Toner Coverage 0 10 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners 011 0 to 2 BK 021 3 to 4 BK 031 5 to 7 BK 041 8 to 10 BK 8861 Toner Coverage 11 20 0 to ...

Page 664: ...or toners 001 K Black toner Do not display for this machine 8891 Printing PGS Present Ink 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner 8901 Printing PGS Log Latest 1 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner 8911 Printing PGS Log Latest 2 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner 8921 Toner ...

Page 665: ...ing Includes time while controller saves data to HDD Does not include time spent in Energy Save Low Power or Off modes 003 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing background printing 004 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on Includes time while machine is performing background printing 005 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing back...

Page 666: ... 004 Group Group destination registrations 005 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations for relay TX 006 F Code F Code box registrations 007 Copy Program Copy application registrations with the Program job settings feature 0 to 255 0 255 008 Fax Program Fax application registrations with the Program job settings feature 009 Printer Program Printer application registrations with the Pro...

Page 667: ... 9999999 0 1 Display the total coverage and total printout number for each color 001 Total 003 Copy BW 007 Printer BW 010 Fax Print BW 012 A3 DLT 013 Duplex 015 Coverage BW 017 Coverage BW Print Page 101 Transmission Total Color 102 Transmission Total BW 103 Fax Transmission 104 Scanner Transmission Color 105 Scanner Transmission BW ...

Page 668: ...e Sensor See the table 1 following this table 002 Tray 1 Tray Set Sensor Set Not set 003 Tray 1 Paper Lift Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit 004 Tray 1 Paper End Sensor No paper Paper remaining 005 Tray 1 Paper Height Sensor 1 See the table 2 following this table 006 Tray 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 007 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor See the table 1 following this table 008 Tray 2 Tray Set Sensor Set Not s...

Page 669: ...aper detected Paper detected 021 Relay Sensor 4 No paper detected Paper detected 022 Relay Sensor LCT No paper detected Paper detected 023 By pass Paper End Sensor Not end Paper end 024 By pass Paper Size Sensor See the table 3 following this table 025 Registration Sensor Paper detected No paper detected 026 Fusing Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected 027 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detec...

Page 670: ... 043 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor Not HP HP 046 Fusing Unit Set Set Bit1 Not set Bit1 047 Toner Overflow Sensor Not full Full 048 Interlock Detection 1 Right or front door is open Right or front door is close 049 Interlock Detection 2 Right or front door is open Right or front door is close 050 Key Card Set Set Not set 051 Key Counter Set Set Not set 052 Mechanical Counter Set Not set set 053 1 Bi...

Page 671: ...Shift Tray Sensor Stay at rear Stay at front 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close Table 1 Paper Height Sensor 0 Deactivated 1 Activated actuator inside sensor Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2 Full 0 0 Nearly full 1 0 Near end 1 1 Almost empty 0 1 ...

Page 672: ... 81 2 LEF 3 A4 LEF A4 LEF 3 11 x 81 2 LEF 1 0 0 10 5 x 7 25 LEF 4 B5 LEF B5 LEF 4 10 5 x 7 25 LEF 0 1 0 A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1 1 The machine detects either 11 x 17 SEF or A3 SEF depending on the setting of SP 5 181 002 Tray 1 or 006 Tray 2 2 The machine detects either 8 5 x 14 SEF or B4 SEF depending on the setting of SP 5 181 003 Tray 1 or 007 Tray 2 3 The machine detects either 11 x 81 2 LEF or A4 ...

Page 673: ...5 LEF A3 SEF 1 A4 LEF 1 1 1 0 11 x 17 SEF 1 11 x 8 5 LEF A3 SEF 1 A4 LEF 1 1 0 0 8 5 x 11 SEF 1 8 5 x 11 SEF 2 A4 SEF 1 A5 LEF 1 1 0 1 8 5 x 11 SEF 1 8 5 x 11 SEF 2 A4 SEF 1 B5 LEF 1 0 0 1 5 5 x 8 5 SEF A5 SEF 1 0 1 1 5 5 x 8 5 SEF A5 SEF 0 0 1 1 5 5 x 8 5 SEF A6 SEF 0 1 1 1 5 5 x 8 5 SEF A6 SEF 1 1 1 1 1 When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is LEF it considers that the paper ...

Page 674: ...Inch version L3 L2 L1 W1 W2 A3 11 x 17 O O O O O 00011111 B4 10 x 14 O O O O X 00011110 F4 8 5 x 13 8 25 x 13 or 8 x 13 SP 5126 controls the size that is detected 8 5 x 14 O O O X X 00011100 A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 X X X O O 00000011 B5 LEF X X X O X 00000010 A4 SEF 11 x 8 5 X O O X X 00001100 B5 SEF X X O X X 00000100 A5 LEF SEF 5 5 x 8 5 8 5 x 5 5 X X X X X 00000000 ...

Page 675: ... 005 Staple Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected 006 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP 007 Shift Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected 008 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP 009 Paper Detection Sensor Staple No paper detected Paper detected 010 Paper Detection Sensor Shift No paper detected Paper detected 011 Paper Full Sensor 2000 Sheet Not Full Full 012 Oscillating Back Roller HP Sensor...

Page 676: ... 025 Punch Registration Detection Sensor No paper detected Paper detected 026 Punch Chad Full Sensor Not Full Full 027 Punch HP Not HP HP 028 Punch Selection DIPSW 1 See 1 029 Punch Selection DiPSW 2 See 1 030 Stack Junction Gate Open Closed HP Sensor Not HP HP 031 Leading Edge Detection Sensor No paper detected Paper detected 032 Drive Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP 033 Arrival Sensor No paper detect...

Page 677: ...aple detected Staple detected 042 Saddle Stitch Leading Edge Detection Front No staple detected Staple detected 043 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation Rear Not HP HP 044 Saddle Stitch Detection Rear No staple detected Staple detected 045 Saddle Stitch Leading Edge Detection Rear No staple detected Staple detected 046 Full Sensor 3000 Sheet Not Full Full 047 Exit Jogger HP Sensor Front Not used in th...

Page 678: ...11 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 246 SM Appendix DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type 0 0 Japan 1 0 Europe 0 1 North America 1 1 North Europe 2 Please refer to Lower Tray B804 Only in the Service Manual for the 2000 3000 Booklet Finisher ...

Page 679: ...cted 004 Staple Moving HP Sensor Stapler HP Sensor Not HP HP 005 Jogger HP Sensor Jogger Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP 006 Stack Feed out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP 007 Staple Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected 008 Staple Rotation Sensor Staple Rotation HP Sensor Not HP HP 009 Staple Sensor Staple detected No staple detected 010 Staple READY Detection Staple detected No staple detected 0...

Page 680: ...009 D011 D012 D013 D091 D092 4 248 SM Appendix 6139 Bit Description Reading 0 1 014 Tray Lower Sensor Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor Lower limit Not lower limit 015 Proof Full Sensor Paper Limit Sensor Not full Full ...

Page 681: ...3 Exit Motor 230 004 Exit Motor 180 005 Exit Motor 154 006 Exit Motor 90 007 Feed Motor 300 Paper feed motor Mainframe 008 Feed Motor 255 009 Feed Motor 230 010 Feed Motor 215 011 Feed Motor 180 012 Feed Motor 154 013 Feed Motor 90 014 Bank Feed Motor 300 Paper feed motor Optional paper feed unit 015 Bank Feed Motor 255 016 Bank Feed Motor 230 017 Bank Feed Motor 215 018 Bank Feed Motor 180 019 Ba...

Page 682: ...tch 1 2 Mainframe 029 Paper Feed Clutch 2 030 Bank Paper Feed Clutch 3 Paper feed clutch 3 4 Optional paper feed unit 031 Bank Paper Feed Clutch 4 032 LCT Paper Feed Clutch Paper feed clutch Optional LCT 033 Pick up Solenoid 1 Pick up Solenoid 1 2 Mainframe 034 Pick up Solenoid 2 035 Bank Pick up Solenoid 3 Pick up Solenoid 3 4 Optional paper feed unit 036 Bank Pick up Solenoid 4 037 LCT Pick up S...

Page 683: ...tion Gate Solenoid Junction gate 1 solenoid 049 Duplex Inverter Gate Solenoid Not used 050 Duplex Inverter Motor Fwd 230 051 Duplex Inverter Motor Fwd 180 052 Duplex Inverter Motor Fwd 154 053 Duplex Inverter Motor Fwd 90 054 Duplex Inverter Motor Rev 230 055 Duplex Inverter Motor Rev 180 056 Duplex Inverter Motor Rev 154 057 Duplex Inverter Motor Rev 90 058 Duplex By pass Motor Fwd 230 059 Duplex...

Page 684: ...ge Drive Motor 154 071 Bridge Drive Motor 90 072 Bridge Junction Gate Solenoid Junction Gate Solenoid Bridge unit 073 Bridge Drive Motor Reset 074 Bridge Drive Motor Enable 075 Bridge Cooling Fan Motor Not used 076 Transfer Belt Contact Motor 077 OPC Motor 230 Drum motor 078 OPC Motor 180 079 OPC Motor 154 080 OPC Motor 90 081 Transfer Development Motor 230 082 Transfer Development Motor 180 083 T...

Page 685: ...otor 092 Fusing Fan Motor Low 093 Exhaust Fan Motor High Exhaust fan motor 094 Exhaust Fan Motor Low 095 Duct Fan Motor Cooling fan motor 096 Exit Fan Motor High Paper exit cooling fan motor 097 Exit Fan Motor Low 098 PSU Fan Motor 099 1 Bin Junction Gate Solenoid Junction gate 2 solenoid 1 bin unit 100 Polygon Motor 230 101 Polygon Motor 180 102 Polygon Motor 154 103 Polygon Motor 90 104 LD 1 105...

Page 686: ...1 D092 4 254 SM Appendix 5804 Output Check 108 Charge Bias 109 Development Bias 110 Transfer Belt Voltage 111 ID Sensor LED 115 Cleaning Web Motor Web motor 116 Shift Tray Motor Not used 117 CTL Cooling FAN Controller fan 202 Scanner Lamp ...

Page 687: ...or 6144 3 Exit Motor 6144 4 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid 6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor 6144 6 Jogger Motor Jogger Fence Motor 6144 7 Staple Moving Motor Stapler Motor 6144 8 Staple Motor Stapler Hammer 6144 9 Staple Junction Gate SOL Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid 6144 10 Positioning Roller Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid 6144 11 Stack Feed out Motor 6144 1...

Page 688: ...145 5 Knock Roller Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor 6145 6 Shift Motor Shift Roller Motor 6145 7 Exit Guide Plate Open Close Motor Exit Guide Plate Motor 6145 8 Tray Lift Motor Upper Tray Lift Motor 6145 9 Oscillating Back Roller Motor Stacking Sponge Roller Motor 6145 10 Jogger Motor Jogger Fence Motor 6145 11 Stack Feed out Motor Feed Out Belt Motor 6145 12 Staple Moving Motor Corner Stapler ...

Page 689: ... Positioning Roller Solenoid 6145 19 Saddle Stitch Hold Solonoid Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid 6145 20 Stack Junction Gate Open Close Motor Stack Junction Gate Motor 6145 21 Trailing Edge Fence Moving Motor Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor 6145 22 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor Front Booklet Stapler EH185R Front 6145 23 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor Rear Booklet Stapler EH185R Rear 6145 24 Folder Pla...

Page 690: ...x 6145 27 Punch Motor Punch Drive Motor 6145 28 Punch Moving Motor Punch Movement Motor 6145 29 Punch Registration Detection Motor Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor 6145 30 Exit Jogger Motor Front 6145 31 Exit Jogger Motor Rear 6145 32 Exit Jogger Release Motor ...

Page 691: ...INTER SP TABLES 1001 Bit Switch 001 Bit Switch 1 0 1 bit 0 DFU bit 1 DFU bit 2 DFU bit 3 No I O Timeout 0 Disable 1 Enable Enable The MFP I O Timeout setting will have no effect I O Timeouts will never occur bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable Enable Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU bit 7 DFU ...

Page 692: ...l will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a Collate Type configured If 5 0 is enabled this Bit Switch has no effect bit 3 PCL5e c PS PDL Auto Switching 0 Enable 1 Disable Disable The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid job Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e c If Auto PDL switching is disabled these jobs will not be printed properly bit 4 DFU bit 5 DF...

Page 693: ...FU bit 1 DFU bit 2 PCL5e c Legacy HP compatibility 0 Disable 1 Enable Enable Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000 HP8000 In other words the left margin defined in the job usually ESC r0A will be changed to ESC r1A bit 3 DFU bit 4 DFU bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU bit 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 004 Bit Switch 4 0 1 bit 0 DFU bit 1 DFU bit 2 DFU ...

Page 694: ...l 0 Disable 1 Enable If enabled users will be able to configure a Collate Type Staple Type and Punch Type from the operation panel The available types will depend on the device and configured options After enabling the function the settings will appear under User Tools Printer Features System bit 1 DFU bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering the contents of a job 0 Disable 1 Enable If this Bi...

Page 695: ...it 6 PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via USB or Parallel Port IEEE 1284 0 Disable Immediately 1 Enable 10 seconds To be used if PDL auto detection fails A failure of PDL autodetection doesn t necessarily mean that the job can t be printed This bit switch tells the device whether to time out immediately default upon failure or to wait 10 seconds bit 7 This bitsw determines the timing o...

Page 696: ...age orientations of PostScript jobs Landscape or Portrait based on the content bit 7 PDF Orientation Auto Detect Function 0 Enable 1 Disable Automatically chooses page orientations of PDF jobs Landscape or Portrait based on the content 1003 Clear setting 001 Initialize Printer System Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode 003 Delete Program DFU 1004 Print Summary Touch...

Page 697: ...e Program Mode Tables 1005 Display Version Printer Application Version Displays the version of the controller firmware 1006 Sample Locked Print This SP disables enables use of the document server 0 or 1 0 1 0 Enabled Document server can be used 1 Disabled Document server cannot be used ...

Page 698: ...margin for all edges of the scanned image If the machine has scanned the edge of the original create a margin 0 to 5 0 1 mm step 1009 Remote scan disable Enables or disables the TWAIN function 0 or 1 0 0 Enable 1 Disable 1010 Non Display Clear Light PDF Displays or does not display the clear light PDF function 0 or 1 0 0 Display 1 Not display 1011 Org Count Disp Displays or does not display the or...

Page 699: ...ttings on the operation panel Range 5 lowest ratio 95 highest ratio 1 Comp 1 5 95 5 to 95 20 1 step 2 Comp 2 5 95 5 to 95 40 1 step 3 Comp 3 5 95 5 to 95 65 1 step 4 Comp 4 5 95 5 to 95 80 1 step 5 Comp 5 5 95 5 to 95 95 1 step 2024 Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel 1 Compression Rat...

Page 700: ......

Page 701: ...1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 1000 SHEET FINISHER SR790 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 702: ......

Page 703: ...1 4 5 STACK FEED OUT MOTOR 7 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 2 1 JAM DETECTION 8 3 SERVICE TABLES 9 3 1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 9 4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 10 4 1 GENERAL LAYOUT 10 4 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 11 4 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 13 4 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 15 4 5 JUNCTION GATES 16 Upper Tray Mode 16 Sort Stack Mode 16 Staple Mode 16 4 6 UPPER TRAY 17 4 7 LOWER TRAY UP DOWN MECHANISMS 18 4 8 PAPER SH...

Page 704: ......

Page 705: ...urn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section NOTE This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring 1 1 MAIN PCB 1 Rear cover A x 2 2 Main PCB B x 4 All B408R110 WMF B408R109 WMF B A ...

Page 706: ...it guide plate B 3 Upper side cover C x 2 4 Front cover support plate D x 1 5 Front cover E 6 Front inner cover F x 2 7 Harness G 8 Unhook the spring H 9 Turn the stapler unit I and take it out 10 Bracket J x 2 B408R102 WMF B408R113 WMF B408R114 WMF A B C D E F G H I J ...

Page 707: ...000 Sheet Finisher B408 MOTORS SM 3 B408 1 3 MOTORS 1 3 1 SHIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Shift motor A x 2 x 1 1 3 2 STAPLER MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Stapler motor A x 2 x 1 B408R123 WMF B408R124 WMF A A ...

Page 708: ...ANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Motor assembly A x 4 x 2 3 Upper transport motor B x 4 4 Exit motor C x 4 1 3 4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Main PCB 1 1 2 Lower transport motor A x 2 x 1 B408R112 WMF B408R111 WMF A B C A ...

Page 709: ... AND SENSORS 1 4 1 PREPARATION 1 Front cover and inner cover 1 2 2 Upper side cover A x 2 3 Upper tray B x 1 4 Lower side cover C x 2 5 Loosen the 2 screws D 6 Lower the lower tray guide plate E 7 Guide plate F x 4 B408R116 WMF B408R117 WMF B408R118 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 710: ...ND SENSORS B408 6 SM 1 4 2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR 1 Stack height sensor assembly A x 1 2 Stack height sensor B x 1 1 4 3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR 1 Stapler tray paper sensor A x 1 B408R121 WMF B408R120 WMF A B A ...

Page 711: ...00 Sheet Finisher B408 MOTORS AND SENSORS SM 7 B408 1 4 4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Lower tray lift motor A x 2 x 1 1 4 5 STACK FEED OUT MOTOR 1 Stack feed out motor A x 2 x 1 B408R119 WMF B408R122 WMF A A ...

Page 712: ... off Tray exit sensor Off check The tray exit sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on Stapler tray entrance sensor On check The stapler tray entrance sensor does not switch on within the normal time after the entrance sensor switched on Stapler tray entrance sensor Off check The staple tray entrance sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on Lower t...

Page 713: ...the table below SW100 1 2 Description 0 0 Normal operation mode Default 1 0 Packing mode Before packing the machine do the following Set switch 1 to 1 then back to zero The lower tray moves to the lowest position Then turn off the main switch After unpacking the machine do the following After turning the main switch back on the lower tray returns to home position automatically ...

Page 714: ...per Tray Exit Roller 3 Entrance Roller 4 Tray Junction Gate 5 Upper Transport Roller 6 Stapler Junction Gate 7 Lower Transport Rollers 8 Stapler 9 Stack Feed out Belt 10 Positioning Roller 11 Shift Roller 12 Lower Tray 13 Lower Tray Exit Roller B408D101 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...

Page 715: ...ight Sensor 8 Lower Tray Exit Sensor 9 Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 10 Shift HP Sensor 11 Shift Motor 12 Jogger Fence HP Sensor 13 Positioning Roller Solenoid 14 Stapler HP Sensor 15 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 16 Stapler Tray Paper Sensor 17 Stapler Hammer Motor 18 Staple Sheet Sensor 19 Stack Feed out Belt HP Sensor 20 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor 21 Staple Sensor B408D102 WMF B408D103 WMF 1 2 3...

Page 716: ...Lower Tray Lift Motor 24 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor 25 Stapler Motor 26 Jogger Fence Motor 27 Stack Feed out Motor 28 Main Board 29 Lower Transport Motor 30 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid 31 Exit Motor 32 Upper Transport Motor B408D104 WMF 23 24 25 26 27 28 22 29 30 31 32 ...

Page 717: ...2 S3 Jogger Fence HP Detects when the jogger fence is at home position 12 S4 Shift HP Detects when the shift roller is at home position 10 S5 Stack Feed out Belt HP Detects when the stack feed out belt is at home position 19 S6 Stapler HP Detects when the stapler is at home position 14 S7 Exit Guide Plate HP Detects when the exit guide plate is at home position 5 S8 Stapler Tray Entrance Detects c...

Page 718: ...ller 13 Switches SW1 Lower Tray Upper Limit Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit position 9 SW2 Front Door Safety Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened 6 SW3 Upper Cover Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is opened 1 PCBs PCB1 Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the copier printer 28 ...

Page 719: ...4 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Exit Motor 2 Upper Transport Motor 3 Lower Transport Motor 4 Shift Motor 5 Exit Guide Plate Motor 6 Lower Tray Lift Motor 7 Stack Feed out Motor 8 Jogger Motor 9 Stapler Motor B408D105 WMF B408D106 WMF B408D107 WMF 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 720: ...te solenoid C and stapler junction gate solenoid D Upper Tray Mode The tray junction gate solenoid remains off The copies go up to the upper tray Sort Stack Mode The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid remains off The copies are sent to the lower tray directly Staple Mode The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on The...

Page 721: ...0 Sheet Finisher B408 UPPER TRAY SM 17 B408 4 6 UPPER TRAY When the paper limit sensor A switches on during feed out for each of three consecutive sheets of paper paper overflow is detected B408D109 WMF A ...

Page 722: ... removed the stack height sensor F turns off and the tray lifts up Then the tray stops when the sensor turns on again the tray pushes up the feeler If the stack height sensor fails the lower tray upper limit switch G detects the tray and stops the motor This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure Sort Stack Mode Tray Down Every five sheets of paper the tray goes down until the sen...

Page 723: ...er transport roller the shift motor turns on driving the shift gear disk and the link D After the paper is delivered to the lower tray E the shift roller moves to its home position which is detected by the shift HP sensor F Then when the trailing edge of the next copy passes the upper transport roller the shift roller shifts again This operation is done every sheet When the trailing edge of each p...

Page 724: ...ioning roller C pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper D For the horizontal paper alignment the jogger front fence E and the rear fence F move to the waiting position which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper When aligning the paper vertically the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the waiting position After the vertical position has been aligned the jogger fence pushes the pap...

Page 725: ...late A is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers This operation is done for all paper sizes but is only needed for the larger sizes The exit guide plate motor B and exit roller release cam C control the exit guide plate movement When the exit guide plate motor starts the cam turns and the exit guide plate moves up When stapling is finished the exit guide plate motor turns on again to clos...

Page 726: ... or no staples in the staple cartridge staple end is indicated on the operation panel The stapler sensor C detects this The stapler rotation HP sensor D checks whether the staple hammer mechanism returns to home position after each stack has been stapled When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor the copier detects a staple jam When a staple jam has occurred the jammed staple is ins...

Page 727: ...om its home position to the stapling position If two staple position mode is selected the stapler moves to the front stapling position first then moves to the rear stapling position However for the next copy set it staples in the reverse order at the rear side first then at the front side After the job is completed the stapler moves back to its home position The stapler HP sensor B detects this B4...

Page 728: ... to the shift roller The shift roller takes over stack feed out after the leading edge reaches this roller Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor the stack feed out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to the lower tray Then the stack feed out motor turns on again until the pawl B actuates the stack feed out belt home position s...

Page 729: ...AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER DF3010 B802 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 730: ......

Page 731: ...NAL SET SEPARATION SKEW CORRECTION AND SCANNING ENTRANCE SENSOR 7 1 3 4 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS 8 1 3 5 REGISTRATION SENSOR 9 1 3 6 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR 9 1 3 7 DF POSITION SENSOR 10 1 3 8 COVER SENSOR 10 1 3 9 PICK UP ROLLER HP AND ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR 11 1 3 10 STAMP SOLENOID 12 1 4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE 14 1 4 1 ADF FEED MOTOR 14 1 4 2 ADF INVERTER MOTOR 15 1 4 3 ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR 15 1 4 4...

Page 732: ...L SIZE DETECTION 23 2 2 2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE 25 2 2 3 PICK UP AND SEPARATION 26 2 2 4 SKEW CORRECTION 27 2 2 5 SLIP DETECTION 28 2 2 6 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 28 2 2 7 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION 30 3 SERVICE TABLES 31 3 1 DIP SWITCHES 31 ...

Page 733: ...dure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring Clamp ...

Page 734: ......

Page 735: ...NT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 COVERS AND TRAY 1 1 1 FRONT AND REAR COVER 1 Open the left cover A 2 Front cover B x 1 hook x 2 3 Rear cover C x 2 hook x 2 1 1 2 ORIGINAL TRAY 1 Open the left cover 2 Rear cover 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover 3 Front cover 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover ...

Page 736: ...Covers and Tray B802 2 SM 4 Pivot cover A x 1 5 Original tray B x 1 x 1 x 2 ...

Page 737: ...oc Feeder B802 1 2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS 1 2 1 PICK UP ROLLER 1 Open the left cover 2 Bushings A x 1 each 3 Pick up roller B gear x 1 one way gear x 1 1 2 2 FEED BELT 1 Open the left cover 2 Front feed unit cover A 3 Rear feed unit cover B hook x 2 ...

Page 738: ...Document Feed Components B802 4 SM 4 Feed belt unit C 5 Slide the tension plate D hook 6 Belt unit cover E x 1 ...

Page 739: ...oc Feeder B802 7 Belt tension unit F 8 Feed belt G 1 2 3 SEPARATION ROLLER 1 Open the left cover 2 Separation roller cover A 3 Remove the bushing B x 1 4 Slide the separation roller shaft to the front side and then remove it 5 Separation roller C x 1 ...

Page 740: ...COMPONENTS 1 3 1 DF DRIVE BOARD 1 Rear cover 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover 2 DF drive board A x 4 all s 1 3 2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR 1 Open the left cover 2 Remove the tray stopper A while pushing the hook with a screw driver ...

Page 741: ...original tray B 4 Original tray cover C x 3 5 Original trailing edge sensor D x 1 hook 6 Original length sensors E x 1 each hook 1 3 3 ORIGINAL SET SEPARATION SKEW CORRECTION AND SCANNING ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Open the left cover 2 Open the inner upper cover A stepped screw x 3 ...

Page 742: ...ection sensor D x 1 hook 6 Scanning entrance sensor E x 1 hook 1 3 4 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS 1 Open the left cover 2 Open the inner upper cover 1 3 3 Original Set Separation Skew Correction and Registration Sensor 3 Original width sensor bracket A x 2 ground cable x 1 4 Original width sensors B x 1 each hook ...

Page 743: ...SENSOR 1 Open the ARDF 2 White plate A stud screw x 1 3 Registration sensor bracket B x 1 4 Registration sensor C x 1 1 3 6 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR 1 Open the left cover 2 Open the feed in guide plate A 3 Guide plate B x 2 stepped screw x 1 front side 4 Original exit sensor C x 1 hook ...

Page 744: ...R 1 Rear cover 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover 2 ARDF drive board 1 3 1 ARDF Drive Board 3 DF position sensor bracket A x 1 4 DF position sensor B x 1 hook 1 3 8 COVER SENSOR 1 Open the left cover 2 Rear cover 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover 3 Cover sensor A x 1 hook ...

Page 745: ... PICK UP ROLLER HP AND ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR 1 Open the left cover 2 Rear cover 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover 3 Release the clamp A x 1 and then slide the harnesses away 4 Sensor bracket B x 1 x 2 5 Pick up roller HP sensor C hook 6 Original stopper HP sensor D hook ...

Page 746: ...he left cover 2 Remove the platen plate A 3 Stamp solenoid cover B x 1 4 Remove the screw C x 1 You cannot remove the stamp solenoid at this time 5 Rear cover 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover 6 Disconnect the stamp solenoid harness D 7 ADF feed motor 1 4 1 ADF Feed Motor ...

Page 747: ...Electrical Components SM 13 B802 Auto Reverse Doc Feeder B802 8 Put the stamp solenoid harness into the cutout E 9 Pull out the stamp solenoid F ...

Page 748: ...r 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover 2 Harness guide A x 2 all s all s 3 Remove the spring B 4 Stay bracket C stepped screw x 1 5 Slide the feed motor gear D to the left side seen from the front of the machine and then remove the timing belt E 6 ADF feed motor bracket F x 3 7 ADF feed motor G x 1 ...

Page 749: ...DF Feed Motor 2 ADF inverter motor bracket A x 2 x 1 timing belt 3 ADF inverter motor B x 4 1 4 3 ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover 2 Ground cable A x 1 3 ADF transport motor bracket B x 2 x 1 4 ADF transport motor C x 2 1 4 4 ADF PICK UP MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 1 Front and Rear Cover ...

Page 750: ...e B802 16 SM 2 Harness guide A x 2 all s all s 3 Stay bracket B stepped screw x 1 4 Release 6 clamps on the ADF pick up motor bracket C x 6 5 ADF pick up motor bracket D x 3 x 1 6 ADF pick up motor E x 2 x 1 timing belt ...

Page 751: ...on Roller 3 Skew Correction Sensor 4 Separation Sensor 5 Feed Belt 6 Separation Roller 7 Original Set Sensor 8 Pick up Roller 9 Original Length Sensor 1 10 Original Length Sensor 2 11 Original Length Sensor 3 12 Inverter Roller 13 Junction Gate 14 Exit Roller 15 Original Exit Sensor 16 Transport Roller 17 Registration Sensor 18 Registration Roller 19 Scanning Entrance Sensor ...

Page 752: ...ft Cover Sensor 6 Pick up Motor 7 Pick up Roller HP Sensor 8 Original Stopper HP Sensor 9 ADF Inverter Motor 10 ADF Feed Motor 11 Original Length Sensor 1 12 Original Length Sensor 2 13 Original Length Sensor 4 14 DF Drive Board 15 Original Trailing Edge Sensor 16 Original Set Sensor 17 Stamp Solenoid 18 Separation Sensor 19 Original Exit Sensor 20 Junction Gate Solenoid 21 Registration Sensor ...

Page 753: ... Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not Skew Correction Detects the leading edge of the original to turn off the DF feed and transport motors 3 Registration Detects the original exposure timing and checks for original misfeeds 21 Cover Sensor Detects whether the feed in cover is opened or not 4 Original Width Sensor S Detects the original width S 1 Original Width Sensor M Detects the ori...

Page 754: ...ided mode used to detect original misfeeds 19 Original Trailing Edge Sensor Detects the trailing edge of the last original to stop copy paper feed and to turn off the transport motor and checks for original misfeeds 15 Separation Sensor The machine uses this sensor to check if the original has slipped during feed in to make sure that original feed starts at the correct time 18 Solenoids Stamp Ener...

Page 755: ...Doc Feeder B802 2 1 3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Registration Roller 2 Transport Roller 3 Skew Correction Roller 4 Separation Roller 5 Feed Belt 6 ADF Transport Motor 7 Pick up Roller 8 Exit Roller 9 ADF Inverter Motor 10 ADF Feed Motor 11 Inverter Roller ...

Page 756: ... drives the pick up B feed belt C separation D and skew correction rollers E ADF Transport Motor and ADF Inverter Motor ADF Transport Motor A drives the registration roller B transport roller C and exit roller D ADF Inverter Motor E drives the Inverter Roller F ...

Page 757: ... length sensors F Length Sensor S G Length Sensor M H Length Sensor L Based on the combined output of the length sensors and the width sensors the machine can detect the size of the original This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table below Width Sensor Length Sensor Area Size SS S M L LL S M L LT A B A3 SEF 297 x 420 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON O O B4 SEF 257 x 364 ON ON ON ON ON ON ...

Page 758: ... x 14 SEF LG ON ON ON ON ON O2 8 5 x 13 SEF F4 ON ON ON ON ON 2 O 8 25 x 13 SEF ON ON ON ON ON 8 x 13 SEF F ON ON ON ON ON 8 5 x 11 SEF LT ON ON ON O3 O6 8 5 x 11 LEF LT ON ON ON On O4 O7 7 25 x 10 5 SEF US EXE ON ON ON O 10 5 x 7 25 SEF US EXE ON ON ON ON 4 10 x 8 SEF ON ON ON 3 5 5 x 8 5 SEF HLT O 5 5 x 8 5 LEF HLT ON ON O 267 mm x 390 mm ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 5 195 mm x 267 mm ON ON ON 6 267 mm ...

Page 759: ...ent feeder the method for original document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size but the document length detection method is different Therefore the scanning speed is slightly slower Document length detection From when the skew correction sensor switches on until it switches off the CPU counts the transport motor pulses The number of pulses determines the length of t...

Page 760: ... up to the detected original length is read from memory and printed 2 2 3 PICK UP AND SEPARATION The original is set with the image facing up The original pushes actuator and the original set sensor is activated After pressing the start button the pick up motor is activated and the original feed unit A moves down At the same time the ADF feed motor is activated and the pick up roller B feeds origi...

Page 761: ... the skew correction roller is moved As a result when the leading edge of the paper gets to the skew correction roller skew in the original is removed A short time after the leading edge of the original turns on the skew correction sensor C the feed motor A turns off and rotates in reverse At this time the skew correction roller B and the feed belt D both turn and original feed continues The regis...

Page 762: ...lly If the original arrives late the machine enters the slip mode In the slip mode the machine measures the time for the leading edge of the original to move from the separation sensor to the skew correction sensor B The machine uses this time to adjust the length of time that the entrance roller stays off to correct skew This stops feed for enough time for the original to be in the correct positi...

Page 763: ...l the junction gate solenoid is activated and the junction gate F opens The original is then transported towards the inverter table Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor the junction gate solenoid switches off and the junction gate F is closed When the original has been fed onto the inverter table the ADF inverter motor switches on The original is then fed by the inve...

Page 764: ... exit sensor detects an original The skew correction sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by the maximum length of the original 150 mm after the skew correction sensor turned on The registration sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by its length x 1 5 after the registration sensor turned on Sensor stays on too long The exit sensor does not turn off even if the ori...

Page 765: ...0 0 Free run No original Two sided mode 100 speed 0 1 0 1 Free run With original One sided mode 32 speed 0 1 1 0 Free run With original Two sided mode 32 speed 0 1 1 1 Free run With original One sided mode 70 speed 1 0 0 0 Free run With original Two sided mode 70 speed 1 0 0 1 Free run With original One sided mode 200 speed 1 0 1 0 Free run With original Two sided mode 200 speed 1 0 1 1 Transport ...

Page 766: ......

Page 767: ...BOOKLET FINISHER FINISHER SR3020 SR3030 SR4010 SR4020 B804 B805 D373 D374 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 768: ......

Page 769: ...AY EXIT SENSOR 5 1 2 6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR 6 1 2 7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR 7 1 2 8 PRE STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR 7 1 3 STAPLER UNIT 8 1 3 1 CORNER STAPLER 8 1 3 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 9 1 4 FOLD UNIT 10 1 4 1 FOLD UNIT 10 1 4 2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR 12 1 4 3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR 12 1 4 4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR 13 1 4 5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT FOR B804 ONLY 14 1 4 6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ...

Page 770: ...RAY B804 ONLY 46 2 5 CORNER STAPLING 49 2 5 1 STACKING AND JOGGING 49 2 5 2 STAPLER MOVEMENT 50 2 5 3 CORNER STAPLING 52 2 6 BOOKLET STAPLING B804 ONLY 53 2 6 1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM 53 2 6 2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING 54 2 6 3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS 60 2 7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 63 2 7 1 FEED OUT 63 2 7 2 FEED OUT STACKING 64 2 8 PUNCH UNIT B702 FOR B804 B805 65 2 8 1 OVERVIEW ...

Page 771: ...ocedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 772: ......

Page 773: ...805 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 COVERS 1 1 1 EXTERIOR COVERS 1 Open the front door D 2 Small upper cover A x1 3 Upper cover B x2 4 Front door bracket C x1 5 Front door D 6 Front left side cover E x2 7 Cover F 8 Paper exit cover G x2 9 Rear cover H x2 ...

Page 774: ...rear cover Exterior Covers 1 Support the tray A with your right hand 2 Pull gear B toward you to release 3 Slowly lower the tray until it stops 4 Front side cover C x1 5 Rear side cover D x1 6 Upper tray E x1 7 Tray bracket F x4 x1 shoulder screw 8 End Fence G x3 ...

Page 775: ... MAIN UNIT 1 2 1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR LIMIT SWITCH 1 Front door front left side cover rear cover upper cover Exterior Cover 2 End fence 1 1 2 Upper Tray End Fence 3 Upper tray exit mechanism A x4 x3 4 Upper tray limit sensor B x1 x1 5 Upper tray limit switch C x2 ...

Page 776: ... 2 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Open the front door A 2 Pull out the stapling unit B 3 Positioning roller C x1 timing belt x1 1 2 3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Small upper cover 1 1 1 Exterior Cover 2 Proof tray exit sensor bracket A x1 ...

Page 777: ...cover upper cover 1 1 1 Exterior Cover 2 Upper tray paper height sensor bracket A x1 3 Upper tray paper height sensor B staple mode S08 x1 4 Upper tray paper height sensor C non staple mode S09 x1 1 2 5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Rear cover Upper covers Front door Cover Paper exit cover 1 1 1 Exterior Cover 2 Inner cover A x2 ...

Page 778: ...plate B x1 Link and spring x1 x1 4 Upper tray exit sensor C S6 x1 1 2 6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR 1 Exit guide plate 1 2 5 Exit Guide Plate Upper Tray Exit Sensor 2 Guide plate A hook x 2 3 Sensor bracket B x1 4 Proof tray full sensor C S11 x1 ...

Page 779: ... ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier 2 Sensor bracket A x1 3 Finisher entrance sensor B S1 x1 1 2 8 PRE STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier 2 Sensor bracket A 3 Pre stack tray exit sensor B S2 ...

Page 780: ...Stapler Unit B804 B805 8 SM 1 3 STAPLER UNIT 1 3 1 CORNER STAPLER 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the stapler unit 3 Inner cover A x3 4 Stapler unit holder B x1 5 Corner stapler C M20 x1 ...

Page 781: ...Stapler Unit SM 9 B804 B805 Booklet Finisher Finisher B804 B805 1 3 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Open the front door A 2 Pull out the stapling unit B 3 Positioning roller C x1 timing belt x1 ...

Page 782: ...d Unit B804 B805 10 SM 1 4 FOLD UNIT 1 4 1 FOLD UNIT 1 Remove the back cover 1 1 1 Exterior Covers 2 Open the front door The stapler unit is heavy 3 Ground cable A x1 4 Harness B x6 x6 5 Stapler unit C x4 ...

Page 783: ...placed the folding unit 1 Read the DIP SW settings on the decal A attached to the back of the new folding unit 2 Check the DIP SW settings on the main board B of the finisher 3 If these settings are different change these settings to match the settings printed on the decal attached to the folding unit Set DIP switches 1 to 4 the switch set on the right Do not touch the other DIP switches ...

Page 784: ... 1 3 2 Positioning Roller 2 Fold unit entrance sensor bracket A x2 3 Fold unit entrance sensor B S26 x1 x1 1 4 3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the stapler unit 1 3 2 Positioning Roller 3 Fold unit vertical guide plate A 4 Fold unit inner cover B x2 Spring pin x1 ...

Page 785: ...sensor bracket E x1 8 Fold unit exit sensor F S31 x1 1 4 4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time do those adjustments first then replace the sensor 1 4 5 Folding Horizontal Skew Adjustment or Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment 1 Remove the stapler unit 1 4 1 Fold Unit ...

Page 786: ...nt only if the edges of folded booklets are not even 1 Switch the copier on and enter the SP mode 2 Europe Asia Use SP6 134 001 this is for A3 paper North America Use SP6 134 005 this is for DLT paper If the original setting of SP6 134 001 or 005 is not 0 then you must do the vertical skew adjustment 1 4 6 Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment after you finish this horizontal skew procedure 3 Use the 10 k...

Page 787: ...y slightly and allow it to descend under its own weight 10 Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door 11 Do a folding test Switch the copier on Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF On the copier operation panel select booklet stapling Press Start One sheet is folded 12 Remove the sheet from the lower tray 13 Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and...

Page 788: ...mm by moving the bottom fence K 18 Raise the tip of the adjustment screw J and allow it to lower under its own weight 19 Attach and tighten the lock screw L 20 Push the stapler unit into the machine close the front door then turn the copier on 21 Europe Asia Do SP6 134 001 this is for A3 paper North America Do SP6 134 005 this is for DLT paper 22 Reset it to 0 23 Do the test again 24 If the result...

Page 789: ... pointing down and face up the same way that it came out of the finisher 4 Referring to the diagram determine if the skew is positive A or negative B 5 Measure the amount of skew 6 Enter the SP mode Europe Asia Use SP6 134 001 this is for A3 paper North America Use SP6 134 005 this is for DLT paper 7 Enter one half the measured amount of skew Example If the measure amount of skew is 1 2 mm enter 0...

Page 790: ...Fold Unit B804 B805 18 SM ...

Page 791: ...LET STAPLER UNIT 1 5 1 BOOKLET STAPLER 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the stapler unit 1 2 2 Positioning Roller 3 Harness cover A x2 4 Booklet stapler support stay B x4 x2 x4 5 Stapler C x4 1 5 2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the stapler unit 1 4 1 Fold Unit ...

Page 792: ...y A x4 4 Left plate B x4 5 Harness cover C x2 6 Booklet stapler support stay D x4 x2 x4 7 Booklet stapler E x4 8 Booklet stapler motor F x2 x1 To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor 1 Reattach the booklet stapler motor Do not tighten the screws ...

Page 793: ... the booklet stapler stay This tool is included with the stapler spare part 3 Turn the gear B with your finger until it stops 4 Tighten the screws to attach to the booklet stapler motor 5 Remove the stay again and remove the special tool 6 Reattach the booklet stapler stay 7 Push the stapler unit into the machine ...

Page 794: ...ONENT LAYOUT 2 1 1 GENERAL LAYOUT 1 Proof Tray Junction Gate 2 Punch Unit 3 Stapler Junction Gate 4 Pre Stack Junction Gate 5 Pre Stack Tray 6 Corner Stapler M20 7 Lower Tray Booklet 1 8 Folder Rollers 1 9 Folder Plate 1 10 Booklet Stapler 1 11 Upper Tray Shift 12 Proof Tray ...

Page 795: ...the proof tray 12 when neither sorting nor stapling are selected for the job Upper tray The upper tray 11 receives copies that are sorted and shifted and also receives copies that have been corner stapled Corner stapling is provided on both the B804 and the B805 Pre stack tray The pre stack tray 5 has a switchback mechanism to increase the productivity of stapling 2 3 Pre Stacking Pre stacking is ...

Page 796: ...0 6 Proof Tray Full Sensor S11 7 Finisher Entrance Sensor S1 8 Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor S9 Non Staple Mode 9 Upper Tray Limit Sensor S12 10 Upper Tray Limit Switch SW2 11 Stacking Roller HP Sensor S13 12 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor M10 13 Upper Tray Exit Sensor S6 14 Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor S8 Staple Mode 15 Shift Roller HP Sensor S5 16 Shift Roller Motor M18 17 Exit Guide Plate Moto...

Page 797: ... 5 Pre Stack Tray Exit Sensor S2 6 Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid SOL4 7 Positioning Roller Solenoid SOL3 8 Positioning Roller Motor M14 9 Lower Tray Full Sensor Front S34 1 10 Lower Tray Full Sensor Rear S33 1 11 Main Board PCB1 12 Upper Tray Full Sensor S20 2 13 Upper Tray Full Sensor S19 14 Booklet Stapler Board PCB2 1 15 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid SOL5 1 1 B804 Only 2 B805 Only ...

Page 798: ...nsor S24 2 Punch Drive Motor M24 3 Punch HP Sensor S24 4 Punch Unit Board PCB3 5 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor M7 6 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor S22 7 Paper Position Sensor S3 8 Punch Hopper Full Sensor S4 9 Punch Movement Motor M9 10 Punch Movement HP Sensor S21 ...

Page 799: ... 4 Feed Out Belt Motor M5 5 Booklet Stapler EH185R Rear M23 1 6 Booklet Stapler EH185R Front M22 1 7 Jogger Fence Motor M15 8 Jogger Fence HP Sensor S15 9 Corner Stapler Movement Motor M6 10 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor S14 11 Corner Stapler EH530 M20 12 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor M13 13 Corner Stapler HP Sensor S17 14 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor S18 15 Stack Junction Gate Motor M17 1 1 B804 Only ...

Page 800: ...m HP Sensor S30 7 Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor S28 8 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor S26 9 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor M8 10 Fold Unit Exit Sensor S31 2 1 3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Here is a general summary of all the electrical components of the B804 B805 finishers In the table below a number that appears in bold text M8 etc denotes a component that is on the 2000 3000 Sheet Finisher B804 onl...

Page 801: ... other rollers in the lower transport area M4 Upper Proof Tray Exit Motor Drives 1 proof tray exit rollers 2 extension and retraction of the stacking sponge roller 3 upper tray exit rollers M5 Feed Out Belt Motor Drives the feed out belt that moves the stapled stacks out of the stapling tray after stapling M6 Corner Stapler Movement Motor Moves the corner stapler horizontally on a steel rod to pos...

Page 802: ... of the stack into the nip of the fold rollers to start the fold M12 Fold Roller Motor Rotates forward and drives the fold rollers that fold the stack and feed it out of the fold unit reverses to feed the fold once more into the fold unit and then rotates forward again to feed the fold out of the fold unit M13 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor Swivels the corner stapler and positions it so the staple ...

Page 803: ...de Plate Motor Drives the mechanism that raises and lowers the exit guide plate M20 Corner Stapler EH530 This is the roving corner stapler mounted on a steel rail that staples 1 at the front 2 at the rear straight staple 3 at the rear diagonal staple and 4 font and rear two staples M21 Upper Tray Lift Motor Raises and lowers the upper tray during feed out to keep the tray at the optimum height unt...

Page 804: ... and signals an error if it is missing or not installed completely S5 Shift Roller HP Sensor Located near the shift roller motor controls the front to back movement of the shift roller as shifts paper during straight through feed S6 Upper Tray Exit Sensor A flat photo sensor located inside the guide plate detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper as it feeds out to the upper tray dur...

Page 805: ...tched on S11 Proof Tray Full Sensor The top of the stack in the proof tray increases until it nudges the feeler of this sensor The sensor then signals that the proof tray is full and the job halts until some paper is removed from the proof tray S12 Upper Tray Limit Sensor This sensor controls the position of the upper tray 1 during straight through feed out 2 during shift feed out 3 when the machi...

Page 806: ... this sensor near the top of the stapling unit the feed out belt motor M5 remains on for the time prescribed to position the pawl at the home position to catch the next stack S17 Corner Stapler HP Sensor Located at the front the stapling tray and mounted above the steel rod where the corner stapler travels this sensor detects the home position of the corner stapler The corner stapler is in its hom...

Page 807: ... S23 Punch HP Sensor Detects the home position of the punch unit and controls the vertical movement of the punches when they fire S24 Punch Encoder Sensor When the punch mode is selected for the job 2 hole 3 hole etc the machine controls the operation of the punch drive M24 motor which drives a small encoder shaped like a notched wheel This wheel is rotated forward and reverse precisely to select ...

Page 808: ...reverses This accounts for the left and right movement of fold plate S31 Fold Unit Exit Sensor 1 Detects the folded edge of the stack as it feeds out from the nip of the fold rollers stops the rollers and reverses them so the fold feeds back into the nip 2 when the folded booklet finally emerges from the nip of the fold rollers detects the leading and trailing edge of the booklet to make sure that...

Page 809: ...switches on it opens the gate and paper is diverted to the proof tray When this gate is closed the paper goes straight to the upper tray I SOL2 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid Directs paper to the stapling tray When this solenoid is on paper feeds straight through When this solenoid is off paper feeds to the stapler tray below SOL3 Positioning Roller Solenoid Engages the stapler transport mot...

Page 810: ...itch cuts the dc power when the front door is opened SW2 Upper Tray Limit SW A micro switch cuts the power to the upper tray lift motor when the upper tray reaches its upper limit This switch duplicates the function of the upper tray limit sensor S12 and stops the upper tray if S12 fails 2 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT ...

Page 811: ...B804 B805 1 Upper Transport Motor M2 2 Upper Proof Exit Motor M4 3 Upper Tray Lift Motor M21 4 Feed Out Belt Motor M5 5 Fold Roller Motor 1 M12 6 Folder Plate Motor 1 M11 7 Positioning Roller Motor M14 8 Lower Transport Motor M3 9 Entrance Motor M1 1 B804 Only ...

Page 812: ...er paper enters the finisher 2 2 1 PROOF MODE Proof tray junction gate A opens Staple tray junction gate B remains closed The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above 2 2 2 SHIFT MODE Proof tray junction gate A remains closed Staple tray junction gate B remains closed With both junction gates closed the paper goes to the upper tray ...

Page 813: ...05 Booklet Finisher Finisher B804 B805 2 2 3 STAPLE MODE Proof tray junction gate A remains closed Staple tray junction gate B opens The staple tray junction gate directs the paper to the staple tray below for jogging and stapling ...

Page 814: ...tarts to descend C As the 2nd sheet of Set 2 continues to descend the 1st sheet of Set 2 is fed from the pre stack tray At this time the leading edges 6 of both sheets are even D The trailing edges of the 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 pass the junction gate 7 as the 3rd sheet of Set 2 8 enters the finisher E The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 9 switch back together into the top of the pre stack and wai...

Page 815: ...804 B805 In one staple mode one sheet goes to the pre stacking tray Then two sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time In two staple mode and booklet mode three sheets go to the pre stacking tray Then four sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time ...

Page 816: ... Limit Sensor G Upper Tray Limit Switch H Upper Tray Full Sensors The B804 shown above has only one upper tray full sensor the higher sensor at H The B805 has two upper tray full sensors the upper and lower sensor at H On the B805 the upper sensor detects tray full for heavier paper A3 DLT B4 LG 12 x 18 and the lower sensor detects tray full for lighter paper A4 LT etc The tray full capacity is 2 ...

Page 817: ... the upper tray is not attached Straight Through ON Shift ON Non staple mode operation During operation tray lift is controlled only by sensor F When the actuator leaves sensor F the tray lowers until the actuator reactivates sensor F Standby Staple Mode ON Standby The upper tray stops and waits for the paper output when the actuator activates sensor C D is not used for staple mode Staple Mode Ope...

Page 818: ...r H allows more sheets to stack on the upper tray Capacity 3 000 sheets A4 LT 2 4 2 LOWER TRAY B804 ONLY The lower tray sensor actuator arm A rests on the top of the stack of stapled booklets as they are output to the lower tray A flap depressor B keeps the open ends of the booklets down The front lower tray full sensor S34 C and rear lower tray full sensor S33 D detect when the lower tray is full...

Page 819: ...apled and folded booklet In the table below the conditions Ready Full 1 Full 2 Full 3 See the illustration on the previous page refer to the states of the sensors described on the previous page Condition Front Sensor Rear Sensor Ready ON OFF Full 1 ON ON Full 2 OFF ON Full 3 or lower tray not installed OFF OFF In the tables below Sht denotes sheets in a stack Cnt denotes Count see below for an exp...

Page 820: ...Cnt Full 2 10 Cnt 10 Cnt 15 Cnt 20 Cnt 15 Cnt 10 Cnt 8 Cnt 8 Cnt Full 3 Examples After the copier makes a booklet with 1 sheet of A3 DLT paper the machine checks every 100 ms for the Full 1 condition If the Full 1 condition occurs 3 times the machine detects that the tray is full After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4 LT paper the machine checks every 100 ms for the Full 2 condition ...

Page 821: ...te At the beginning of the job the jogger fence motor M15 A switches on and moves the jogger fences B to the standby position 7 5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size When each sheet passes the pre stack tray exit sensor S2 and enters the stapling tray The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5 5 mm of the sides of the selected paper size The positioning rol...

Page 822: ...s of the stack Reverses and moves the fences to the standby position 7 5 mm away for the sides and waits for the next sheet The jogger fence HP sensor D switches off the jogger motor at the end of the job After the last sheet feeds The stapling edge pressure plate solenoid E SOL4 switches on and pushes the pressure plate F onto the stack to press down the edge for stapling The corner stapler stapl...

Page 823: ...sition This is the stapling position for the paper size selected for the job The stapler movement motor switches off and the stapler waits for the signal to fire or swivel and for diagonal stapling If the stack is to be stapled at two positions The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the front position and staples the front The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the rear and the s...

Page 824: ...APLING Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor A inside the stapler unit The stapler hammer B fires the stapler C The cartridge set sensor D detects the cartridge at the correct position The staple end sensor E detects the staple end condition ...

Page 825: ...klet Pressure Roller As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences the stack feed out belt moves In booklet mode immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and jogger fences the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet pressure roller presses down on the stack until booklet stapling is finished This prevents the stack from shif...

Page 826: ... 7 Positioning Roller 8 Booklet Pressure Roller Rear 9 Jogger Fences x2 10 Pre Stack Exit Roller 11 Pressure Plate 12 Stapling Tray Bottom Fence 13 Corner Stapler M20 14 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor S14 15 Feed Out Belt 16 Fold Unit Bottom Fence 17 Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor S28 18 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor S26 19 Fold Unit Exit Rollers x2 20 Fold Unit Exit Sensor S31 21 Fold Rollers x2 22 Clamp Ro...

Page 827: ...from the sides of the stack 2 The pressure plate 3 and booklet pressure roller 4 press down on the sheet The stack feed out belt switches on and the pawl 5 on the feed out belt catches the bottom of the stack and raises it The stapling tray sensor 6 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack 3 The feed out belt 7 raises the stack to the prescribed stapling position and stops The jogger fences mo...

Page 828: ...ract 5 The feed out belt 6 transport rollers 7 8 and clamp rollers 9 rotate and feed the stack past the closed stack junction over the top and down toward the bottom fence 10 At the same time the fold unit bottom fence descends from its home position and stops 10 mm below the fold position 6 The rollers feed the leading edge of the stack to within 3 mm of the stack stopper of the bottom fence 13 T...

Page 829: ...ck to the prescribed fold position 2 8 The fold plate 3 moves to the left and advances 1 3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20 kg 44 lb of pressure at the fold rollers 4 9 With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers 5 the fold rollers begin to rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out ...

Page 830: ... rotation of the fold rollers 4 reverses and feeds the folded edge back until only 3 mm of the fold 5 remains at the nip 12 The fold rollers 6 rotate forward once again feed out The fold unit exit sensor 7 once again detects the edge of the fold You can do SP6 136 001 to increase the sharpness of the fold The number of forward and reverse feeds can be set in the range of 2 to 30 The machine repeat...

Page 831: ...its home position 14 The fold rollers 2 and fold unit exit rollers 3 begin to rotate together and feed out the folded booklet to the lower tray 15 Once the trailing edge of the stack passes the fold unit exit sensor 4 the clamp rollers 5 close to be ready to feed the next stack The fold unit bottom fence 6 descends The bottom fence HP sensor 7 stops the bottom fence when it detects the actuator on...

Page 832: ...tack Junction Gate Motor Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam E Stack Junction Gate Cam Opens and closes the stack junction gate F Stack Junction Gate The stack junction gate motor and stack junction gate cam close the stack junction gate The feed out belt pawl raises the stapled stack and sends it over the top and down to the fold unit G Leading Edge Pressure Roller Presses down on th...

Page 833: ...the retracting clamp roller The clamp rollers feed the stack to within 3 mm of the bottom fence when closed and then open to drop the stack onto the bottom fence D Clamp Roller HP Sensor Controls the rotation of the clamp roller retraction motor and cam that open and close the retracting clamp roller E Clamp Roller Cam Forces open the spring loaded retracting clamp roller Bottom Fence F Bottom Fen...

Page 834: ...e Moves left and pushes the stack into the nip of the fold rollers and then moves right to retract Fold Rollers F Fold Roller Motor Drives forward to feed out the stack at the fold and then reverses to feed the fold in to sharpen the crease and then drives forward again to feed out the folded stack This reverse forward cycle is done once This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6114...

Page 835: ... A switches on and drives the feed out belt B The pawl C attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack toward the feed out slot The exit guide plate F remains open as the stack emerges at a prescribed distance away from the exit roller Next the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out The opening and closing of the exit guide plate is controlled by t...

Page 836: ... There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the feed out operation 2 7 2 FEED OUT STACKING Upper proof exit motor A drives feed roller B and stacking sponge roller C Stacking sponge roller motor D moves the sponge roller forward and back with link E The position of the stacking sponge roller C is controlled by the stacking sponge roller motor which is switched o...

Page 837: ...lers continue to rotate This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to correct skew The finisher entrance roller C starts to rotate again and feeds the sheet into the finisher These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit SP6130 This SP corrects the punch hole alignment To do this it corrects the skew of each sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance ...

Page 838: ...nformation to the punch unit board The machine uses the detected position of the paper edge to calculate the correct position for punching The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers D the prescribed distance to position the paper under the punch unit Using the result of the position calculation the punch unit control board moves the punch unit E to the adjusted punch positi...

Page 839: ... B805 These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment SP6 128 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed SP6 129 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed For more see Section Service Tables 2 8 2 PUNCH MECHANISMS Paper Position Detection ...

Page 840: ...her entrance sensor S1 C detects paper when it enters the finisher and detects paper jams The paper position slide sensor motor M7 D extends and retracts the paper position slide that holds the paper position sensor S27 E The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge The detected position of the paper is used to calculate and position the punch unit for punching The paper positi...

Page 841: ...S21 B detects the position when it retracts switches off the punch position movement motor and stops the punch unit at its home position The punch drive motor M24 C fires the punches that punch holes in the paper below Punch Selection and Firing A Punch Drive Motor M24 B Punch Encoder Wheel C Punch Encoder Sensor S24 D Punch HP Sensor S23 The punch drive motor M24 A turns the small notched encoder...

Page 842: ... starting position for 2 hole or 3 hole punching This is the 1 position in the diagrams the top diagram is for 2 hole punching and the bottom diagram is for 3 hole punching Then the punch drive motor turns counter clockwise to the 2 position This movement punches the holes in the paper Then the punch drive motor turns clockwise to the 1 position to be ready for the next sheet of paper 2 8 3 PUNCH ...

Page 843: ...M1 A drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste belt B The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt The belt moves the punchouts to the front and dumps them in the punch waste hopper C The punch hopper full sensor D Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts that have collected in the hopper It also detects when the punch hopper is s...

Page 844: ... R3 Proof Shift Staple Finisher entrance sensor lag After finisher entrance sensor goes ON it does not go OFF after enough time to feed a sheet 1 5 times its length has elapsed Proof exit sensor late After finisher entrance sensor goes ON proof exit sensor does not go ON even after enough time to feed 450 mm R3 Proof Proof exit sensor lag After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF proof exit sensor d...

Page 845: ...eed 650 mm R5 to R7 Staple Pre stack tray exit sensor late After finisher entrance sensor goes ON pre stack tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after enough time to feed 1650 mm Fold unit entrance sensor late S26 The fold unit entrance sensor goes not go ON after enough time has elapsed to feed 1 5 times the length of the stack after the leading edge of the stack reaches the stack present sensor...

Page 846: ......

Page 847: ...SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION TYPE 4045 B838 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New All 10 08 2008 New Information The entire B838 SM has been replaced ...

Page 848: ......

Page 849: ...AL REQUIREMENTS 1 1 1 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1 1 1 3 ACCESSORY CHECK 3 1 2 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR COVERS 5 1 3 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SCANNER UNIT 7 1 4 CONNECTING PROCEDURE FOR SCANNER UNIT 9 1 5 CONNECTING PROCEDURE FOR OP PANEL 20 1 6 HARNESS BRACKET ATTACHMENT PROCEDURE 23 1 7 CONNECTING PROCEDURE FOR MAINFRAME 25 1 8 INSTALLATION FOR KEY COUNTER 31 ...

Page 850: ......

Page 851: ...ocedure Safety Turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 852: ......

Page 853: ...Make sure you install the unit in area that allows easy access for operation Ask the customer about their requirements before you install the unit 1 1 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS The scanner cable should not touch the floor The cables should not hang free where they can become entangled with other equipment or furniture such as a wheelchair The unit should be positioned within 380 to1220 mm 1 3 to 4 f...

Page 854: ...NTS B838 2 SM The scanner should be positioned as follows Within 250 mm 9 8 from the left and rear side of the main unit Within 550 mm 21 7 from the right side of the main unit B838I120 WMF Height 380 to 1200 mm 1 3 to 4 ft ...

Page 855: ...Operation Panel Interface Board 1 11 MB Interface Board 1 12 Gasket Scanner Frame 1 13 Gasket Scanner Lens 1 14 Seal Bottom 1 15 Ferrite Core 17 16 Shoulder Screw only for installing key counter 1 17 Adjuster 2 18 Spacer 2 19 Rubber Leg 3 20 Cap 3 21 Saddle Clamp 1 22 Clamp 1 23 Plate Clamp 4 24 Screw Round M4x8 2 25 Screw Tapping M3x8 blue 7 26 Screw Round M3x6 4 27 Screw 2 Tapping M3x8 4 28 Scre...

Page 856: ...INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS B838 4 SM B838I501 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 ...

Page 857: ...RS 1 Scanner left cover 1 x 2 2 Slide the scanner rear cover 2 to the left side and then remove it x 1 hook x 2 3 Left rear cover 3 x 1 4 Left cover 4 x 6 5 Scanner right cover 5 x 2 6 Right top cover 6 x 1 7 Open the right door 7 8 Right rear cover 8 x 4 B838R517 PNG B838R201 WMF B222R305 WMF 4 8 7 6 5 ...

Page 858: ...tion panel with the scanner front cover 10 x 6 M3x3 bind screw x 2 M3x5 bind screw x 2 on the top of the scanner front cover M3x8 tapping screw x 2 on the bottom of the scanner front cover 11 Scanner front cover 11 x 2 12 Rear cover 12 x 6 B222R157 WMF B838R102B WMF 9 10 12 ...

Page 859: ...RE FOR SCANNER UNIT 1 Controller box right cover 1 x 8 2 Remove the clamp plate 2 x 1 3 Disconnect the scanner I F cable 3 from the connector CN509 on the IPU x 1 ground cable x 1 4 Release the clamp 4 5 Disconnect the three connectors 5 on the controller box B838R107 WMF B838R901 PNG B838R903 PNG 1 ...

Page 860: ...Removal Procedure for Scanner Unit B838 8 SM 6 Scanner unit 6 x 5 right side x 2 left side x 3 7 Scanner left stay 7 x 3 B838R902 PNG B838R904 PNG ...

Page 861: ...ER UNIT 1 Rear scale 1 x 3 stepped screw 2 Glass cover 2 x 2 stepped screw 3 Exposure glass with the left scale 3 4 Disconnect the connectors 4 CN312 CN318 from the SIO 5 Disconnect the scanner HP sensor connector 5 6 Scanner rear frame 6 x 8 7 Release the clamps x 7 B838R153 WMF B838R160 WMF B838R905 PNG 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 862: ...used hereafter 9 Disconnect the BICU interface harness 8 CN310 on the SIO and then remove it 10 Disconnect the power supply harness 9 CN311 on the SIO and then remove it 11 SBU cover 10 x 4 12 SBU grounding plate 11 x 4 13 SBU 12 x 4 x 2 15 pins connector 30 pins connector B838R906 PNG B838R907 PNG B838R156 WMF 11 12 10 ...

Page 863: ... B838 Scanner Accessibility Option B838 14 Scanner I F cable 13 x 1 ground cable x 1 15 Operation panel I F harness 14 x 5 16 Scanner left stay 15 x 2 17 Move the scanner carriage 16 to the center position B838R908 PNG B838R909 PNG B838R910 PNG ...

Page 864: ...all the left bottom plate 17 in the place as shown x 1 M3x6 blue screw 19 Install the right bottom plate 18 in the place as shown x 1 M3x6 blue screw 20 Install the three rubber legs 19 in the bottom of the scanner unit B838R911 PNG B838R912 PNG B838R913 PNG ...

Page 865: ...38 Scanner Accessibility Option B838 21 Install the two spacers 20 adjusters 21 and seal a in the bottom 22 of the scanner unit 22 Move the scanner carriage 23 to its home position 23 Reinstall the scanner left stay 24 x 2 B838R914 PNG B838R915 PNG ...

Page 866: ...nner Unit B838 14 SM 24 Install the rear bracket 25 to the outside of the scanner rear frame x 2 M3x6 blue screw 25 Install the left bracket 26 to the outside of the scanner left frame x 2 M3x6 blue screw B838R916 PNG B838R917 PNG ...

Page 867: ...bing alcohol 27 Attach the gasket 27 to the inside of the scanner left frame aligning with two projections 28 28 Clean the lens bracket with a cloth absorbing alcohol 29 Attach the gasket 29 to the lens bracket as shown 30 Attach the cable bracket 30 to the rear right of the scanner unit x 4 screw round M3x6 B838R918 PNG B838R919 PNG B838R920 PNG ...

Page 868: ...onnector and ground cable of the scanner I F cable x 1 33 Reinstall the SBU grounding plate 33 x 4 34 Reinstall the SBU cover 34 x 4 35 Remove the rap on the scanner I F cable 36 Attach the clamp 35 this clamp is removed in step 8 in the Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit to the scanner I F cable and then secure it x 1 M3x6 blue screw B838R921 PNG B838R156 WMF B838R922 PNG 32 33 34 ...

Page 869: ...er Accessibility Option B838 37 Install the clamp 36 and saddle clamp 37 as shown x 2 38 Route the operation panel I F cable 38 and clamp it x 2 39 Route and connect the BICU interface cable 39 to CN311 on the SIO x 1 B838R923 PNG B838R924 PNG B838R925 PNG ...

Page 870: ...ure two ground cables 41 BICU interface cable and power supply cable x 1 M3x6 blue screw 42 Route the heater relay cable 42 as shown and secure ground cable 43 x 6 x 1 screw round M4x8 43 Reinstall the scanner rear frame 44 x 8 x 2 44 Connect the harness 45 to the scanner HP sensor B838R926 PNG B838R927 PNG B838R160 WMF 44 45 ...

Page 871: ...canner Unit SM 19 B838 Scanner Accessibility Option B838 45 Reinstall the exposure glass with left scale 46 46 Reinstall the glass cover 47 stepped screw x 2 47 Reinstall the rear scale 48 stepped screw x 3 B838R153 WMF 46 47 48 ...

Page 872: ...ration panel I F cable to the outside of the scanner right frame with four plate clamps x 4 screw tapping M3x8 NOTE Make sure that the operation panel I F cable A does not cover the three cutouts B 2 Connect the harness 2 to the operation panel interface board 3 as shown B838R928 PNG B838R934 PNG B838R929 PNG ...

Page 873: ...panel interface board 3 as shown x 2 these are removed in step 3 in this procedure 5 Connect the harness 2 to CN700 on the operation panel drive board and install the core 5 RFC 8 6 Put the operation panel I F cable 6 through the scanner front cover 7 7 Connect the three connectors 8 of the operation panel I F cable to operation panel interface board B838R932 PNG ...

Page 874: ...to the operation panel x 2 10 Reinstall the operation panel with the scanner front cover 12 in the scanner front frame x 6 M3x3 bind screw x 2 M3x5 bind screw x 2 on the top of the scanner front cover M3x8 tapping screw x 2 on the bottom of the scanner front cover 11 Reinstall the scanner right cover 13 x 2 B838R933 PNG B838R157 WMF 12 13 ...

Page 875: ...ATTACHMENT PROCEDURE 1 Cut off the rear right 1 of the scanner top rear cover with a cutter 2 Reinstall the scanner top rear cover 2 x 1 M3x8 tapping screw 3 Install and attach the cable bracket cover 3 x 2 screw tapping M3x8 4 Reinstall the scanner left cover x 2 B838R935 PNG B838R936 PNG B838R937 PNG ...

Page 876: ...16 to the bound cables and the cores 6 RFC 13 to the other cables 6 Install the ARDF 7 or platen cover on the scanner unit stud screw x 2 7 Connect the ARDF I F cable 8 to the connector of the scanner unit 8 Install the right and left stoppers 9 to the ARDF hinges x 2 each screw tapping M3x16 B838R938 PNG B838R939 PNG B838R940 PNG ...

Page 877: ...acket 2 x 5 flat cable x 1 x 1 3 Install the core 3 TFC16816 in the harness of CN510 on the IPU and the core 4 RFC 8 in the harness of CN540 on the MB 4 Close the IOB bracket 2 x 5 flat cable x 1 x 1 5 Reinstall the controller box stay 1 x 4 6 Install the core 5 RFC 5 in the brown and red harnesses of CN201 on the IOB 1 2 B222R109 WMF B838R941 PNG B838R942 PNG 1 2 ...

Page 878: ... the IH inverter 8 Install the cable bracket 7 in the rear frame of the mainframe x 3 screw tapping M3x6 9 Route and connect the heater relay cable 8 to the heater cable 9 of the mainframe 10 Secure the ground cable of the heater relay cable 10 x 1 screw round M4x8 B838R943 PNG B838R944 PNG B838R945 PNG ...

Page 879: ...de of the controller box 12 Secure the two ground cables 12 x 1 screw tapping M3x6 13 Route the scanner I F cable 13 and connect it to CN509 on the IPU x 1 14 Secure the scanner I F cable with the clamp 14 x 1 M3x6 tapping screw and the ground cable 15 x 1 M3x6 tapping screw 15 Remove the clamp 16 B838R946 PNG B838R947 PNG ...

Page 880: ...with the connector which has two binds connecting to the MB and the connector which has one bind connecting to the MB interface board and clamp it between two binds x 1 19 Connect the harness 20 to CN536 on the MB and other terminal to the CN1 on the MB interface board 20 Connect the operation panel I F cable 21 to the CN2 CN5 and CN6 on the MB interface board and clamp it x 1 B838R948 PNG B838R94...

Page 881: ... machine 23 Reinstall the left cover x 6 24 Reinstall the left rear cover x 1 25 Reinstall the right rear cover x 4 26 Close the right door 27 Reinstall the right top cover x 1 IMPORTANT If you install the key counter first refer to the Installation for Key Counter 28 Install the top rear cover 23 x 2 screw tapping M3x8 29 Install the top right cover 24 x 3 screw tapping M3x8 B838R951 PNG B838R952...

Page 882: ... and the cores 27 RFC 13 to the other cables 32 Install the cable cover 28 in the top rear cover 33 Follow the INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS to place the scanner accessibility unit for safety 34 After installation adjust the scanner image Image Adjustment Scanning in the chapter Replacement and Adjustment of the Model B222 B224 SERVICE MANUAL B838R954 PNG B838R955 PNG B838R957 PNG ...

Page 883: ...ch the key counter front bracket 2 and rear bracket 3 to the reverse side of the top right cover x 4 screw 2 tapping M3x8 3 Put the key counter harness 4 into the machine 4 Connect the key counter harness to the connector 5 of the right side of the controller box 5 Install the top rear cover step 28 in Connecting Procedure for Mainframe B838I122 WMF 4 5 1 2 3 ...

Page 884: ...e top right cover in the machine and attach the caps to the screw holes steps 29 and 30 in Connecting Procedure for Mainframe 8 Install the shoulder screw 8 9 Install the key counter 9 x 1 screw tapping M4x16 x 1 For details about installing the Key Counter Service Manual for B222 B224 B838I123 WMF 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 885: ...FAX OPTION TYPE 5000 D346 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 33 10 08 2009 Error Code 31 21 added 145 01 30 2009 Updated Information Service RAM Addresses ...

Page 886: ......

Page 887: ...1 MEMORY UNIT G578 9 1 3 2 HANDSET B433 9 2 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 12 2 1 FCU 12 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 3 1 ERROR CODES 13 3 2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING 34 3 3 IP FAX TROUBLESHOOTING 37 3 3 1 IP FAX TRANSMISSION 37 3 3 2 IP FAX RECEPTION 40 4 SERVICE TABLE 44 4 1 BEFOREHAND 44 4 2 SERVICE TABLES 45 4 2 1 SP1 XXX BIT SWITCHES 45 4 2 2 SP2 XXX RAM DATA 46 4 2 3 SP3 XXX TEL LINE SETTINGS 47 4 2 4 SP4 XX...

Page 888: ...E RAM ADDRESSES 141 5 DETAILS 151 5 1 OVERVIEW 151 5 2 BOARDS 152 5 2 1 FCU 152 5 2 2 MBU 153 5 2 3 SG3 BOARD 154 5 3 VIDEO DATA PATH 156 5 3 1 TRANSMISSION 156 5 3 2 RECEPTION 158 5 4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES 159 5 4 1 MULTI PORT 159 5 4 2 DOCUMENT SERVER 159 5 4 3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION 160 5 5 IP FAX 170 5 5 1 WHAT IS IP FAX 170 6 SPECIFICATIONS 171 6 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 171 6 1 1 F...

Page 889: ...y be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Before installing the fax unit switch off the main switch and disconnect the power cord The fax unit contains a lithium battery The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type ...

Page 890: ...t in serious injury or death Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine bold is ad...

Page 891: ... quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 FCU 1 2 Screw M3x6 3 3 Handset Support Bracket NA only 1 4 Handset Bracket NA only 1 5 Telephone Cable NA only 1 6 Data Display Decal Sheet 20 languages 2 7 FCC Decal NA only 1 8 Serial Number Decal 1 9 G3 Decal 1 10 Fax Keytop 2 11 Ferrite Core EU only 1 ...

Page 892: ...printer option in the machine print out all data in the printer buffer Push the operation switch to put the machine in standby mode Make sure the power LED is off turn the main switch off and then disconnect the power cord and the network cable The copier must be connected to a properly grounded socket outlet ...

Page 893: ...ss down the MBU Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly If not SC672 occurs 5 Remove the jumper B set to OFF and set it to ON The machine may issue SC819 SC820 if the jumper is not set to ON correctly Sometimes these SC codes are not issued 6 Install the FCU C x 4 use the three screws which were removed in step 3 7 For EU models attach the ferrite core to the telephone cord The end of the ferri...

Page 894: ...decal G 11 Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch After you turn the machine on if you see a message that tells you the SRAM has been formatted due to a problem with SRAM turn the machine off and on again to clear the message 12 Enter the User Tools mode and set date and time 13 Do SP3102 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit ...

Page 895: ... D346 1 2 G3 INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION 1 2 1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 SG3 Interface Unit 1 2 Flat Cable 1 3 Screw M3x6 3 4 Telephone Cable NA only 1 5 FCC Decal NA only 1 ...

Page 896: ...3 interface unit D x 3 5 Install the FCU in the machine for details refer to the installation procedure of the Fax Option Type 5000 6 Connect the telephone cord to the LINE 2 jack 7 Enter the service mode Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to 1 SP1 104 023 for PSTN 2 8 Turn the main switch off and on 9 Print out the system parameter list Then check that G3 shows as an option 10 Set up and progra...

Page 897: ...x 2 3 Remove the two knockouts D 4 Attach one end short length of the flat cable to the connector E of the FCU board 5 Attach the other end long length of the flat cable to the connector F of the CCUIF 6 Attach the SG3 interface unit G x 3 7 Install the FCU in the machine for details refer to the installation procedure of the Fax Option Type 5000 8 Connect the telephone cord to the LINE 3 jack 9 E...

Page 898: ... Turn the main switch off and on 11 Print out the system parameter list Then check that G3 shows as an option 12 Set up and program the items required for PSTN 3 communications 13 Attach the FCC decal near the serial number plate of the mainframe ...

Page 899: ...PTIONS 1 3 1 MEMORY UNIT G578 1 FCU Installation Procedure in the Fax Unit D346 2 Install the memory option in the memory slot A 3 Reaasemble the machine 1 3 2 HANDSET B433 The optional handset is available for the U S version only 1 Remove the scanner left cover A x 2 ...

Page 900: ...ft cover Drill a hole from the outside of the cover with a screwdriver 3 Attach the hand set support bracket C inside the scanner left cover 4 Hold the handset bracket D and handset support bracket set inside the scanner left cover 5 Secure the handset bracket D x 2 ...

Page 901: ... Type 5000 D346 6 Install the scanner left cover on the machine 7 Attach the clamp to the location E 8 Set the handset on the handset bracket 9 Clamp the hand set cord 10 Connect the handset cable to the TEL jack at the rear of the machine ...

Page 902: ...he MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board 2 Set the correct date and time with the User Tools User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Set Date Time Do not turn off the battery switch SW1 Do SP6101 in the Fax SP to print the system parameters and check the settings ...

Page 903: ...incompatible Replace the FCU Check for DIS NSF with an oscilloscope If the rx signal is weak there may be a bad line 0 01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a jammed printer The other party pressed Stop during communication 0 03 Incompatible modem at the other end The other terminal is incompatible 0 04 CFR or FTT not received after modem training Check the line conne...

Page 904: ...alizer settings Replace the FCU The other end may be defective or incompatible try sending to another machine Check for line problems Cross reference See error code 0 04 0 07 No post message response from the other end after a page was sent Check the line connection Replace the FCU The other end may have jammed or run out of paper The other end user may have disconnected the call Check for a bad l...

Page 905: ...g to another machine Noisy line resend Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the FCU Cross reference See error code 0 08 0 15 The other terminal is not capable of specific functions The other terminal is not capable of accepting the following functions or the other terminal s memory is full Confidential rx Transfer function SEP SUB PWD SID 0 16 CFR or FTT not detected ...

Page 906: ...he previous EOL signal Check the connections between the FCU and line Check for line noise or other line problems Replace the FCU The remote machine may be defective or may have disconnected Cross reference Maximum interval between EOLs and between ECM frames G3 Bit Switch 0A bit 4 0 22 The signal from the other end was interrupted for more than the acceptable modem carrier drop time default 200 m...

Page 907: ... may not be compatible Cross reference Dedicated tx parameters Section 4 0 32 The other terminal sent a DCS which contained functions that the receiving machine cannot handle Check the protocol dump list Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer 0 33 The data reception not ECM is not completed within 10 minutes Check the line connection The other terminal may have a defective modem FCU 0 52 ...

Page 908: ...d not detect ANSam Check the line connection and condition Try receiving a call from another V 8 V 34 fax 0 76 The calling terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect a JM in response to CM CM timeout The called terminal could not detect a CM due to noise etc Check the line connection and condition Try making a call to another V 8 V 34 fax 0 77 The called terminal fell back to T 30...

Page 909: ... receiving terminal Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting Try increasing the tx level Try using V 17 or a slower modem if the same error is frequent when receiving from multiple senders 0 84 The line was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V 34 phase 4 control channel start up The signal did not stop within 10 s Turn off the machine then turn it back on If the same error is frequent r...

Page 910: ...ace the FCU 2 12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the FCU 2 13 Modem initialization error Turn off the machine then turn it back on Update the modem ROM Replace the FCU 2 23 JBIG compression or reconstruction error Turn off the machine then turn it back on 2 24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine then turn it back on 2 25 JBIG data reconstruction error BIH error 2 26 JBIG data reconstruction erro...

Page 911: ...chine 4 01 Line current was cut Check the line connector Check for line problems Replace the FCU 4 10 Communication failed because of an ID Code mismatch Closed Network or Tel No CSI mismatch Protection against Wrong Connections Get the ID Codes the same and or the CSIs programmed correctly then resend The machine at the other end may be defective 5 10 DCR timer expired Replace the FCU 5 20 Storag...

Page 912: ...ceived within 18 s of CFR but there was no line fail Check the line connection Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal Replace the FCU Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer Cross reference Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN 6 06 G3 ECM coding decoding error Defective FCU The other terminal may be defective 6 08 G3 ECM PIP PIN received in reply to PPS NULL The other end pressed Stop duri...

Page 913: ...CU 13 17 SIP user name registration error Double registration of the SIP user name Capacity for user name registration in the SIP server is not sufficient 13 18 SIP server access error Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server Defective SIP server 13 24 SIP Authentication error Registered password in the device does not match the password in the SIP server 13 25 Network I F setting error IPV4 i...

Page 914: ... that the SMTP server has the correct settings and operates correctly Contact the system administrator for direct SMTP sending and check the sending destination 14 03 Access to SMTP Server Denied 450 Failed to access the SMTP server because the access is denied SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the system administrator to determine if there is a problem with the SMTP server and to check th...

Page 915: ...on folder is located Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the HDD where the target folder is located Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target destination for SMTP direct sending Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the target HDD 14 06 User Not Found on SMTP Server 551 The designated user does not exist The desig...

Page 916: ...ransmission could not be completed Buffer is full due to using Scan to Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the same time 14 12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detected size of the file was too large 14 13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user pressed Stop 14 14 Security Locked File Error Update the software because of the defective softw...

Page 917: ...as exceeded the limit HDD is full or not operating correctly Software error 14 31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created Not enough space in UFS area to handle both Scan to Email and IFAX transmission HDD full or not operating correctly Software error 14 32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error Detected by NFAX Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled due to a software error 14 33...

Page 918: ...encryption Format the HDD 10 B Data read write error See SC863 below 860 B HDD error 1 The hard disk connection is not detected because it is defective or has not been formatted Cable between HDC and HDD loose or defective HDD power connector loose or defective HDD not formatted HDD defective Replace the controller board 861 B HDD error 2 The HDD did not enter the ready status within 30 sec after ...

Page 919: ...is not standard format For example the Date line description is incorrect 15 15 Mail Divide Error The e mail is not in standard format There is no boundary between parts of the e mail including the header 15 16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too large 15 17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receiving only because the network is not operating correctly 15 18...

Page 920: ... Format Error The attached file is not TIFF format 15 62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to Resolution error Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without extended memory Resolution is not supported Page size error The page size was larger than A3 Compression error File was compressed with other than MH MR or MMR 15 63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as ...

Page 921: ... and the destination could not be created this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception 15 81 Repeated Destination Registration Error Could not repeat receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination could not be created this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of rece...

Page 922: ...on if possible Add optional page memory 22 01 Memory overflow while receiving Wait for the files in the queue to be sent Delete unnecessary files from memory Transfer the substitute reception files to an another fax machine if the machine s printer is busy or out of order Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk 22 02 Tx or rx job stalled due to line disconnection at the other end The job star...

Page 923: ...ace the FCU 31 21 LAN Fax Error It was cancelled received LAN Fax images during store the image to SAF of FCU The LAN Fax transmission of a message was cancelled by the LAN Fax driver F0 xx V 34 modem error Replace the FCU F6 xx SG3 modem error Update the SG3 modem ROM Replace the SG3 board Check for line noise or other line problems Try communicating another V 8 V 34 fax Rev 10 08 2009 ...

Page 924: ...es in the network setup correct Check the IP address with the administrator of the network 2 Check that PC can connect with the machine Use the ping command on the PC to contact the machine At the MS DOS prompt type ping then the IP address of the machine then press Enter Between IFAX and PC 3 LAN settings in the machine Check the LAN parameters Check if there is an IP address conflict with other ...

Page 925: ...th the machine s own number as the destination The machine receives the returned e mail if the communication is performed successfully 1 E mail account on the Server Make sure that the PC can log into the e mail server Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine Ask the administrator to check Between e mail server and internet 2 E mail server Make sure t...

Page 926: ...s Use the ping command to contact the router Check that other devices connected to the router can sent data over the router Ask the administrator of the server to check 5 Error message by e mail from the network of the destination Check whether e mail can be sent to another address on the same network using the application e mail software Check the error e mail message Inform the administrator of ...

Page 927: ...nual sending not supported 5 IP address of local machine registered Register the IP address 6 Remote terminal port number setting other than 1720 Send by specifying the port number 7 Specified port number correct Confirm the port number of the remote fax 8 DNS server registered when host name specified Contact the network administrator 9 Remote fax a T 38 terminal Check whether the remote fax is a...

Page 928: ... the network administrator 5 Is the IP address host name of the specified Gateway correct Check the IP address host name 6 Number of the specified fax correct Check the remote fax number 7 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 8 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 9 IP address of local fax registered Register the IP a...

Page 929: ... NAT installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 4 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 5 Gatekeeper installed correctly Contact the network administrator 6 Gatekeeper power switched on Contact the network administrator 7 IP address host name of Gatekeeper correct Check the IP address host name 8 DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host n...

Page 930: ...ansmission baud rate IPFAX SW 05 16 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission 3 3 2 IP FAX RECEPTION Cannot receive via IP Address Host Name Check Point Action 1 LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection 2 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 3 IP address of local fax registered R...

Page 931: ...IP Gateway Check Point Action 1 LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection 2 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Request the remote fax to send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly Contact the network administrator 4 VoIP Gateway power switched on Contact the network administrator 5 IP address host name of specified VoIP Gateway corre...

Page 932: ... the sender fax is a Ricoh model 4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on Contact the network administrator The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 5 IP address host name of Gatekeeper correct on the sender s side Request the sender to check the IP address host name The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 6 DNS server regis...

Page 933: ...ter the Alias number Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth 10 Network bandwidth too narrow Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side IPFAX SW06 11 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission 12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper Contact the network administrator The sender machine displays this error code when...

Page 934: ...press the operation power switch to switch the power off wait for the power LED to go off and then switch the main power switch off The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data ...

Page 935: ...s for internet fax settings for the fax option Bit Switches Printer Switch 103 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option Bit Switches Communication Switch 104 001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option Bit Switches G3 1 Switch 105 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard G3 board Bit...

Page 936: ... 0F Not used Do not change the bit switches IP fax Switch 111 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters Bit Switches 4 2 2 SP2 XXX RAM DATA 2 Mode No Function RAM Read Write 101 001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly Service RAM Addresses Memory Dump 001 G3 1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board Service RAM Addresses 002 G3 2 Memory Dump Print out RAM...

Page 937: ... CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board NCU Parameters 4 2 3 SP3 XXX TEL LINE SETTINGS 3 Mode No Function Service Station 001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station 101 002 Select Line Select the line type Serial Number 102 000 Enter the fax unit s serial number PSTN 1 Port Settings 001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3 1 line If the machine is ...

Page 938: ...his SP on the machine does not send any fax messages on the G3 2 line PSTN 3 Port Settings 001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3 3 line If the machine is installed on a PABX line select PABX PABX GND or PABX FLASH 002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3 3 line 003 Memory Lock Disabled Not used 105 004 Transmission Disabled If you turn this SP on the machine does...

Page 939: ...IP port number 107 007 IPFAX Protocol Priority Select H323 or SIP FAX SW 201 001 032 00 1F 4 2 4 SP4 XXX ROM VERSIONS 4 Mode No Function 101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version 102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes 103 001 G3 1 ROM Version Displays the G3 1 modem version 104 001 G3 2 ROM Version Displays the G3 2 modem version 105 001 G3 3 ROM Version Displays the...

Page 940: ...arameters Factory setting 104 000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters user data in the SRAM and files in the SAF memory Initialize All Bit Switches 105 000 Initializes all the current bit switch settings Initialize Security Bit Switches 106 000 Initializes only the security bit switches If you select automatic output display for the user parameter switches the security settings are initial...

Page 941: ...last communication for the G3 1 line 004 G3 2 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3 2 line 005 G3 2 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3 2 line 006 G3 3 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3 3 line 103 007 G3 3 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the la...

Page 942: ...y lock feature Journal Print out 001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication records on the report 106 002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication records after the specified date Log List Print out 001 All log files 002 Printer 003 SC TRAP Stored 004 Decompression 005 Scanner 006 JOB SAF 007 Reconstruction 008 JBIG 009 Fax Driver 010 G3CCU 011 Fax Job 107 012 CCU These l...

Page 943: ...mp list of the last communication for the IP fax line 4 2 7 SP7 XXX TEST MODES These are the test modes for PTT approval 7 Function 101 G3 1 Modem Tests 102 G3 1 DTMF Tests 103 Ringer Test 104 G3 1 V34 S2400baud 105 G3 1 V34 S2800baud 106 G3 1 V34 S3000baud 107 G3 1 V34 S3200baud 108 G3 1 V34 S3429baud 109 Recorded Message Test 110 G3 2 Modem Tests 111 G3 2 DTMF Tests 112 G3 2 V34 S2400baud 113 G3...

Page 944: ...odem Tests Not used 125 IG3 1 DTMF Tests Not used 126 IG3 1 V34 S2400baud Not used 127 IG3 1 V34 S2800baud Not used 128 IG3 1 V34 S3000baud Not used 129 IG3 1 V34 S3200baud Not used 130 IG3 1 V34 S3429baud Not used 131 IG3 2 Modem Tests Not used 132 IG3 2 DTMF Tests Not used 133 IG3 2 V34 S2400baud Not used 134 IG3 2 V34 S2800baud Not used 135 IG3 2 V34 S3000baud Not used 136 IG3 2 V34 S3200baud N...

Page 945: ...Service Tables SM 55 D346 Fax Option Type 5000 D346 4 2 8 SP9 XXX DESIGN SWITCH MODE 9 Mode No Function 702 Design Switch DFU ...

Page 946: ... as Not used as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations Such bits are for use only in other areas such as Japan Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual Refer to the System Parameter List printed by the machine ...

Page 947: ... number means more errors 2 Symbol rate V 34 only 3 Final modem type used 4 Starting data rate for example 288 means 28 8 kbps 5 Final data rate 6 Rx revel refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level 7 Total number of error lines that occurred during non ECM reception 8 Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non ECM reception EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF i...

Page 948: ...utput after each communication 0 OFF 1 ON This is only used for communication troubleshooting It shows the content of the transmitted facsimile protocol signals Always reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1 the list is only printed if there was an error during the communication 7 Not used Do not change the setting System Switch 01 Not used Do not change the f...

Page 949: ...utomatically be locked out again after a certain time which is stored in System Switch 03 Note that if an RDS operation takes place RDS will not switch off until this time limit has expired 1 1 At any time an RDS system can access the machine System Switch 03 SP No 1 101 004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 Length of time that RDS is temporarily switched on when bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to...

Page 950: ...clusion of communications on the Journal when no image data was exchanged 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Communications that reached phase C message tx rx of the T 30 protocol are listed on the Journal 1 Communications that reached phase A call setup of T 30 protocol are listed on the Journal This will include telephone calls 2 Automatic error report printout 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Error reports will not ...

Page 951: ...sting remote terminal names on reports Dial Label The name stored by the user for the Quick Speed Dial number System Switch 0A SP No 1 101 011 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Automatic port selection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When 1 is selected a suitable port is automatically selected if the selected port is not used 1 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 Dialing on the ten key pad when the external telep...

Page 952: ...cannot be selected 3 Action when the external handset goes off hook 0 Manual tx and rx operation 1 Memory tx and rx operation the display remains the same 0 Manual tx and rx are possible while the external handset is off hook However memory tx is not possible 1 The display stays in standby mode even when the external handset is used so that other people can use the machine for memory tx operation ...

Page 953: ...sa 0C Portugal 1C Korea 0D Netherland 1D Brazil 0E Spain 20 Turkey 0F Israel 21 Greece 10 22 Hungary 11 USA 23 Czech 24 Poland addresses Cross reference NCU country code SP No 2 103 001 for G3 1 SP No 2 104 001 for G3 2 SP No 2 105 001 for G3 3 System Switch 10 SP No 1 101 017 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 Threshold memory level for parallel memory transmission Threshold N x 128 KB 256 KB N can be betw...

Page 954: ...7 Not used Japan Only System Switch 12 SP No 1 101 019 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 TTI printing position in the main scan direction TTI 08 to 92 BCD mm Input even numbers only This setting determines the print start position for the TTI from the left edge of the paper If the TTI is moved too far to the right it may overwrite the file number which is on the top right of the page On an A4 page if the T...

Page 955: ...Bit 5 1 Bit 4 1 24 hours If there is a file waiting for transmission the machine does not go to Energy Saver mode during the selected period After transmitting the file if there is no file waiting for transmission the machine goes to the Energy Saver mode 6 7 Not used Do not change System Switch 16 SP No 1 101 023 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Parallel Broadcasting 0 OFF 1 ON 1 The machine sends messages...

Page 956: ...canner page memory is extended to 12 MB But the SAF memory decreases to 18 MB 7 Special Original mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form or letterhead which has a colored or printed background change this bit to 1 Original 1 and Original 2 can be selected in addition to the Text Text Photo and Photo modes System Switch 1A SP No 1 101 027 No FUNCTION COMMENT...

Page 957: ...is not deleted the next transmission cannot be received This prevents overwriting communication records before the machine can print them 1 If the buffer memory of the communication records for the Journal is full fax communications are still possible But the machine will overwrite the oldest communication records Note This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal printout is enabled but t...

Page 958: ... to receive messages from any sender that includes an RTI or CSI and to block messages from senders that do not include an RTI or CSI change this bit to 1 then enable Authorized Reception Otherwise keep this bit at 0 default setting 5 7 Not used Do not change the settings System Switch 1F SP No 1 101 032 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Not used Do not change the settings 1 Report printout after an original...

Page 959: ...CHES I fax Switch 00 SP No 1 102 001 FUNCTION COMMENTS No Original Width of TX Attachment File This setting sets the maximum size of the original that the destination can receive Bits 3 7 are reserved for future use or not used 0 A4 1 B4 2 A3 3 6 Reserved 7 Not used 0 Off not selected 1 On selected If more than one of these three bits is set to 1 the larger size has priority For example if both Bi...

Page 960: ...s is set to 1 the higher resolution has priority For example if both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to 1 then the resolution is set for Bit 2 200 x 400 mm inch 7 This setting selects mm inch conversion for mail transmission 0 Off No conversion 1 On Conversion When on set to 1 the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters Unlike G3 fax ...

Page 961: ...l with only binary data is received a TIFF F file for example this setting is ignored and no header is printed Output from Attached Document at E mail TX Error 1 This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e mail attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended d...

Page 962: ...l sending of the Return Receipt Media accept feature 4 This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to confirm a reception 0 Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail 1 Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail which contains the media accept feature field 5 6 Not...

Page 963: ...nation folder for each e mail 1 Subject corresponding to mail post database 0 Standard subject 1 Mail post database subject The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following three cases 1 When the service technician sets the service software switch 2 When memory sending delivery specified by F code or SMTP reception is done 3 With relay broadcasting 1st stage with...

Page 964: ...1 102 008 I fax Switch 08 SP No 1 102 009 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception 0 7 This setting determines the amount of SAF Store and Forward memory SAF stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location and also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed When the amount of SAF memory available falls below this setting mail can no longer be...

Page 965: ...ge the settings SP No 1 102 014 I fax Switch 0E Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 015 I fax Switch 0F SP No 1 102 016 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files 0 This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output immediately 0 Off Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery 1 On Files received via SMTP are delive...

Page 966: ...plit because the size of the paper is smaller than the size of the document received When A5 is used to print an A4 size document for example 1 Repetition of data when the received page is longer than the printer paper 0 OFF 1 ON 1 Default 10 mm of the trailing edge of the previous page are repeated at the top of the next page 0 The next page continues from where the previous page stopped without ...

Page 967: ...ng on the paper size available from the paper feed stations Refer to the table on the next page for how the machine chooses the paper width used in the setup protocol NSF DIS 1 The machine informs the transmitting machine of the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and 4 above Printer Switch 02 SP No 1 103 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1st paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled...

Page 968: ...inted without length reduction Page separation threshold Printer Switch 03 bits 4 to 7 1 Incoming page length is reduced when printing Maximum reducible length Printer Switches 04 bits 0 to 4 1 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 7 Page separation setting when sub scan compression is forbidden 00 0F 0 15 mm Hex Default 6 mm Page separation threshold with reduction disabled with switch 03 0 abo...

Page 969: ...0 to 4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 mm 0 0 0 0 1 5 mm 0 0 1 0 0 20 mm 1 1 1 1 1 155 mm 0 4 For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper Maximum reducible length Paper length 0 75 x N x 5mm 5 6 Length of the duplicated image on the next page when page separation has taken place Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 4 mm Bit 6 1 Bit 5 0 10 mm Bit 6 0 Bit 5 1 15 mm Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 Not used 7 Not used Do not ...

Page 970: ... COMMENTS 0 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 List of destinations in the Communication Failure Report for broadcasting 0 All destinations 1 Only destinations where communication failure occurred 1 Only destinations where communication failure occurred are printed on the Communication Failure Report 5 7 Not used Do not change the settings Printer Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings...

Page 971: ... Page separation 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 If all paper sizes in the machine require page separation to print a received fax message the machine does not print the message Substitute Reception is used After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette the machine automatically prints the fax message 3 4 Printing the sample image on reports Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 The upper half only Bit 4 0 Bit 3 1 50 reducti...

Page 972: ...e images from other manufacturers fax machines frequently 2 Duplex printing 0 OFF 1 ON 1 The machine always prints received fax messages in duplex printing mode 3 Binding direction for Duplex printing 0 Left binding 1 Top binding 0 Sets the binding for the left edge of the stack 1 Sets the binding for the top of the stack 4 7 Not used Do not change the settings 4 3 4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES Communi...

Page 973: ...the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression 6 JBIG compression method Transmission 0 Basic mode priority 1 Optional mode priority Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression 7 Closed network reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Reception will not go ahead if the polling ID code of the remote terminal does not match the polling ID code of the loc...

Page 974: ... is checked transmission will always go ahead This function does not work when dialing is done from the external telephone 4 5 Not used Do not change the setting 6 7 Maximum printable page length available Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 No limit Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 B4 364 mm Bit 7 1 Bit 6 0 A4 297 mm Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Not used The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre mes...

Page 975: ...Hang up 0 The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is received 1 The machine will send DCN and hang up if it receives RTN or PIN This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is being used 4 7 Not used Do not change the settings Communication Switch 03 SP No 1 104 004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 Maximum number of page retransmissions in a G3 memory transmission 00 FF Hex times This sett...

Page 976: ... transmission begins from the page where transmission failed the previous time 1 Transmission begins from the first page using normal memory transmission 1 7 Not used Do not change the settings Communication Switch 0B Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 0C Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 0D SP No 1 104 014 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 The available memory ...

Page 977: ...o FF Hex unit 2 s e g 06 H 12 s This value is the minimum time that the machine waits before it dials the next destination Communication Switch 0F Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 10 SP No 1 104 017 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 7 Memory transmission Maximum number of dialing attempts to the same destination 01 FE Hex times Communication Switch 11 Not used do not change the settin...

Page 978: ...onverts the scanned data or stored data in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the set up protocol DIS NSF before transmission 1 5 Not used Do not change the factory settings 6 7 Available unit of resolution in which fax messages are received Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 mm Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 inch Bit 7 1 Bit 6 0 mm and inch default Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Not used For the best performance do not change t...

Page 979: ...abled 1 Enabled 0 Polling transmission to another maker s machine using the SEP Selective Polling signal is disabled 1 SUB reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Confidential reception to another maker s machine using the SUB Sub address signal is disabled 2 PWD reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Disables features that require PWD Password signal reception 3 6 Not used Do not change the factory settings 7...

Page 980: ... protocol On Off 0 On 1 Off If the PABX does not support V 8 V 34 protocol procedure set this bit to 1 to disable V 8 Example If 0 is the PSTN access code set bit 0 to 1 When the machine detects 0 as the first dialed number it automatically disables V 8 protocol Alternatively if 3 is the PSTN access code set bit 3 to 1 Communication Switch 1C SP No 1 104 029 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Extension acce...

Page 981: ...it 1 1 Bit 0 1 Not used 0 0 The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication 0 1 The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T 30 protocol 1 0 Used for testing The monitor speaker is on all through the communication Make sure that you reset these bits after testing 2 Monitor speaker during memory transmission 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 The monitor speaker is enabled during memory trans...

Page 982: ...on 7 Not used Do not change the setting G3 Switch 02 SP No 1 105 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 G3 protocol mode used 0 Standard and non standard 1 Standard only Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate with machines that send T 30 standard frames only 1 Disables NSF NSS signals these are used in non standard mode communication 1 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Short p...

Page 983: ... modem rate after receiving a PPR if the following condition is met in communications at 14 4 12 0 9 6 and 7 2 kbps NTransmit Number of transmitted frames NResend Number of frames to be retransmitted 1 When using ECM the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs PPR CTC These are ECM protocol signals This bit is not effective in V 34 communications 5 Modem rate used...

Page 984: ...d 4 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 Switch 05 SP No 1 105 006 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Tx modem rate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps 0 0 0 1 2 4k 0 0 1 0 4 8k 0 0 1 1 7 2k 0 1 0 0 9 6k 0 1 0 1 12 0k 0 1 1 0 14 4k 0 1 1 1 16 8k 1 0 0 0 19 2k 0 3 1 0 0 1 21 6k These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this...

Page 985: ...itial modem rate is set at these speeds 6 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 Switch 06 SP No 1 105 007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps 0 0 0 1 2 4k 0 0 1 0 4 8k 0 0 1 1 7 2k 0 1 0 0 9 6k 0 1 0 1 12 0k 0 1 1 0 14 4k 0 3 0 1 1 1 16 8k These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during recep...

Page 986: ... 33 0 1 0 0 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V 33 0 1 0 1 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V33 V 34 4 7 Other settings Not used The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode If V 34 is not selected V 8 protocol must be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit2 G3 Switch 07 SP No 1 105 008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 P...

Page 987: ...2 1 High Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange Also try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs Communication error with error codes such as 0 20 0 23 etc Modem rate fallback occurs frequently This setting is not effective in V 34 communications 4 PSTN cable equ...

Page 988: ...ncellation of high speed RX if carrier signal lost while receiving 0 Off 1 On This switch setting determines if high speed receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when receiving during non ECM mode 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 Maximum allowable frame interval during image data reception 0 5 s 1 13 s This bit set the maximum interval between EOL end of line signals and the maximum i...

Page 989: ...ttings G3 Switch 0C Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 0D Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 0E SP No 1 105 015 Set CNG send time interval Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3 second CNG interval High order bit 3000 2250ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F 3000 ms N FF 2250 ms 0 7 Low order bit 00 0E 3000 3700ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nm...

Page 990: ...an optional G3 interface unit G3 3 switches are the same as for G3 2 switches G3 2 Switch 00 SP No 1 106 001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Monitor speaker during communication tx and rx Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 Disabled Bit 1 0 Bit 0 1 Up to Phase B Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 All the time Bit 1 1 Bit 0 1 Not used 0 0 The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication 0 1 The monitor speaker is on up to phase B ...

Page 991: ...g G3 2 Switch 02 SP No 1 106 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 G3 protocol mode used 0 Standard and non standard 1 Standard only Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate with machines that send T 30 standard frames only 1 Disables NSF NSS signals these are used in non standard mode communication 1 4 Not used Do not change the settings 5 Use of modem rate history for transmission ...

Page 992: ...Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14 4 kbps or lower 3 ECM frame size 0 256 bytes 1 64 bytes Keep this bit at 0 in most cases 4 CTC transmission conditions 0 After one PPR signal received 1 After four PPR signals received ITU T standard 0 When using ECM in non standard NSF NSS mode the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after ...

Page 993: ...COMMENTS 0 3 Training error detection threshold 0 F Hex 0 15 bits If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this threshold the machine informs the sender that training has succeeded 4 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 05 SP No 1 106 006 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Tx modem rate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps 0 0 0 1 2 4k 0 0 1 0 4 8k 0 0 1 1 7 2k 0 1 0 0 9 6k 0 3 0 1 0...

Page 994: ... These bits set the initial modem type for 9 6 and 7 2 kbps if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds 6 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 06 SP No 1 106 007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps 0 0 0 1 2 4k 0 0 1 0 4 8k 0 3 0 0 1 1 7 2k These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception Use a lower setting if high speeds pose probl...

Page 995: ...G3 switch 03 bit2 Modem types available for reception Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 0 0 1 V 27ter 0 0 1 0 V 27ter V 29 0 0 1 1 V 27ter V 29 V 33 0 1 0 0 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V 33 4 7 0 1 0 1 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V33 V 34 The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode If V 34 is not selected V 8 protocol must be disabl...

Page 996: ...ion error Modem rate fallback occurs frequently This setting is not effective in V 34 communications 2 3 PSTN cable equalizer rx mode Internal Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 None Bit 3 0 Bit 2 1 Low Bit 3 1 Bit 2 0 Medium Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 High Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange Also try using the cable equal...

Page 997: ...wable carrier drop during image data reception Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 200 ms Bit 1 0 Bit 0 1 400 ms Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 800 ms Bit 1 1 Bit 0 1 Not used These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time Try using a longer setting if error code 0 22 is frequent 2 Select cancellation of high speed RX if carrier signal lost while receiving 0 Off 1 On This switch setting determines if high speed receiving end...

Page 998: ...0 20 ITU T T 30 recommendation The first line should come within 5 s of CFR 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0B Not used do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0C Not used do not change the settings 4 3 7 IP FAX SWITCHES IP Fax Switch 00 SP No 1 111 001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Not used Do not change this setting 1 IP Fax Transport 0 TCP 1 UDP Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP Fax ...

Page 999: ...hat the telephone number from the sender matches the registered telephone number in this machine If this confirmation fails the line is disconnected IP Fax Switch 01 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Select IP FAX Delay Level Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Setting 0 0 0 0 Level 0 0 0 0 1 Level 1 0 0 1 0 Level 2 0 0 1 1 Level 3 0 3 Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring...

Page 1000: ...eed for IP Fax communication 2 SIP transport setting 0 TCP 1 UDP This bit switch sets the transport that has priority for receiving IP Fax data This function is activated only when the sender has both TCP and UDP 3 CCM connection 0 No CCM connection 1 CCM connection When 1 is selected only the connection call message with H 323 or no tunneled H 245 is transmitted via CCM 4 Message reception select...

Page 1001: ... switching 1 G3 standard only Enables disables switching between G3 standard and G3 non standard 2 Not used Do not change this setting 3 ECM frame size selection at transmitting 0 256byte 1 64byte Selects the ECM frame size for sending 4 DIS detection times for echo prevention 0 1 time 1 2 times Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes 5 CTC transmission selection 0 PPRx1 1 PPRx4 When 0 i...

Page 1002: ...ot change these settings IP Fax Switch 05 SP No 1 111 006 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Modem bit rate setting for transmission Sets the modem bit rate for transmission The default is 0110 14 4K bps Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 1 2400 bps 0 0 1 1 4800 bps 0 0 1 1 7200 bps 0 1 0 0 9600 bps 0 1 0 1 12 0 Kbps 0 1 1 0 14 4 Kbps 0 1 1 1 16 8 Kbps 1 0 0 0 19 2 Kbps 1 0 0 1 21 6 Kbps 0 3 1 0 1 0 24 0 Kbps ...

Page 1003: ...1 V17 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 0 V34 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 1 Not used V34 is not supported for IP Fax communication 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 06 SP No 1 111 007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Modem bit rate setting for reception Sets the modem bit rate for reception The default is 0110 14 4K bps Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 1 2400 bps 0 0 1 0 4800 bps 0 0 1 1 7200 bps 0 1 0 0 9600 bps 0 1 0 1 12...

Page 1004: ...t is 0100 V27ter V29 V17 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 0 1 V27ter 0 0 1 0 V27ter V29 0 0 1 1 V27ter V29 V33 invalid 0 1 0 0 V27ter V29 V17 0 1 0 1 V27ter V29 V17 V34 4 7 V34 is not supported for IP Fax communication IP Fax Switch 07 SP No 1 111 008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 TSI information 0 Not added 1 Added Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS S 1 DCN transmission setting at T1 Transmits or do...

Page 1005: ...Space CSI transmission setting at no CSI registration 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted When 0 is selected frame data is enabled When 1 is selected the transmitted data is all spaces 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 08 SP No 1 111 009 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 T1 timer adjustment Adjusts the T1 timer The default is 00 35 seconds Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 35 sec Bit 1 0 Bit 0 1 40 sec Bit...

Page 1006: ...x Switch 09 SP No 1 111 010 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Network I F setting for SIP connection 0 IPv4 1 IPv6 Selects the connection type IPV4 or IPV6 to connect the SIP server 1 Network I F setting for Fax communication 0 Same setting as SIP server connection 1 Automatic setting 0 The I F setting for Fax communication follows the setting for SIP server connection 1 The negotiation between the SIP serve...

Page 1007: ...wing addresses describe settings for the standard NCU Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 e g 680500 to 680600 for the settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from 5 to 7 e g 680700 for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit Address Function Country Area code for NCU parameters Use the Hex value to program the country area code directly into this address or use the de...

Page 1008: ... contains FF 680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit high byte 680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 680509...

Page 1009: ...me for silent period after ring back tone detected HIGH 20 ms 680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit high byte 680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit high byte 680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is dis...

Page 1010: ...val LOW 680521 PABX wait interval HIGH 20 ms 680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms 680523 PABX ringback tone off detection time 20 ms If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680524 PABX detection time for silent period after ringback tone detected LOW 20 ms 680525 PABX detection time for silent period after ringback tone detected HIGH 20 ms If both addresses contain FF H...

Page 1011: ...us tone detection time 20 ms 680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges and number of cycles required for detection a setting of 4 cycles means that ON OFF ON or OFF ON OFF must be detected twice Tolerance Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 75 Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 50 Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 25 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 12 5 Bits 7 6 5 4 number of ...

Page 1012: ...contains FF the machine pauses for the pause time 68053D 68053E Belgium See Note 2 68053D International dial wait interval LOW 68053E International dial wait interval HIGH 20 ms 68053F Country dial tone upper frequency limit HIGH 680540 Country dial tone upper frequency limit LOW If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680541 Country dial tone lower frequency limit HIGH 680542 Co...

Page 1013: ... the OHDI relay 1 ms See Notes 3 6 and 8 SP2 103 012 parameter 11 68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3 SP2 103 013 parameter 12 68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3 SP2 103 014 parameter 13 68054D Time between final OHDI relay closure and DO relay opening or closing 1 ms See Notes 3 6 and 8 SP2 103 015 parameter 14 This parameter is only valid in Europe 68054E Minimum ...

Page 1014: ...less than 5dBm and should not exceed the setting at 680552h above See Note 5 680554 PSTN DTMF tone attenuation level after dialling N x 0 5 3 5 dBm SP2 103 022 parameter 21 See Note 5 680555 ISDN DTMF tone attenuation level after dialling dBm x 0 5 See Note 5 680556 Not used Do not change the settings 680557 Time between 68054Dh NCU parameter 14 and 68054Eh NCU parameter 15 1 ms This parameter tak...

Page 1015: ...t set a number more than 7 in the UK 68055E Progress tone detection level and cadence detection enable flags Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 25 0 dBm Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 1 35 0 dBm Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 0 30 0 dBm Bit 7 1 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 40 0 dBm Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 0 49 0 dBm Bits 2 0 See Note 2 68055F To 680564 Not used Do not change the settings 680565 Long distance call prefix HIGH BCD 680566 Long...

Page 1016: ... required length of the first ring 20 ms See Note 4 SP2 103 008 parameter 07 680578 Minimum required length of the second and subsequent rings 20 ms SP2 103 009 parameter 08 680579 Ringing signal detection reset time LOW SP2 103 010 parameter 09 68057A Ringing signal detection reset time HIGH 20 ms SP2 103 011 parameter 10 68057B to 680580 Not used Do not change the settings 680581 Interval betwee...

Page 1017: ...H tone detection is disabled 6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit high byte 6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit low byte BCD Hz If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms 20 ms Factory setting 200 ms 6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequency upper limit high byte 6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection frequency upper limit ...

Page 1018: ...tocol tone 800Hz detection frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency lower limit high byte 6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI...

Page 1019: ...d Do not change the settings 6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 Not used Bit 4 V 34 protocol dump 0 Simple 1 Detailed default Bits 5 to 7 Not used 6805C8 to 6805D9 Not used Do not change the settings 6805DA T 30 T1 timer 1 s 6805E0 bit 3 Maximum wait time for post message 0 12 s 1 30 s 1 Maximum wait time for post message EOP EOM MPS can be changed to 30 s Change this bit to 1 if communication errors occur freque...

Page 1020: ...gh 6805E4 Bit 1 sets the level of the call signal Bit 3 sets the call signal impedance Bit 3 1 RZ 1 Composite 0 Auto Bit 0 1 Fixed 0 Use RDTP Bit 0 sets the ring detection method Bit 1 sets the ring detection method when fixed Bit 1 1 Use RDTN Here is a summary of the voltages for the detection of off hook for DP detection Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2 75 V 6805E5 0 0 1 0 5 5 ...

Page 1021: ...if bit 0 1 or 68053B if bit 2 1 on time hex code unit 20 ms 68050C if bit 0 1 or 68053C if bit 2 1 off time hex code unit 20 ms 3 Pulse dial parameters addresses 68054A to 68054F are the values for 10 pps If 20 pps is used the machine automatically compensates 4 The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2 5 wavelengths after the time specified by this parameter 5 The calculated level must be b...

Page 1022: ... e g 800Hz tone for AI short protocol refer to the setting at 6805B5h Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h 8 68054A 68054D 68054E The actual inter digit pause pulse dial mode is the sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A 68054D and 68054E ...

Page 1023: ...ss book that you want to program 4 For the fax parameter select Fax Dest for the E mail parameter select E mail then press Start Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green 5 The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed Press the bit number that you wish to change 6 To scroll through the parameter switches either 7 Select the next switch press Next or Select the previous switch Pre...

Page 1024: ...ications with that terminal until the results are better If the setting is Disabled the NCU parameter 01 setting is used Do not use settings other than listed on the left 5 7 Cable equalizer Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 None Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 1 Low Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 0 Medium Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 High Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 Disabled Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher freq...

Page 1025: ... 0 1 2400 0 0 1 0 4800 0 0 1 1 7200 0 1 0 0 9600 0 1 0 1 12000 0 1 1 0 14400 0 1 1 1 16800 1 0 0 0 19200 1 0 0 1 21600 1 0 1 0 24000 1 0 1 1 26400 1 1 0 0 28800 0 3 1 1 0 1 31200 If training with a particular remote terminal always takes too long the initial modem rate may be too high Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these bits For the settings 14 4 or kbps slower Switch 04 bit 4 must be cha...

Page 1026: ...3 0 Bit 2 1 Second DIS or NSF Bit 3 1 Bit 2 0 Not used Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 Disabled 0 1 Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering with the set up protocol at the start of transmission The machine will then wait for the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used 4 V 8 protocol 0 Off 1 Disabled If transmissions to a specific destina...

Page 1027: ... do not change the settings Switch 05 Not used do not change the settings Switch 06 Not used do not change the settings Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings E mail Parameters The initial settings of the following e mail parameters are all 0 all parameters disabled Switch 00 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 M...

Page 1028: ...elections of Bits 00 01 02 Switch 01 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Original width of e mail attachment A4 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A4 1 Original width of e mail attachment B4 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as B4 2 Original width of e mail attachment A3 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A3 3 6 Not used Do not c...

Page 1029: ...attachment 200 x 400 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 200 x 400 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 Line resolution of e mail attachment 400 x 400 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 400 x 400 5 6 Not used Do not change these settings 7 Designates the bits to reference for original size of e mail attachments 0 Registered Bit 0 to 6 1...

Page 1030: ...firmation to a message when transmitting This machine updates the reception capability to the address book when receiving 1 7 Not used Do not change these settings Switch 05 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Directr transmission selection to SMTP server 0 ON 1 OFF Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to SMTP server 1 7 Not used Do not change these settings Switch 06 Not used do not change the set...

Page 1031: ... 2 bit switches Not used 6800A0 to 6800AF H G3 3 bit switches Not used 6800D0 H User parameter switch 00 SWUER_00 Not used 6800D1 H User parameter switch 01 SWUSR_01 Not used 6800D2 H User parameter switch 02 SWUSR_02 Bit 0 Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 Center mark printing on received copies This switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Disabl...

Page 1032: ...e image on reports 0 Off 1 On 6800D5 H User parameter switch 05 SWUSR_05 Bit 0 Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Bits 1 and 2 Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages Paper end toner end jam and during night mode Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 The machine receives all the fax messages Bit 2 0 Bit 1 1 The machine receives the fax message...

Page 1033: ...sed 6800DB H User parameter switch 11 SWUSR_0B Bits 0 and 1 Not used Bit 2 White original detection 0 Off 1 On alarm and alert message on the LCD Bit 3 Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0 Off receive 1 On not receive Bit 5 Not used Bit 6 Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0 Off 1 On Bit 7 Not used 6800DC H User parameter switch 12 SWUSR_0C Not used 6800DD H...

Page 1034: ...t 2 Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4 LT size paper is not available 0 A3 has priority 1 B4 has priority Bits 3 to 7 Not used 6800E1 H User parameter switch 17 SWUSR_11 Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick Speed dials is selected for broadcasting 0 Not needed 1 Needed Bits 3 to 6 Not used Bit 7 Press Start key witho...

Page 1035: ...rinted on the user parameter list 0 Off 1 On Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E4 H User parameter switch 20 SWUSR_14 Bit 0 Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0 Off 1 On Bit 1 Not used Bits 2 to 5 Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax LAN fax driver Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 min 0 0 0 1 1 min 1 1 1 0 14 min 1 1 1 1 15 min Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E5...

Page 1036: ...cceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03 This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user see system switch 02 Bits 5 to 7 Not used 6800EA H and 6800EB H User parameter switches 26 and 27 SWUSR_1A and 1B Not used 6800EC H User parameter switch 28 SWUSR_1C Xxxxx 6800ED H User parameter switch 29 SWUSR_1D xxxxxx 6800EE H and 6800EF H User parameter switches 30 a...

Page 1037: ...umber ISDN G4 Not used 680208 to 68021B H PSTN 1 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII See the following note 68021C to 68022F H PSTN 2 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII Not used 680230 to 680246 H PSTN 3 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII Not used 680247 to 680286 H TTI 1 Max 64 characters ASCII See the following note 680287 to 6802C6 H TTI 2 Max 64 characters ASCII Not used 6802C7 to 680306 H TTI 3 Max 64 characters A...

Page 1038: ...ad only 680406 H Suffix BCD 680407 H Version BCD 680408 H Year BCD 680409 H Month BCD 68040A H Day BCD 68040B to 68040F Option G3 board G3 3 ROM information Read only 68040B H Suffix BCD 68040C H Version BCD 68040D H Year BCD 68040E H Month BCD 68040F H Day BCD 680410 H G3 1 Modem ROM version Read only 680412 H G3 2 Modem ROM version Read only 680414 H G3 3 Modem ROM version Read only 680420 H Num...

Page 1039: ...E H SIP digest authentication password Max 128 characters ASCII 68940E H Gateway address information Max 7100 characters ASCII 68AFCA H Stand by port number for H 232 connection 68AFCCH Stand by port number for SIP connection 68AFCE H RAS port number 68AFD0 H Gatekeeper port number 68AFD2 H Port number of data waiting for T 38 68AFD4 H Port number of SIP server 68AFD6 H Priority for SIP and H 323 ...

Page 1040: ...it interval low 69ECC8 H Wait interval high x 20 ms Default values NA EU Asia Finland Dial tone frequency upper limit 650 Hz 650 Hz 650 Hz Dial tone frequency lower limit 360 Hz 360 Hz 360 Hz Dial tone detection time 2000 ms 540 ms 1000 ms Dial tone reset time 10 s 10 s 10 s Dial tone continuous tone time 2000 ms 2000 ms 2000 ms Dial tone permissible drop time 340 ms 300 ms 340 ms Wait interval 40...

Page 1041: ...contains the ROM and SRAM Also the FCU has an NCU circuit Fax Options 1 Extra G3 Interface option This provides one more analog line interface This allows full dual access Two extra G3 interface options can be installed 2 Memory Expansion This expands the SAF memory and the page memory used for image rotation without this expansion the page memory is not big enough for image rotation at 400 dpi so...

Page 1042: ...nd all the fax options FACE3 Fax Application Control Engine CPU Data compression and reconstruction DCR DMA control Clock generation DRAM backup control Modem FAME V 34 V33 V17 V 29 V 27ter V 21 and V 8 DRAM The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows SAF memory 4MB Working memory 8MB Page memory 4MB The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery ...

Page 1043: ...is changed the system data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board ROM 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage 2MB 16bit x 1MB 1MB 16bit x 512K SRAM The 256KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery Memory Back up A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM in case the base copier s main switch is turned off Switch...

Page 1044: ...ifications of the SG3 board do not change NCCP New Communication Control Processor Controls the SG3 board CPU RU30 DPRAM Dual Port RAM Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block DMA controller JBIG DSP V34 modem RL5T892 Includes the DTMF Receiver function DCR for MH MR MMR and JBIG compression and decompression FROM 1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage SDRA...

Page 1045: ...Boards SM 155 D346 Fax Option Type 5000 D346 AFE Analog Front End Analog processing CODEC COder DECoder A D D A conversions for modem REG Generates 3 3 V from the 5V from the FCU ...

Page 1046: ...F independent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit s scanner bit switches not the copier s SP modes Then the FCU converts the data to mm format and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to store it in the SAF memory If image rotation will be done the image is rotated in page memory before compression At the time of transmission the FCU decompresses the stored...

Page 1047: ...mits the data to the line JBIG Transmission Memory transmission If the receiver has JBIG compression the data goes from the DCR to the QM Coder Then the NCU transmits the data to the line When an optional G3 unit SG3 is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type JBIG compression is available but only for the PSTN 2 line Immediate transmission If the receiver has JBIG compression the data goe...

Page 1048: ... the IPU If the optional G3 unit is installed the line that the message comes in on depends on the telephone number dialled by the other party the optional G3 unit has a different telephone number from the main fax board JBIG Reception When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN 1 the standard analog line the data is sent to the QM CODER for decompression Then the data is stored in the page me...

Page 1049: ...es at once Option Available Line Type Available protocol Combinations Standard only PSTN G3 Extra G3 Interface Unit single PSTN PSTN G3 G3 Extra G3 Interface Unit double PSTN PSTN PSTN G3 G3 G3 5 4 2 DOCUMENT SERVER The base copier s scanner scans the original at the selected resolution The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board Then the controller stores the data in...

Page 1050: ...sed The document is compressed with MMR and stored Up to 9 000 pages can be stored 1 file Up to 1 000 pages from the fax application Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted Scanned documents are given a name automatically such as FAX001 But it is possible to change the file name user name and password Up to 30 files can be selected at once The compression method of the fa...

Page 1051: ...f the sender Reply To Destination requested for reply To Mail address of the destination Bcc Backup mail address Subject From CSI or RTI Fax Message No xxxx Content Type Multipart mixed Attached files image tiff Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 bit 8 bit Quoted Printable Message Body MIME converted TIFF F MIME standards specify how files are attached to e mail messages Direct SMTP Transmission ...

Page 1052: ...f attempts to the same destination Secure Internet Transmission SMTP Authentication User Tools System Settings File Transfer SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP User Tools System Settings File Transfer POP Before SMTP Mail Reception This machine supports three types of e mail reception POP3 Post Office Protocol Ver 3 IMAP4 Internet Messaging Access Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol For d...

Page 1053: ...d for delivery then the machine responds with an error User Tools Facsimile Features E mail Settings SMTP RX File Delivery Settings 4 If the quick dial speed dial or group dial entry is incorrect the mail transmission is lost and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report Auth E mail RX In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX the addresses of senders must b...

Page 1054: ...Charset US ASCII ISO 8859 X Other types cannot be handled and some garbage may appear in the data Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 bit 8 bit Quoted Printable 2 MIME decoding errors 3 File format not recognized as TIFF F format 4 Resolution document size or compression type cannot be accepted Remaining SAF Capacity Error The machine calls the server but does not receive e mail if the remaining S...

Page 1055: ...ff for attached files Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 Bit 8 bit Quoted Printable Mail body text part RELAY ID xxxx xxxx 4 digits for an ID code RELAY 01 X 01 Message body MIME converted TIFF F E Mail Options Sub TX Mode The following features are available as options for mail sending entering a subject designating the level of importance confirming reception of the mail Subject and Level of Im...

Page 1056: ...onfirmation of Reception From 4 None CSI RTI not registered Error Return Receipt processed error RTI or CSI of the station designated for delivery Mail delivery RTI or CSI of sender Mail sending from G3 memory Mail address of sender Memory sending Mail delivery memory transfer SMTP receiving and delivery From Mail address of sender SMTP receiving and delivery Off Ramp Gateway Fax Message No File N...

Page 1057: ... Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet LAN Fax Boards E mail Options The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received correctly or not This function is enabled only when I FAX switch 02 Bit 4 is set to 1 This confirmation is done in four steps 1 Send request for confirmation of mail reception To enable or disable this request known as MDN 2 Sub TX Mode E m...

Page 1058: ... Mail Receipt Request for Receipt Confirmation and Sending Mail Receipt Response After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt the mail receiver s journal is annotated with two hyphens in the Result column and an A in the Mode column 3 Receiving the Return Receipt Mail After the mail sender receives a return receipt the information in the mail sender s journal about ...

Page 1059: ...tions to the first 4 destinations are not shown Exceptions If one of the communications had an error the Result column will indicate E even if subsequent communications were OK If two of the communications had an error the Journal will indicate the destination for the first error only Report Sample ...

Page 1060: ...0 0 0 0 Level 0 0 0 0 1 Level 1 0 0 1 0 Level 2 0 0 1 1 Level 3 0 3 Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring on the network If TCP UDP is enabled on the network raise this setting on the T 30 machine Increasing the delay time allows the recovery of more lost packets If only UDP is enabled increase the number of redundant packets Level 1 2 3 Redund...

Page 1061: ... 11 7 ins ARDF Face up Single sided document Length 128 1200 mm 5 0 47 2 ins Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Double sided document Length 128 432 mm 5 0 17 inch Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Scanning Method Flat bed with CCD Resolution G3 8 x 3 85 lines mm Standard 8 x 7 7 lines mm Detail 8 x 15 4 line mm Fine See Note1 16 x15 4 line mm Super Fine See Note 1 200 x 100 dpi Standard 200 x 200 dpi De...

Page 1062: ...0 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Automatic fallback I O Rate With ECM 0 ms line Without ECM 2 5 5 10 20 or 40 ms line Memory Capacity ECM 128 KB SAF Standard 4 MB With optional Expansion Memory 28 MB 4 MB 24 MB Page Memory Standard 4 MB Print 2 MB Scanner 2 MB With optional Expansion Memory 12 MB 4 MB 8 MB Print 8 MB Scanner 4 MB 6 1 2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS The following table shows th...

Page 1063: ...lities of the document memory will change after the Expansion Memory are installed Without the Expansion Memory With the Expansion Memory Memory Transmission file 400 400 Maximum number of page for memory transmission 1000 1000 Memory capacity for memory transmission Note1 320 2240 Measured using an ITU T 1 test document Slerexe letter at the standard resolution the auto image density mode and the...

Page 1064: ...o the server Condition ITU T 1 test document Selerexe Letter MTF correction OFF TTI None Resolution 200 x 100 dpi Communication speed 10 Mbps Correspondent device E mail server Line conditions No terminal access Document Size Maximum message width is A4 LT To use B4 and A3 width IFAX SW00 Bit 1 B4 and or Bit 2 A3 must be set to 1 E mail File Format Single multi part MIME conversion Image TIFF F MH...

Page 1065: ...6 Authentication Method SMTP AUTH POP before SMTP A POP Remark The machine must be set up as an e mail client before installation Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also be e mail clients or some features will not work e g Autorouting ...

Page 1066: ...al size Maximum A3 or 11 x 17 DLT Maximum scanning size Standard A3 297mm x 432mm Irregular 297mm x 1200mm Transmission protocol Recommended T 38 Annex protocol TCP UDP IP communication Compatible machines IP Fax compatible machines IP Fax transmission function Specify IP address and send fax to an IP Fax compatible fax through a network Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the p...

Page 1067: ...346 6 4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION Component Code No Remarks MBU 7 FCU 6 Speaker D346 1 Included with fax unit Expansion Memory G578 2 Optional CCU I F Board 3 SG3 Board D346 4 Optional SG3 Board D346 5 Optional Handset Type 1018 B433 NA only Also used with Ap C1 ...

Page 1068: ......

Page 1069: ...PAPER FEED UNIT PB3040 D351 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 1070: ......

Page 1071: ...4 1 4 LIFT PAPER END AND RELAY SENSORS 5 1 5 PAPER FEED UNIT 6 1 6 PICK UP PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 7 2 DETAILS 8 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 8 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 8 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 9 2 2 PAPER FEED 10 2 3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION 11 2 4 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK UP ROLLER RELEASE 13 2 5 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION 14 2 5 1 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION 14 2 5 2 PAPER END A...

Page 1072: ......

Page 1073: ...ocedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 1074: ......

Page 1075: ...Rear Cover SM 1 D351 Paper Feed Unit PB3040 D351 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 REAR COVER 1 Securing brackets A x 1 each 2 Rear cover B x 2 ...

Page 1076: ... 1 LIFT MOTORS 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Lift motors A B x 2 x 1 each 1 2 2 UPPER AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Upper paper feed gear unit A x 3 x 1 3 Upper paper feed clutch bracket B x 1 x 2 bushing x 1 4 Upper paper feed clutch C ...

Page 1077: ...r paper feed clutch bracket D x 1 bushing x 1 x 2 6 Lower paper feed clutch E x 1 1 2 3 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Paper feed motor A x 1 x 2 When installing the paper feed motor make sure that the gear of the paper feed motor holds the timing belt B ...

Page 1078: ...Main Board D351 4 SM 1 3 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Main board A All s x 2 snap pin x 2 ...

Page 1079: ... LIFT PAPER END AND RELAY SENSORS 1 Paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit 2 Vertical transport sensor bracket A x 1 3 Vertical transport sensor B x 1 4 Paper feed sensor bracket C x 1 5 Paper feed sensor D x 1 6 Paper end sensor filler E 7 Paper end sensor F x 1 8 Lift sensor G x 1 ...

Page 1080: ... SM 1 5 PAPER FEED UNIT 1 Right cover A x 2 2 Vertical transport guide B of the paper feed unit 1 Pull the tray 3 or 4 2 Paper guide C 3 Paper feed unit D x 2 x 1 x 2 When replacing the paper feed unit of tray 4 do the same ...

Page 1081: ...Separation Rollers SM 7 D351 Paper Feed Unit PB3040 D351 1 6 PICK UP PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1 Paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit 2 Roller holder A x 1 3 Pick up roller B 4 Paper feed roller C 5 Separation roller D x 1 ...

Page 1082: ...r tray 2 Paper size switch Upper tray 3 Pick up roller Upper tray 4 Paper feed roller 5 Vertical transport roller 6 Separation roller 7 Tray lift arm 8 Lift arm shaft 9 Bottom plate 10 End plate Listed above are the components of tray 1 upper tray Tray 2 lower tray has the same components as tray 1 ...

Page 1083: ...lenoid 8 Lower paper feed clutch 9 Vertical transport guide switch 10 Paper end sensor 11 Vertical transport sensor 1 12 Paper feed sensor 13 Paper size switch Lower tray 14 Paper size switch Upper tray Listed above are the components of tray 1 upper tray except for the right cover switch and anti condensation heater there is only one each of these for the entire unit Tray 2 lower tray has the sam...

Page 1084: ...hanism is used Paper Feed Methods in the Core Technology Manual Drive Path Tray 3 upper tray and tray 4 lower tray have identical paper feed systems The feed motor A drives all the rollers in the unit The paper feed clutch B controls the pick up roller C paper feed roller D and separation roller E ...

Page 1085: ...The actuator B is moved by the end plate C 0 Not pushed 1 Pushed Models Switch Location North America Europe Asia SW4 SW3 SW2 DLT A3 SEF 1 A3 DLT SEF 1 1 1 0 LG B4 SEF 2 B4 LG SEF 2 1 1 1 A4 SEF A4 SEF 0 0 1 B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 0 0 LT A4 LEF 3 A4 LT LEF 3 0 1 1 B5 Exe LEF 4 B5 Exe LEF 4 1 0 1 A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 1 0 1 Detects either DLT SEF or A3 SEF depending on the setting of SP5 181 7 or 11 2 Detects e...

Page 1086: ...ing of SP5 181 9 or 13 The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed For non standard paper sizes if they are not visible on the user tool screen for selecting paper sizes then set SP 5 112 to 1 If the user selects one of these sizes auto paper size selection is disabled ...

Page 1087: ... remove jammed paper easily When the paper tray A is not in the machine the separation roller B is away from the paper feed roller C and the pick up roller stays in its upper position When the paper tray is pushed into the machine it pushes the release lever E This causes the pick up roller D to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and causes the reverse roller B to move up and contact...

Page 1088: ... semicircles and it is engaged with the lift arm shaft via gears The paper height sensors detect the paper size depending on the position of the two semicircles The list shown below shows the detection combination of the two sensors The paper remaining status bar is displayed in the tray selection icon on the LCD Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 A Paper height sensor 2 B 100 Status bar x 4 OF...

Page 1089: ...END AND BOTTOM PLATE The paper stack raises the paper end feeler A and the paper end sensor B deactivates if there is some paper in the paper tray When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler A drops into the cutout in the tray bottom plate At this time the paper end sensor B activates ...

Page 1090: ...e tray lift motor engages the pin C on the lift arm shaft D Then the tray lift arm lifts the tray bottom plate E until the paper lift sensor for the tray detects that the top of the stack is at the paper feed position When the tray is removed from the machine the connection between the coupling gear and lift arm shaft is disengaged and the tray bottom plate lowers ...

Page 1091: ...LCIT PB3050 D352 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 1092: ......

Page 1093: ...ED CLUTCH 5 1 6 PAPER FEED UNIT 6 1 7 MOTORS 7 1 7 1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 7 1 7 2 TRAY MOTOR 8 1 8 PICK UP FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 9 1 9 PAPER FEED PAPER END LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS 10 1 10 PAPER FEED 11 2 DETAILS 12 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 12 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 12 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 13 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS 14 2 2 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK UP ROLLER REL...

Page 1094: ......

Page 1095: ...ocedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 1096: ......

Page 1097: ... Pull the LCT drawer If the right tray comes up with the left tray push the right tray into the LCT 2 Left tray A x 2 3 Remove the right tray B while pressing down the stopper C When reinstalling the tray set the tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray in making sure to keep the tray level ...

Page 1098: ...PAPER STORAGE SIDE 1 Tray Left and Right Tray 2 Rear fence A x 1 3 Rear fence bracket B x 2 4 Paper height sensors C x 1 each 1 2 2 END FENCE HP SENSOR PAPER END SENSOR 2 1 Bottom cover D x 1 2 End fence HP sensor E x 1 3 Paper end sensor 2 paper storage side F x 1 ...

Page 1099: ...Changing the Tray Size SM 3 D352 LCT PB3050 D352 1 3 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE 1 Remove the fence screws x 5 2 Change the position of the fences Before fastening the screws set paper in the tray ...

Page 1100: ...Main Board D352 4 SM 1 4 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover Tray Lift Motor 2 Main board A All s x 2 snap x 2 ...

Page 1101: ...1 5 1 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Tray Lift Motor 2 Stack transport clutch A x 1 x 1 1 5 2 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Tray Lift Motor 2 Paper feed gear unit A x 3 x 1 3 Paper feed clutch bracket B x 1 x 2 bushing x 1 4 Paper feed clutch C ...

Page 1102: ...Paper Feed Unit D352 6 SM 1 6 PAPER FEED UNIT 1 Right cover A 2 Open the vertical guide plate B 3 Guide plate C 4 Pull the LCT drawer D 5 Paper feed unit E x 2 x 1 ...

Page 1103: ...Motors SM 7 D352 LCT PB3050 D352 1 7 MOTORS 1 7 1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Securing brackets A x 1 each 2 Rear cover B x 2 3 Tray lift motor C x 1 x 3 ...

Page 1104: ...Motors D352 8 SM 1 7 2 TRAY MOTOR 1 Rear cover Tray Lift Motor 2 Tray motor A x 1 x 2 When installing the tray motor make sure that the gear of the tray motor holds the timing belt B ...

Page 1105: ...eed and Separation Rollers SM 9 D352 LCT PB3050 D352 1 8 PICK UP FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1 Paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit 2 Separation roller A x 1 3 Roller holder B x 1 4 Feed roller C and pick up roller D ...

Page 1106: ...AND RELAY SENSORS 1 Paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit 2 Vertical transport sensor bracket A x 1 x 1 3 Relay sensor B 4 Paper feed sensor bracket C 5 Paper feed sensor D 6 Paper end feeler E 7 Paper end sensor holder F hook x 3 8 Paper end sensor G x 1 hook x 3 9 Lift sensor H x 1 hook x 3 ...

Page 1107: ...FEED This products uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism The paper feed unit consists of the pick up roller A paper feed roller B separation roller C and relay rollers There is a torque limiter in the back of the separation roller ferrite powder type ...

Page 1108: ... COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Pick up Roller 2 Paper Feed Roller 3 Relay Sensor 4 Separation Roller 5 Paper Height Sensors 1 2 3 6 Lower Limit Sensor 7 Paper End Sensor 2 8 End Fence HP Sensor 9 Paper Height Sensors 4 5 ...

Page 1109: ... 5 Pick up solenoid 6 Right tray lock solenoid 7 Vertical guide switch 8 Lift sensor 9 Relay sensor 10 Paper end sensor 1 11 Paper feed sensors 12 Side fence sensor 13 Tray lift motor 14 Paper height sensor 1 2 3 15 Tray set switch 16 Lower limit sensor 17 Left tray set switch 18 End fence HP sensor 19 Paper end sensor 2 20 Paper height sensors 4 5 ...

Page 1110: ...ide paper feed side of the tray has been used up If there is a paper stack in the left side paper storage side this is moved into the paper feed side If there is no paper stack in the left side paper end is indicated 10 S4 Lift Detects when the paper is at the correct paper feed height 8 S5 S7 Paper Height 1 2 3 Detects the amount of paper remaining in the right side of the tray 14 S8 Lower Limit ...

Page 1111: ... of the tray 20 Switches SW1 Vertical Guide Detects whether the right cover is open 7 SW2 Tray Set Switch Detects whether the tray is correctly set 15 SW3 Left Tray Set Switch Detects whether the left tray is correctly set 17 Magnetic Clutches MC1 Paper Feed Drives the paper feed roller 4 MC2 Stack Transport Drives the rear fence of the paper storage side 2 Solenoids SOL1 Pick up Pushes the pick u...

Page 1112: ...release automatically When the paper tray A is not inside the machine the separation roller B is away from the paper feed roller C and the pick up roller D stays in the upper position When the paper tray is set into the machine it pushes the release lever E This causes the pick up roller D to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and the separation roller B to move up and contact the pa...

Page 1113: ...otor stops lifting the plate when the upper limit sensor actuator enters the sensor Electrical Component Layout When paper in the tray is used up the pick up roller is gradually lowered and the actuator leaves the lift sensor E When this happens the lift motor begins turning again The tray will then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor again When the tray is removed from the ...

Page 1114: ... 1 to 3 Left Tray Paper storage side Paper height sensor 4 and 5 Paper end sensor 2 Right Tray Paper Height Sensor Amount of paper 1 2 3 Paper End Sensor Display No of Line 100 OFF OFF OFF ON 4 70 OFF OFF ON ON 3 30 OFF ON ON 2 10 ON ON 1 Paper End OFF 0 Left Tray Paper Height Sensor Amount of paper 4 5 Paper End Sensor Display No of Line 100 OFF OFF OFF 4 70 ON OFF OFF 3 30 ON ON OFF 2 Paper End ...

Page 1115: ...nd sensor 1 A detects when copy paper in the paper feed side runs out When there is paper in the tray the paper pushes up the feeler B and the actuator enters the sensor When paper runs out the feeler drops in to cutout C and the actuator leaves the sensor and the machine detects that there is no paper in the tray ...

Page 1116: ...lectrical Component Layout does not switch on so drive from the tray motor only transfers to the relay roller and not to the fence mechanism While the stack is in motion it pushes the side fence D aside and the side fence sensor E detects that the fence is open After the stack has been moved all the way across a spring in the side fence moves the side fence back and the side fence sensor detects t...

Page 1117: ...1200 SHEET LCIT RT3000 D353 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 1118: ......

Page 1119: ... TRAY LIFT MOTOR 5 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 6 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD 6 1 4 2 LCT SET SWITCHES 6 1 4 3 DOWN SWITCH 7 1 4 4 PAPER FEED PAPER END TRAY LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS 7 1 4 5 STACK SENSOR 9 1 5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE 10 2 DETAILS 11 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 11 2 1 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 11 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 12 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS 12 2 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 15 2 2 PAPER FE...

Page 1120: ......

Page 1121: ...dure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring Clamp ...

Page 1122: ......

Page 1123: ...Covers SM 1 D353 1200 Sheet LCT RT3000 D353 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 COVERS 1 1 1 REAR COVER 1 Cover A x 1 2 Rear cover B x 3 1 1 2 RIGHT DOOR 1 Right lower cover A x 2 2 Right door B x 1 ...

Page 1124: ...Covers D353 2 SM 1 1 3 FRONT AND TOP COVERS 1 Right door p 1 Rear Cover 2 Switch cover A x 2 3 Front cover B x 4 4 Top cover C x 2 ...

Page 1125: ...53 1200 Sheet LCT RT3000 D353 1 2 PAPER FEED 1 2 1 PICK UP PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1 Open the right door 2 Sensor bracket A x 2 3 Rollers B C D x 1 each B Paper feed roller C Pick up roller D Separation roller ...

Page 1126: ...353 4 SM 1 3 DRIVE 1 3 1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Bracket A x 1 x 2 bushing x 1 3 Paper feed clutch B x 1 x 1 1 3 2 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 1 Paper feed motor A x 2 ...

Page 1127: ...Drive SM 5 D353 1200 Sheet LCT RT3000 D353 1 3 3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Tray lift motor unit A x 4 x 1 ...

Page 1128: ...ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Main board x 2 all s 1 4 2 LCT SET SWITCHES Rear 1 Rear cover p 1 Rear Cover 2 Switch bracket A x 3 3 Rear LCT set switch B Front 1 Front cover p 2 Front and Top Covers ...

Page 1129: ...set switch A x 1 1 4 3 DOWN SWITCH 1 Front cover p 2 Front and Top Covers 2 Switch base A x 2 x 1 3 Down button B spring x 1 4 Down switch C hook 1 4 4 PAPER FEED PAPER END TRAY LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS 1 Front cover p 2 Front and Top Covers 2 Top Cover Front and Top Covers ...

Page 1130: ...ont ground plate B x 1 5 Paper feed unit C x 2 x 1 x 1 6 Paper feed unit cover D x 5 x 1 Before you re install the paper feed unit cover make sure that the pick up solenoid holds the pick up roller lever a correct b incorrect and the pick up roller works properly ...

Page 1131: ...7 Sensors E F G H x 1 hooks each E Tray lift sensor F Relay sensor G Paper feed sensor H Paper end sensor 1 4 5 STACK SENSOR 1 Open the right door 2 Paper feed unit p 7 Paper Feed Paper End Tray Lift and Relay Sensors 3 Sensor bracket A x 2 4 Stack sensor B x 1 ...

Page 1132: ...tion 3 Remove the front and rear side fences A B x 1 each 4 Install the side fences in the correct position A4 LEF LT LEF B5 LEF 5 Pull the end fence C for B5 size paper as shown x 1 if the the side fences are adjusted for B5 size paper 6 Close the right door 7 Turn on the main power switch and then go into the SP mode 8 Input the correct paper size for the1200 sheet LCT with SP5181 017 ...

Page 1133: ...nsor 4 Paper Feed Roller 5 Paper Feed Sensor 6 Paper End Sensor 7 Pick up Roller 8 Tray Lift Motor 9 Paper Height Sensor 1 10 Interlock Switches 11 Paper Height Sensor 2 12 Sub Paper Height Sensor 13 Tray Down Switch 14 Paper Height Sensor 3 15 Paper Tray 16 Lower Limit Sensor 17 Stack Sensor 18 Separation Roller 19 Front LCT Set Switch 20 Relay Sensor 5 21 Relay Roller ...

Page 1134: ...7 Main Board 8 Tray Down Switch 9 Relay Sensor 10 Tray Lift Sensor 11 Pick up Roller Solenoid 12 Paper Feed Sensor 13 Paper End Sensor 14 Paper Height Sensor 1 15 Paper Height Sensor 2 16 Sub Paper Height Sensor 17 Paper Height Sensor 3 18 Lower Limit Sensor 19 Stack Sensor 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS Symbol Name Function Index No Motors M1 Paper Feed Drives all rollers 4 ...

Page 1135: ...aper end 13 S4 Tray Lift Detects when the paper is at the correct paper feed height 10 S5 Paper Height 1 14 S6 Paper Height 2 15 S7 Sub Paper Height 16 S8 Paper Height 3 Detects the amount of paper remaining in the tray 17 S9 Lower Limit Detects when the tray is completely lowered to stop the tray lift motor 18 S10 Stack Detects a when the tray has moved down to the paper supply position after pap...

Page 1136: ...CT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set 1 SW3 Rear LCT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set 2 SW4 Down Lowers the tray to the paper supply position if pressed 8 Magnetic Clutches MC1 Paper Feed Drives the paper feed unit 3 Solenoids SOL1 Pick up Pushes the pick up roller up or down 11 PCBs PCB1 Main Controls the LCT and communicates with the copier printer 7 ...

Page 1137: ...Component Layout SM 15 D353 1200 Sheet LCT RT3000 D353 2 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Tray Lift Motor 2 Paper Feed Motor 3 Pick up Roller 4 Paper Feed Clutch 5 Relay Roller 6 Separation Roller 7 Tray Drive Belt ...

Page 1138: ...er The paper feed clutch transfers drive to the paper feed roller E pick up roller G and separation roller H The rotating pick up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the stack The separation roller H in contact with the feed roller only allows one sheet out of the tray As soon as the paper feed sensor F detects the leading edge of the paper it switches off the pick ...

Page 1139: ... mode Tray lowering conditions Paper supply position In the following conditions the tray lift motor lowers the tray until the stack sensor D turns on this is the correct tray position for supplying paper Just after the paper end sensor turns on Just after the down switch is pressed by the user Tray lowering conditions Full down position In the following condition the tray lift motor lowers the tr...

Page 1140: ...low 0 outputs from three sensors paper height sensor 1 A 2 B 3 D and sub paper height sensor C Amount of paper PH S 1 PH S 2 PH S 3 Sub PH S Indicator on the operation panel 100 0 0 0 0 Four lines 0 0 1 70 0 0 0 1 Three lines 30 0 1 Two lines 10 1 One line End No line 0 No interruption low 1 Interruption high No checking PH S Paper Height Sensor ...

Page 1141: ...The paper end sensor E monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the stack When the last sheet feeds the cutout F is exposed and the paper end sensor receives no reflected light from below because there is no paper As a result this signals paper end ...

Page 1142: ......

Page 1143: ...PRINTER SCANNER OPTION TYPE 5000 D381 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 23 01 05 2011 Added Note to refer to the D009 SM section 4 11 1 for Bit Switch info ...

Page 1144: ......

Page 1145: ...NTER ENHANCE SCANNER ENHANCE OPTIONS 10 1 2 5 APPLICATION MERGE 12 1 3 OTHER OPTIONS 14 1 3 1 OVERVIEW 14 1 3 2 POSTSCRIPT 3 15 1 3 3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER 16 1 3 4 IEEE1284 16 1 3 5 IEEE 802 11A G G WIRELESS LAN 17 1 3 6 BLUETOOTH 20 1 3 7 GIGABIT ETHERNET AND USB2 0 21 1 3 8 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS 22 2 SERVICE TABLES 23 2 1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE 23 2 1 1 SP TABLES 23 2 2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE 24 ...

Page 1146: ...R SPECIFICATIONS 29 4 1 1 PRINTER CONTROLLER 29 4 1 2 USB SPECIFICATIONS 30 4 1 3 IEEE 802 11A G G 30 4 1 4 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS 30 4 1 5 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS 31 4 2 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES 32 4 2 1 PRINTER 32 4 2 2 PRINTER DRIVERS 32 4 2 3 UTILITY SOFTWARE 32 4 2 4 SCANNER 33 ...

Page 1147: ...gs provide special information Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine ...

Page 1148: ......

Page 1149: ... Type 5000 1 DOS D381 Printer Unit Type 5000 1 DOS Scanner Enhance D381 RPCS Printer Unit Type 5000 1 DOS Scanner Enhance Printer Enhance D381 Printer Enhance Option Type 5000 Merge 2 1 D381 Scanner Enhance Option Type 5000 Merge 2 1 1 1 2 OTHER OPTIONS The options listed in the table below are used in both D009 D012 series machines as well as D011 D013 series machines No Item Slots D377 File Form...

Page 1150: ...e A SD card slot 2 Install then remove D377 Browser Unit Type D SD card slot 2 Install then remove D377 VM Card Type F SD card slot 2 D362 Memory Unit Type G 256 MB Controller Board For more details about merging applications from SD card slot 2 to 1 see Printer Enhance Scanner Enhance Options in this chapter 1 1 3 BOARD SD CARD SLOTS The machine controller box has one board slot and two SD card s...

Page 1151: ... controller plate SD Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot SD Card 1 RPCS Printer Unit Printer Unit Printer Scanner Unit Data Overwrite Security PostScript3 2 Service slot for firmware version updates Installing the optional browser unit VM card or HDD encryption unit Moving applications to an SD card in slot 1 Downloading uploading NVRAM contents ...

Page 1152: ... SM Board Slot Slot Board 3 File Format Converter MLB D377 Bluetooth Interface Unit B826 IEEE 802 11a g g D377 IEEE 1284 Interface Board B679 Gigabit Ethernet G381 Only one of these boards can be installed at one time ...

Page 1153: ... Optional memory is required for each unit Printer Enhance Option Scanner Enhance Option Three Main Units RPCS Printer Unit Type 5000 For customers who require only basic copying and printing and the RPCS printer language The 256 MB memory is required Printer Unit Type 5000 For customers who do not require the extended scanning features but need more printing capability both RPCS and PCL printer l...

Page 1154: ...ption can be used with the RPCS Unit the Printer Unit or the Printer Scanner Unit Enhance Options There are two enhance options Printer Enhance Option Type 5000 Updates the RPCS unit by adding PCL Scanner Enhance Option Type 5000 Updates the RPCS unit or Printer Unit by adding the advanced scanning features 1 2 2 KIT CONTENTS Check the accessories and their quantities against the list below and th...

Page 1155: ...s Yes Yes No 3 SD Card 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Keytop Set NA 2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Keytop Set EU 2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 The 256 Memory is a separate option and it is not provided in the kits However one memory unit is required for the installation of every print unit 2 The number of keytops provided varies Keytops Kit Copy Document Server Printer Scanner RPCS Unit 1 1 Printer Unit 1 1 1 ...

Page 1156: ...opy Document Server Printer Scanner Printer Scanner Unit 1 1 1 1 Printer Enhance Unit 1 Scanner Enhance Unit 1 1 2 3 PRINTER SCANNER INSTALLATION Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord 1 Remove the controller board 1 x 2 ...

Page 1157: ...except RPCS Printer Kit HDD Installation in the Service Manual of the Model AL C1 4 Reinstall the controller board 5 Remove the SD card slot cover 3 x1 6 Insert the Printer Scanner SD card 4 in SD card slot 1 7 Reattach the cover 8 Connect the LAN cable to the NIC connection 9 Connect the USB cable to the USB connection ...

Page 1158: ... and or USB function To enable the NIB function enter the SP mode and set SP5985 001 On Board NIC to 1 Enable To enable the USB function enter the SP mode and set SP5985 002 On Board USB to 1 Enable 1 2 4 PRINTER ENHANCE SCANNER ENHANCE OPTIONS Accessory Check Refer to the Common Accessory Table in this chapter Installation Application Merge The installation of the printer enhance option and scann...

Page 1159: ...ministrator Tools Firmware Version Next 15 Turn the copier off again then reattach the cover 16 Return the copied SD card to the customer for safekeeping or tape it to the faceplate of the controller To undo an option update 1 Turn the main switch off 2 Confirm that the RPCS Unit or Printer Unit SD card is in SD card Slot 1 3 Put the original option SD card Printer Enhance Option or Scanner Enhanc...

Page 1160: ...t you can identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure later 1 2 5 APPLICATION MERGE This machine has two SD card slots only However more than two optional applications are supplied for this machine Always keep SD card slot 2 vacant for servicing except VM Card Type F Because of this SD card merge is required if a customer wants to use many applications Consider the following limitation...

Page 1161: ...to use into one SD card Destination Card The destination card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards The VM Card Type F cannot be merged nor moved to another SD card This card must be installed in slot 2 Case 2 PostScript3 is installed Merge all applications which the customer wants to use into the PostScript3 SD card ...

Page 1162: ...ize it Check All Connections at the end of this section Board Slot This slot 3 is used for one of the optional board connections only one can be installed IEEE1284 IEEE802 11a g g Wireless LAN Bluetooth Gigabit Ethernet or File Format Converter SD Card Slots Slot 1 1 is used for PostScript3 or Data Overview Security Unit Slot 2 2 is used for installing the VM Card HDD Encryption Unit Browser Unit ...

Page 1163: ...edure 1 Remove the slot cover 1 x 1 2 Turn the SD card label face 2 to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 1 until you hear a click 3 Attach the slot cover 1 x 1 4 Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal 3 to the front door 5 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option Check All Connections at the end of this section ...

Page 1164: ...Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below SP No Title Setting SP5 836 001 Capture Function 0 Off 1 On 1 SP5 836 002 Panel Setting 0 5 Check the operation 6 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option Check All Connections at the end of this section 1 3 4 IEEE1284 Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can on...

Page 1165: ...is section 1 3 5 IEEE 802 11A G G WIRELESS LAN Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time IEEE 802 11a g g Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Bluetooth 1 Remove the slot cover 1 from the board slot x 2 2 Install the wireless LAN board Knob screw x 2 into the board slot 3 Make sure that ...

Page 1166: ...e the cables and clamp them x 8 Make sure that the cables are not slack Keep them wired tightly along the covers You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that generates strong magnetic fields Put the machine as close as possible to the access point UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the ...

Page 1167: ...to unlock encoded data There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys WEP Selects Active or Inactive Inactive is default Range of Allowed Settings 64 bit 10 characters 128 bit 26 characters 9 Transmission Speed Press the Next button to show more settings Then select the transmission speed for the mode Auto 11 Mbps 5 5 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 Mbps default Auto This setting should match the distance between the closes...

Page 1168: ...settings allowed for your country 5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00 UP mode Name Function SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used for the WEP Key entry 1 3 6 BLUETOOTH Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure Y...

Page 1169: ...ooth card 5 Install the Bluetooth card adaptor into the Bluetooth board 6 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 1 3 7 GIGABIT ETHERNET AND USB2 0 Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time IEEE 802 11a g g Wireless LAN IEEE1284 IE...

Page 1170: ... recognizes the installed board for USB2 0 User Tools Printer Features List Test Print Configuration Page 1 3 8 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS Plug in the power cord Then turn on the main switch Enter the printer user mode Then print the configuration page User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config Page All installed options are shown in the System Reference column ...

Page 1171: ...Bit Switch settings 002 Bit SW 2 00H 003 Bit SW 3 00H 004 Bit SW 4 00H 005 Bit SW 5 00H 006 Bit SW 6 00H 007 Bit SW 7 00H 008 Bit SW 8 00H 1003 Clear setting 001 Initialize Printer System Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode 003 Delete Program DFU 1004 Print Summary Prints the printer summary sheet 1005 Display Version Displays the version of the controller firmware ...

Page 1172: ...s of the scanned image If the machine has scanned the edge of the original create a margin 0 to 5 0 1 mm step 1009 Remote scan disable Enables or disables the TWAIN function 0 or 1 0 0 Enable 1 Disable 1010 Non Display Clear Light PDF Displays or does not display the clear light PDF function 0 or 1 0 0 Display 1 Not display 1011 Org Count Disp Displays or does not display the original counter 0 or...

Page 1173: ... panel Range 5 lowest ratio 95 highest ratio 1 Comp 1 5 95 5 to 95 20 1 step 2 Comp 2 5 95 5 to 95 40 1 step 3 Comp 3 5 95 5 to 95 65 1 step 4 Comp 4 5 95 5 to 95 80 1 step 5 Comp 5 5 95 5 to 95 95 1 step Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF 2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel 1 Compression Ratio Normal image 5 to 95...

Page 1174: ...t Yes Yes Stored Print Yes Yes Store and Print Yes Yes PDF Direct Print Yes Yes Bonjour Rendez vous Yes Yes Windows Active Directory Yes Yes PictBridge No No DDNS Support Yes Yes Mail to Print No Yes PCL resident font Yes Yes Tray Parameter Change from WebImageMonitor No Yes Imposition Settings No No Creep Adjustment No No Crop Mark No No Mobile Driver Yes Yes ...

Page 1175: ...2 SCANNER FEATURES Function A C4 5 AL C1 Scan to E mail Yes Yes E mail message attached Yes Yes Subject attached Yes Yes SMTP Auth Yes Yes POP before SMTP Yes Yes Scan to SMB Yes Yes Scan to FTP Yes Yes Scan to URL Yes Yes Scan to NCP Yes Yes Scanned file naming Yes Yes Reference Setting Yes Yes Scan file type selection Yes Yes Single TIFF Yes Yes Single JPEG Gray Scale Yes Yes ...

Page 1176: ...ression PDF Yes Yes Multi page TIFF PDF Yes Yes Multi page High Compression PDF Yes Yes LDAP Support Yes Yes Email Address search Yes Yes FAX address search Yes Yes Preview before transmission TX Preview No Yes PDF Encryption No Yes Drop out Color Send No Yes Twain Scan Yes Yes ...

Page 1177: ...3 300 600 dpi PCL5e 300 600 dpi Resolution Driver PCLXL 300 600 dpi PCL TrueType 10 Intellifont 35 International 13 Resident Fonts PS3 Option fonts PS3 Std Ethernet RJ 45 network port 10Base T 100Base TX USB 2 0 Connectivity Option IEEE802 11a g g Wireless LAN Bluetooth IEEE1284 Centronics Parallel Gigabit Ethernet Network Protocols TCP IP IPX SPX AppleTalk Auto Switching RAM Maximum MS model 512 ...

Page 1178: ...d 802 11a 5 GHz 802 11b 2 4 GHz 802 11g 2 4 GHz Data Transfer Speed 802 11a 54 Mbps 802 11b 11 Mbps 802 11g 54 Mbps Security Standards IEEE 802 11 WEP WPA WPA2 IEEE 802 11i Enterprise Mode 4 1 4 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS Transmission Specifications Based on Bluetooth V1 1 Data Transfer Speed 1 Mbps Profile Hard Copy Cable Replacement Profile HCRP Serial Port Profile SPP BIP Distance Between Devices...

Page 1179: ...AIN scanner Available scanning Resolution Range 100 200 300 400 600 dpi When used as a network delivery scanner Scan to Folder Scan to Email or Document Server storage Grayscales 8 bits pixel Interface Ethernet 10 100BASE TX Wireless LAN 802 11a g g Compression Method MH MR MMR Binary Picture Processing JPEG Grayscale Processing PDF High Compression Processing MS model only Video Memory Capacity M...

Page 1180: ...vers for Windows NT 4 0 are only for the Intel x86 platform There is no Windows NT 4 0 printer driver for the PowerPC Alpha or MIPS platforms The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers except for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Vista which uses Microsoft PS A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver 4 2 3 UTILITY SOFTWARE Software Description Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 ...

Page 1181: ...00 XP This driver allows use of the LAN Fax functions by installing the LAN Fax driver Address Book and LAN Fax Cover Sheet Editor PS Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients Acrobat Reader A utility that allows reading PDF files 4 2 4 SCANNER The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD ROM Scanner Driver Network Twa...

Page 1182: ......

Page 1183: ...BRIDGE UNIT BU3030 D386 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 1184: ......

Page 1185: ...MENT 1 1 1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD 1 1 2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR 2 1 3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR 3 1 4 RELAY SENSOR 4 2 DETAILS 5 2 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 5 2 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 6 2 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 7 2 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 8 2 5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM 9 ...

Page 1186: ......

Page 1187: ...er switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual When taking apart the bridge unit first take the unit out of the copier Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 1188: ......

Page 1189: ...l Board SM 1 D386 Bridge Unit BU3030 D386 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD 1 Bridge unit Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Rear cover A x 2 3 Bridge unit control board B x 3 x 4 ...

Page 1190: ...it Drive Motor D386 2 SM 1 2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR 1 Bridge unit Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Rear cover Bridge Unit Control Board 3 Bracket A x 3 x 2 4 Bridge unit drive motor B x 4 x 1 ...

Page 1191: ...r SM 3 D386 Bridge Unit BU3030 D386 1 3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Bridge unit Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Rear cover Bridge Unit Control Board 3 Paper tray A 4 Exit guide B x 1 5 Tray exit sensor C x 1 ...

Page 1192: ...Relay Sensor D386 4 SM 1 4 RELAY SENSOR 1 Bridge unit Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Paper tray A 3 Relay sensor B x 1 ...

Page 1193: ...ut SM 5 D386 Bridge Unit BU3030 D386 2 DETAILS 2 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Upper Exit Roller 2 Tray Exit Sensor 3 Junction Gate 4 1st Transport Roller 5 Relay Sensor 6 2nd Transport Roller 7 Left Exit Roller 8 Paper Tray ...

Page 1194: ...Drive Layout D386 6 SM 2 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Left Exit Roller 2 2nd Transport Roller 3 1st Transport Roller 4 Upper Exit Roller 5 Bridge Unit Drive Motor ...

Page 1195: ...yout SM 7 D386 Bridge Unit BU3030 D386 2 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Left Guide Switch 2 Right Guide Switch 3 Junction Gate Solenoid 4 Tray Exit Sensor 5 Bridge Unit Control Board 6 Bridge Unit Drive Motor 7 Relay Sensor ...

Page 1196: ...it Checks for misfeeds 4 S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds 7 Switches SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened 2 SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened 1 Solenoids SOL1 Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to direct the paper to the upper tray on top of the bridge unit or to the finisher 3 PCBs PCB1 Bridge Unit Control Board Controls the bridge unit 5 ...

Page 1197: ...f the bridge unit or to the finisher depending on which has been selected If the junction gate solenoid has been activated the junction gate A points downward and directs the paper to the upper tray B dotted line path in illustration When the solenoid is off the junction gate points upward and the paper is fed out to the finisher C by the transport and left exit rollers solid line ...

Page 1198: ......

Page 1199: ...1 BIN TRAY BN3040 D389 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 1200: ......

Page 1201: ... AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 1 1 1 PAPER SENSOR 1 1 1 2 1 BIN CONTROL BOARD 2 2 DETAILS 3 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS 4 2 2 BASIC OPERATION 5 ...

Page 1202: ......

Page 1203: ...ocedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 1204: ......

Page 1205: ...mponents SM 1 D389 1 Bin Tray BN3040 D389 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 1 1 PAPER SENSOR 1 1 bin tray x 2 M3 x 16 2 1 bin sorter unit A 3 Paper sensor cover B x 2 4 Paper sensor C x 1 hook ...

Page 1206: ...Electrical Components D389 2 SM 1 1 2 1 BIN CONTROL BOARD 1 1 bin tray 2 1 bin sorter unit Paper Sensor 3 1 bin control board A x 1 x 3 ...

Page 1207: ...1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Exit Roller 2 Junction Gate 2 Solenoid 3 Paper Sensor 4 Paper Tray Junction Gate 2 is located in the main frame 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 1 bin Control Board 2 Junction Gate 2 Solenoid 3 Paper Sensor ...

Page 1208: ...ion Index No Sensor S1 Paper Detects whether there is paper on the tray 3 Solenoid SOL1 Junction Gate 2 Solenoid Controls junction gate 2 in the main frame 2 PCB PCB1 1 bin Control Board Controls the junction gate 2 solenoid and the LED that indicates when there is paper in the tray 1 ...

Page 1209: ...ion gate 2 solenoid turns on to switch junction gate 2 in the main frame to direct the paper to the 1 bin paper tray The junction gate 2 solenoid turns off at the appropriate time after the paper is directed to the 1 bin paper tray The paper sensor turns on when there is paper in the tray and the paper indicator turns on The tray can be opened for easier jam removal by swinging the tray to the lef...

Search results

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP 4000

Reviews:

Related manuals for Aficio MP 4000

Brands by name

Popular brands

Ricoh Aficio MP 4000, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP 4000

Reviews:

Related manuals for Aficio MP 4000

Brands by name

Popular brands